3. 第三巴拉基格巴利 3. Tatiyapārājikaṃ
1. 巴拉基格篇复注 · 370 段
通过身、语、意三门。已阐明,意思是已经开示、已经宣说、已经安立。巴利
Tīhīti kāyavacīmanodvārehi. Vibhāvitanti pakāsitaṃ, desitaṃ paññattanti vuttaṃ hoti.
第一制定因缘释论巴利
Paṭhamapaññattinidānavaṇṇanā
162 三次用城墙围起来扩建,就是指三次用城墙围护、使城市的地界得以扩展。因为变得广阔,是指每一牛鸣之地都变得宽阔。据说,波罗奈国王的王后怀了孕。她察觉后禀报了国王,国王便安排了安胎护养。她在妥善照料下,到了胎儿成熟之时进入产房。有福德的人通常在黎明时分分娩,她也是其中之一,所以在黎明时分产下了一块像紫胶薄片、又像日日春花一样的肉片。于是她想:“别的王后都生下像金像一样的儿子,而我身为王后却生下一块肉片,要是传到国王面前,我的名声就坏了。”因为害怕这种坏名声,她就把那块肉片放进一个容器里,盖上盖子,用王印封好,让人投入恒河水流中。刚一被丢弃,天神们便安排了守护。他们还用天然朱砂在一块金板上写下“波罗奈国王后之子”,系在上面。随后,那个容器没有受到波浪等危害,顺着恒河水流漂走了。巴利
162.Tikkhattuṃ pākāraparikkhepavaḍḍhanenāti tikkhattuṃ pākāraparikkhepena nagarabhūmiyā vaḍḍhanena. Visālībhūtattāti gāvutantaraṃ gāvutantaraṃ puthubhūtattā. Bārāṇasirañño kira (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.146; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 6. ratanasuttavaṇṇanā) aggamahesiyā kucchimhi gabbho saṇṭhāsi, sā ñatvā rañño nivedesi, rājā gabbhaparihāraṃ adāsi. Sā sammā parihariyamānā gabbhaparipākakāle vijāyanagharaṃ pāvisi. Puññavantīnaṃ paccūsasamaye gabbhavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sā ca tāsaṃ aññatarā, tena paccūsasamaye alattakapaṭalabandhujīvakapupphasadisaṃ maṃsapesiṃ vijāyi. Tato ‘‘aññā deviyo suvaṇṇabimbasadise putte vijāyanti, aggamahesī maṃsapesinti rañño purato mama avaṇṇo uppajjeyyā’’ti cintetvā tena avaṇṇabhayena taṃ maṃsapesiṃ ekasmiṃ bhājane pakkhipitvā paṭikujjitvā rājamuddikāya lañchetvā gaṅgāya sote pakkhipāpesi. Manussehi chaḍḍitamatte devatā ārakkhaṃ saṃvidahiṃsu. Suvaṇṇapaṭṭikañcettha jātihiṅgulakena ‘‘bārāṇasirañño aggamahesiyā pajā’’ti likhitvā bandhiṃsu. Tato taṃ bhājanaṃ ūmibhayādīhi anupaddutaṃ gaṅgāsotena pāyāsi.
那时,有一位苦行者依止一户牧牛人家,住在恒河岸边。一天清晨,他下到恒河里,看见那个容器漂过来,以为是粪扫衣,就把它捞了起来。接着他看见上面有字牌和王印封缄,打开一看,发现里面是一片肉。看到之后他心想:“这可能是胎儿,因为确实没有恶臭腐烂的迹象。”即使被水流冲来,它的体温也没有消失,而这样的体温应该属于有知觉的东西,所以他想“这可能是胎儿”。不过,因为福德之力,它没有恶臭,也没有像死胎那样腐烂。这样想过之后,他把肉片带回草庵,放在干净的地方。过了半个月,它变成了两块肉片。苦行者看到后,把两块都妥善安置。又过了半个月,每块肉片上各长出了五个肿包,形成了手、脚、头等的雏形。再过半个月,一块肉片变成了像金像一样的男孩,另一块变成了女孩。苦行者对这两个孩子生起了如同对亲生儿子般的爱。由于孩子们自身的福德因缘,从他的拇指中流出了乳汁。从那时起,他们便得到了乳汁食物。苦行者吃完饭,就把乳汁注入孩子们的口中。凡是进入他们肚子里的,都像放在宝器里一样清晰可见。就像最后生菩萨住在母胎时,菩萨母亲的腹部皮肤变得清澈透明一样,他们也是这样没有皮肤。另有人说:“他们的皮肤就像被缝合放置一样,彼此紧密相连。”就这样,因为无皮或皮肤紧贴,他们被称为“离车”。巴利
Tena ca samayena aññataro tāpaso gopālakakulaṃ nissāya gaṅgātīre viharati. So pātova gaṅgaṃ otiṇṇo taṃ bhājanaṃ āgacchantaṃ disvā paṃsukūlasaññāya aggahesi. Athettha taṃ akkharapaṭṭikaṃ rājamuddikālañchanañca disvā muñcitvā taṃ maṃsapesiṃ addasa. Disvānassa etadahosi ‘‘siyā gabbho, tathā hissa duggandhapūtibhāvo natthī’’ti. Udakappavāhenāgatassapi hi usmā na vigacchati, usmā ca nāma īdisāya saviññāṇakatāya bhaveyyāti ‘‘siyā gabbho’’ti cintesi. Puññavantatāya pana duggandhaṃ nāhosi sausumagatāya pūtibhāvo ca. Evaṃ pana cintetvā assamaṃ netvā naṃ suddhe okāse ṭhapesi. Atha aḍḍhamāsaccayena dve maṃsapesiyo ahesuṃ. Tāpaso disvā sādhukataraṃ ṭhapesi. Tato puna aḍḍhamāsaccayena ekamekissā pesiyā hatthapādasīsānamatthāya pañca pañca piḷakā uṭṭhahiṃsu. Atha tato aḍḍhamāsaccayena ekā maṃsapesi suvaṇṇabimbasadiso dārako, ekā dārikā ahosi. Tesu tāpasassa puttasineho uppajji, dārakānaṃ puññupanissayato aṅguṭṭhakato cassa khīraṃ nibbatti. Tato pabhuti ca khīrabhattaṃ alabhittha. Tāpaso bhattaṃ bhuñjitvā khīraṃ dārakānaṃ mukhe āsiñcati. Tesaṃ pana yaṃ yaṃ udaraṃ pavisati, taṃ sabbaṃ maṇibhājanagataṃ viya dissati. Carimabhave bodhisatte kucchigate bodhisattamātu viya udaracchaviyā acchavippasannatāya evaṃ te nicchavī ahesuṃ. Apare āhu ‘‘sibbitvā ṭhapitā viya nesaṃ aññamaññaṃ līnā chavi ahosī’’ti. Evaṃ te nicchavitāya vā līnacchavitāya vā ‘‘licchavī’’ti paññāyiṃsu.
苦行者养育着这些孩子,总是等到太阳升得很高才进村乞食,过了正午才回来。牧牛人们知道了他的这个情况,就对他说:“尊者,养育孩子是出家人的拖累。把孩子交给我们吧,我们来养,您去做自己的事就好。”苦行者答应了:“萨度。”第二天,牧牛人们把路修平,撒上花,竖起旗幡,一路奏着乐器来到草庵。苦行者说:“这些孩子有大福德,你们要用不放逸的心把他们养大。长大后让他们互相婚配,再用五种牛乳制品讨国王欢心,拿到土地,建起城市,在那里为王子灌顶。”说完就把孩子们交了出去。他们应诺说“好”,带着孩子回去抚养。孩子们长大后,玩耍打闹时用拳脚打别的牧童,被打的孩子就哭。父母问“为什么哭”,他们就说:“这些没爹没娘、苦行者养大的孩子,狠狠打我们。”于是,当初养育他们的那些父母也说:“这些孩子欺负、伤害别的孩子,不该再收留他们,该把他们赶走。”据说从那时起,那个方圆一百由旬的地方就被叫做“跋耆”。巴利
Tāpaso dārake posento ussūre gāmaṃ bhikkhāya pavisati, atidivā paṭikkamati. Tassa taṃ byāpāraṃ ñatvā gopālakā āhaṃsu – ‘‘bhante, pabbajitānaṃ dārakaposanaṃ palibodho, amhākaṃ dārake detha, mayaṃ posessāma, tumhe attano kammaṃ karothā’’ti. Tāpaso ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇi. Gopālakā dutiyadivase maggaṃ samaṃ katvā pupphehi okiritvā dhajapaṭākā ussāpetvā tūriyehi vajjamānehi assamaṃ āgatā. Tāpaso ‘‘mahāpuññā dārakā, appamādeneva vaḍḍhetha, vaḍḍhetvā aññamaññaṃ āvāhaṃ karotha, pañcagorasena rājānaṃ tosetvā bhūmibhāgaṃ gahetvā nagaraṃ māpetha, tattha kumāraṃ abhisiñcathā’’ti vatvā dārake adāsi. Te ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā dārake netvā posesuṃ. Dārakā vuḍḍhimanvāya kīḷantā vivādaṭṭhānesu aññe gopālakadārake hatthenapi pādenapi paharanti, te rodanti. ‘‘Kissa rodathā’’ti ca mātāpitūhi vuttā ‘‘ime nimmātāpitikā tāpasapositā amhe atīva paharantī’’ti vadanti. Tato nesaṃ posakamātāpitaropi ‘‘ime dārakā aññe dārake vihesenti dukkhāpenti, na ime saṅgahetabbā, vajjetabbā ime’’ti āhaṃsu. Tato pabhuti kira so padeso ‘‘vajjī’’ti vuccati yojanasataparimāṇena.
于是牧牛人们讨好了国王,取得了那片土地。他们在那里建起城市,给一个十六岁的王子灌了顶,立他做国王。有人说,他们之所以这样做,是因为他曾造下能得王位的业,又出生在没有分裂过的王族里,加上王子福德的威力推动、天神的护持。他们让男孩和女孩订了婚,并立下约定:不得从外面娶女子进来,这里的女子也不得嫁给任何人。他们第一次同房后,生下两个孩子,一个女儿和一个儿子。就这样一共十六次,每次都生下一对。后来这些孩子渐渐长大,那座城市已经容纳不下园林、游苑、住所和随从等种种受用,他们便三次向外扩建,每次扩展一牛鸣的距离。因为它一再变得广大,所以就得名毗舍离。因此说:因为三次扩大城墙围栏而变得广大,所以称为毗舍离。巴利
Atha taṃ padesaṃ gopālakā rājānaṃ tosetvā aggahesuṃ. Tattha ca nagaraṃ māpetvā soḷasavassuddesikaṃ kumāraṃ abhisiñcitvā rājānaṃ akaṃsu. Rajjasampattidāyakassa kammassa katattā asambhinne eva rājakule uppannattā ca rājakumārassa puññānubhāvasañcoditā devatādhiggahitā akaṃsūti keci. Dārakassa dārikāya saddhiṃ vāreyyaṃ katvā katikaṃ akaṃsu ‘‘bāhirato dārikā na ānetabbā, ito dārikā na kassaci dātabbā’’ti. Tesaṃ paṭhamasaṃvāsena dve dārakā jātā dhītā ca putto ca. Evaṃ soḷasakkhattuṃ dve dve jātā. Tato tesaṃ dārakānaṃ yathākkamaṃ vaḍḍhantānaṃ ārāmuyyānanivāsaṭṭhānaparivārasampattiṃ gahetuṃ appahontaṃ nagaraṃ tikkhattuṃ gāvutantarena gāvutantarena parikkhipiṃsu. Tassa punappunaṃ visālīkatattā ‘‘vesālī’’tveva nāmaṃ jātaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tikkhattuṃ pākāraparikkhepavaḍḍhanena visālībhūtattā vesālīti vuccatī’’ti.
这里说“这也是城”,是为了说明并不只是王舍城和舍卫城。其中“名为大林”等说法,是中部诵者和相应部诵者共同的注释。因为在中部注释和相应部注释里,都是按这个方式说的。但在长部注释里则说:“大林:城外有一片自生林,与雪山连成一体地存在着,因为它广大,所以就叫大林。在那片大林中,‘在重阁讲堂’:他们在那个树林里建立了一座僧园。在那里,他们安上顶饰,在柱子上建起楼阁,这楼阁通称重阁讲堂,如同天宫一样,因此整个僧园也就被称为重阁讲堂。”因为建在树林中间,所以说“依于林”。在园中:就是在僧园中。以鹅圆纹顶覆盖:就是用鹅圆纹覆盖,意思是呈鹅圆纹的形状。巴利
Idampi ca nagaranti na kevalaṃ rājagahasāvatthiyo yevāti dasseti. Tattha mahāvanaṃ nāmātiādi majjhimabhāṇakasaṃyuttabhāṇakānaṃ samānaṭṭhakathā. Majjhimaṭṭhakathāyañhi (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.146) saṃyuttaṭṭhakathāyañca (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.984-985) imināva nayena vuttaṃ. Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.359) pana ‘‘mahāvaneti bahinagare himavantena saddhiṃ ekābaddhaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ sayaṃjātaṃ vanaṃ atthi, yaṃ mahantabhāveneva mahāvananti vuccati, tasmiṃ mahāvane. Kūṭāgārasālāyanti tasmiṃ vanasaṇḍe saṅghārāmaṃ patiṭṭhāpesuṃ. Tattha kaṇṇikaṃ yojetvā thambhānaṃ upari kūṭāgārasālāsaṅkhepena devavimānasadisaṃ pāsādaṃ akaṃsu, taṃ upādāya sakalopi saṅghārāmo kūṭāgārasālāti paññāyitthā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vanamajjhe katattā ‘‘vanaṃ nissāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ārāmeti saṅghārāme. Haṃsavaṭṭakacchadanenāti haṃsavaṭṭakapaṭicchannena, haṃsamaṇḍalākārenāti attho.
关于“以多种方式”这句:在这里,“方式”一词是表示原因的说法,所以说“以多种原因”。意思是:这个身体,不论是有识还是无识,都是不净——以种种原因说明它这样也是不净、那样也是不净。“示现不净相而转起”:即依头发等,在那里也从颜色等方面,全面地示现不净相而转起。“令对身厌离的谈论”:即对自己和他人这个四大所造之身,生起厌离的谈论。“或已解脱”等,则是通过对比的方式,显示身体的不可意。其中,开头三句显示它不可见、没有坚实;中间四句显示它恶臭;最后一句显示它连一点点可爱之处都没有。“那么,此外”等,则是从正面、依其自性来显示不可意。欲:指微弱的贪染。贪:指强烈的贪染。“头发、身毛”等这个略说的内容,为了详细展示出来,所以说“即使那些”等。不净:因为远离了外来的净相,所以是不净。不洁:以它自身的本性就是不清净的。可厌:就像城里人对污秽之处那样,因为令人作呕,所以是可厌的。巴利
Anekapariyāyenāti ettha pariyāya-saddo kāraṇavacanoti āha ‘‘anekehi kāraṇehī’’ti, ayaṃ kāyo aviññāṇakopi saviññāṇakopi evampi asubho evampi asubhoti nānāvidhehi kāraṇehīti attho. Asubhākārasandassanappavattanti kesādivasena tatthāpi vaṇṇādito asubhākārassa sabbaso dassanavasena pavattaṃ. Kāyavicchandaniyakathanti attano parassa ca karajakāye vicchandanuppādanakathaṃ. Muttaṃ vātiādinā byatirekamukhena kāyassa amanuññataṃ dasseti. Tattha ādito tīhi padehi adassanīyatāya asārakatāya majjhe catūhi duggandhatāya, ante ekena lesamattenapi manuññatābhāvamassa dasseti. Atha khotiādinā anvayato sarūpeneva amanuññatāya dassanaṃ. Chandoti dubbalarāgo. Rāgoti balavarāgo. ‘‘Kesā lomādī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘yepi hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asubhāti āgantukena subhākārena virahitattā asubhā. Asucinoti attano sabhāveneva asucino. Paṭikūlāti nāgarikassa asucikaṭṭhānaṃ viya jigucchanīyattā paṭikūlā.
头发这东西,无论从颜色、形状、气味、来源还是所处位置来看,都是令人厌恶的。为了说明这一点,论师说“而它们……应当从五个方面来理解”。即使是在可口的粥碗或饭钵里,一旦看到类似头发颜色的东西,人们也会恶心地说:“这里面混了头发,拿走!”可见头发从颜色上就是令人厌恶的。夜里吃东西时,如果碰到像头发形状的akkavāka纤维或makacivāka纤维,同样会感到恶心,可见头发从形状上也是令人厌恶的。没有涂油、涂香、熏花等处理过的头发,它的气味本身就极其令人作呕,若丢进火里烧,气味就更恶心了。头发的颜色和形状也许还不算太令人厌恶,但气味绝对是令人厌恶的。就像幼儿的粪便,颜色像姜黄,形状也像姜黄团;又像扔在垃圾堆里膨胀的黑狗尸体,颜色像棕榈果,形状像撑开的圆鼓,牙齿像茉莉花蕾——这两样东西从颜色和形状来说也许还不算令人厌恶,但从气味来说绝对是令人厌恶的。同样,头发纵然从颜色和形状来说也许还不算令人厌恶,但从气味来说绝对是令人厌恶的。巴利
Kesā nāmete vaṇṇatopi paṭikūlā, saṇṭhānatopi gandhatopi āsayatopi okāsatopi paṭikūlāti dassento ‘‘so ca nesaṃ…pe… pañcahi kāraṇehi veditabbo’’ti āha. Manuññepi (visuddhi. 1.383; vibha. aṭṭha. 356) hi yāgupatte vā bhattapatte vā kesavaṇṇaṃ kiñci disvā ‘‘kesamissakamidaṃ, haratha na’’nti jigucchanti, evaṃ kesā vaṇṇato paṭikūlā. Rattiṃ paribhuñjantāpi kesasaṇṭhānaṃ akkavākaṃ vā makacivākaṃ vā chupitvā tatheva jigucchanti, evaṃ saṇṭhānatopi paṭikūlā. Telamakkhanapupphadhūpādisaṅkhāravirahitānañca kesānaṃ gandho paramajeguccho hoti, tato jegucchataro aggimhi pakkhittānaṃ. Kesā hi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikūlāpi siyuṃ, gandhena pana paṭikūlāyeva. Yathā hi daharassa kumārakassa vaccaṃ vaṇṇato haliddivaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānatopi haliddipiṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ, saṅkāraṭṭhāne chaḍḍitañca uddhumātakakāḷasunakhasarīraṃ vaṇṇato tālapakkavaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānato vaṭṭetvā vissaṭṭhamudiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ, dāṭhāpissa sumanamakuḷasadisāti ubhayampi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato siyā appaṭikūlaṃ, gandhena pana paṭikūlameva, evaṃ kesāpi siyuṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikūlā, gandhena pana paṭikūlāyevāti.
就像在不干净的地方、由村庄污水滋养长出来的可做汤的菜叶,城里人看了就恶心,不会去吃;同样,头发也是由脓、血、尿、粪、胆汁、痰等流溢之物所生,所以令人恶心——这是从来源上说头发可厌。
而这些所谓头发,就像粪堆上冒出来的菌菇,生在三十一种身体成分的堆积里;又像长在坟场、垃圾堆等处的蔬菜,像长在沟渠等处的莲花、睡莲等花,因为生长的地方不干净,所以极其可厌——这是从处所说头发可厌。
就像头发一样,一切身体成分也应当从颜色、形状、气味、来源、处所这五个方面来了知它们的可厌性,所以说“如此,身毛等”。“以五种五种分类”:这里应当看作外在复合词,意思是“它们有五种、五种分类”,所以叫“五种五种分类”。巴利
Yathā pana asuciṭṭhāne gāmanissandena jātāni sūpeyyapaṇṇāni nāgarikamanussānaṃ jegucchāni honti aparibhogāni, evaṃ kesāpi pubbalohitamuttakarīsapittasemhādinissandena jātattā jegucchāti idaṃ tesaṃ āsayato pāṭikulyaṃ. Ime ca kesā nāma gūtharāsimhi uṭṭhitakaṇṇakaṃ viya ekatiṃsakoṭṭhāsarāsimhi jātā, te susānasaṅkāraṭṭhānādīsu jātasākaṃ viya parikhādīsu jātakamalakuvalayādipupphaṃ viya ca asuciṭṭhāne jātattā paramajegucchāti idaṃ tesaṃ okāsato pāṭikulyaṃ. Yathā ca kesānaṃ, evaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsānañca vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikūlatā veditabbāti āha ‘‘evaṃ lomādīna’’nti. Pañcapañcappabhedenāti ettha bāhiratthasamāso daṭṭhabbo pañca pañca pabhedā etassāti pañcapañcappabhedoti.
“详细阐述”就是展开说明。“以不净”是指依不净纲目。“多修习”就是反复练习。关于“已断五支、具足五支”,这里应当知道:通过断除欲贪、嗔恚、昏沉睡眠、掉举恶作、疑这五盖,而成为“已断五支”。因为如果这些没有断除,禅那就不会生起,所以它们被称为“断支”。虽然在禅那生起的那一刻,其他不善法也会被断除,但这五盖尤其是禅那的障碍。因为被欲贪引诱到种种所缘的心,无法在单一所缘上得定;被欲贪征服的心,不会走上断除欲界的修行道路;被嗔恚冲击的心,对所缘不能持续不断地运作;被昏沉睡眠征服的心,变得不堪任用;被掉举恶作控制的心,不能平静,四处散乱;被疑损害的心,无法登上能证得禅那的修行道路。因此,由于它们尤其是禅那的障碍,所以说它们就是“断支”。巴利
Saṃvaṇṇentoti vitthārento. Asubhāyāti asubhamātikāya. Phātikammanti bahulīkāro. Pañcaṅgavippahīnaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgatanti ettha kāmacchando byāpādo thinamiddhaṃ uddhaccakukkuccaṃ vicikicchāti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ pahānavasena pañcaṅgavippahīnatā veditabbā. Na hi etesu appahīnesu jhānaṃ uppajjati, tenassetāni pahānaṅgānīti vuccanti. Kiñcāpi hi jhānakkhaṇe aññepi akusalā dhammā pahīyanti, tathāpi etāneva visesena jhānantarāyakarāni. Kāmacchandena hi nānāvisayapalobhitaṃ cittaṃ na ekattārammaṇe samādhiyati, kāmacchandābhibhūtaṃ vā cittaṃ na kāmadhātuppahānāya paṭipadaṃ paṭipajjati, byāpādena ca ārammaṇe paṭihaññamānaṃ na nirantaraṃ pavattati, thinamiddhābhibhūtaṃ akammaññaṃ hoti, uddhaccakukkuccaparetaṃ avūpasantameva hutvā paribbhamati, vicikicchāya upahataṃ jhānādhigamasādhikaṃ paṭipadaṃ nārohati. Iti visesena jhānantarāyakarattā etāneva pahānaṅgānīti vuttāni.
因为寻把心投向所缘,伺让心持续跟着所缘,由于它们,心达成了不散乱的运用,从这种心的运用圆满中产生了喜,喜带来喜悦,乐则带来增强。然后,与这些相应法一起被投向、持续、喜悦、增强所资助的心一境性,就在单一所缘上平等而正确地安立下来。因此应当知道,依寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性这五者的生起,而说具足五支。因为当这五者生起时,就叫做禅那已经生起,所以说它们是这禅那的具足五支。因此不应执取为:除了具足这些支之外,还有别的什么禅那叫做具足这些支。然而,就像仅凭支分而说四支军、五支乐器、八支道一样,这里也仅凭支分而说五支或具足五支,应当这样理解。巴利
Yasmā pana vitakko ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropeti, vicāro anuppabandhati, tehi avikkhepāya sampāditapayogassa cetaso payogasampattisambhavā pīti pīnanaṃ, sukhañca upabrūhanaṃ karoti, atha naṃ sasampayuttadhammaṃ etehi abhiniropanānubandhanapīnanaupabrūhanehi anuggahitā ekaggatā ekattārammaṇe samaṃ sammā ādhiyati, tasmā vitakko vicāro pīti sukhaṃ cittekaggatāti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ uppattivasena pañcaṅgasamannāgatatā veditabbā. Uppannesu hi etesu pañcasu jhānaṃ uppannaṃ nāma hoti, tenassa etāni pañca samannāgataṅgānīti vuccanti. Tasmā na etehi samannāgataṃ aññadeva jhānaṃ nāma atthīti gahetabbaṃ. Yathā pana aṅgamattavaseneva caturaṅginī senā, pañcaṅgikaṃ tūriyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgiko ca maggoti vuccati, evamidampi aṅgamattavaseneva ‘‘pañcaṅgika’’nti vā ‘‘pañcaṅgasamannāgata’’nti vā vuccatīti veditabbaṃ.
这五支虽然在近行刹那也存在,但在近行阶段比本性心更强,而在这里则比近行阶段更强,达到了色界刹那。因为在这里,寻以极为清晰的方式将心投向所缘而生起,伺极度地研磨所缘,喜与乐遍满整个身体。正因如此才说:“他整个身体没有任何一处不被离生喜乐所遍满。”心一境性也像上层匣盖合于下层匣盖一样,紧密地贴合所缘而生起。这就是它们与其余的差别。因此,“具足五支”是特别就安止禅那而说的。巴利
Etāni ca pañcaṅgāni kiñcāpi upacārakkhaṇepi atthi, atha kho upacāre pakaticittato balavatarāni, idha pana upacāratopi balavatarāni rūpāvacarakkhaṇappattāni. Ettha hi vitakko suvisadena ākārena ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropayamāno uppajjati, vicāro ativiya ārammaṇaṃ anumajjamāno, pītisukhaṃ sabbāvantampi kāyaṃ pharamānaṃ. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṃ hotī’’ti. Cittekaggatāpi heṭṭhimamhi samuggapaṭale uparimaṃ samuggapaṭalaṃ viya ārammaṇe suphusitā hutvā uppajjati. Ayametesaṃ itarehi viseso, tasmā ‘‘pañcaṅgasamannāgata’’nti appanājhānameva visesetvā vuttaṃ.
具有三种善妙、具足十种相:在这里应当知道,按禅那的初、中、后三个阶段来说,就是三种善妙;按那初、中、后三个阶段各自的相来说,就是具足十种相。至于详细的方法,下文自然会说明。因为不会被烦恼贼所压倒,所以禅那被称为“心之宝箧”。“依止”的意思是以它为根基。巴利
Tividhakalyāṇaṃ dasalakkhaṇasampannanti ettha pana jhānassa ādimajjhapariyosānavasena tividhakalyāṇatā, tesaṃyeva ādimajjhapariyosānānaṃ lakkhaṇavasena dasalakkhaṇasampannatā veditabbā. Vitthāranayaṃ panettha sayameva pakāsayissati. Kilesacorehi anabhibhavanīyattā jhānaṃ ‘‘cittamañjūsa’’nti vuttaṃ. Nissāyāti pādakaṃ katvā.
仅仅通过阐明十相,三种善妙也就被阐明了,所以先开示十相,说了“此中这些”等话。其中,“从障碍中心清净”等语句的含义,会在“此中,有如是圣典”等所引圣典的注释中自然明了。“此中”就是指阐明十相这件事。“行道清净”:依它而修习禅那,所以叫“行道”,也就是以种姓智为终点的前行修习方法。从障碍中净化出来就是“清净”,行道的清净就是“行道清净”。而这种清净是在禅那生起的那一刹那获得的,所以说“行道清净为初”。“舍随增”:由于没有需要清净的东西等等,通过属于禅那的中舍的作用得以完成,从而得到增长。而这种增长特别在禅那住立的刹那获得,所以说“舍随增为中”。“庆慰”:通过令诸法不相逾越等的智的作用完成,从而得到净化。而这种庆慰在禅那的最终刹那变得明显,所以说“庆慰为后”。这三相——从障碍中心得到净化的行相、进入中舍寂止的行道行相、跃入彼处的行相——就是禅那从最初生起刹那到安止成就的三相。如果没有这些行相,就没有安止成就;如果没有安止,也就没有它们,所以是初善;又因为是清净的行道,并且具备如上所说的相,所以是具足三相。按照这个方法,应当知道中、后相的结合方式。巴利
Dasalakkhaṇavibhāvaneneva tividhakalyāṇatāpi vibhāvitā hotīti dasalakkhaṇaṃ tāva dassento ‘‘tatrimānī’’tiādimāha. Tattha pāripanthikato cittavisuddhītiādīnaṃ padānaṃ attho ‘‘tatrāyaṃ pāḷī’’tiādinā vuttapāḷivaṇṇanāyameva āvi bhavissati. Tatrāti tasmiṃ dasalakkhaṇavibhāvane. Paṭipadāvisuddhīti paṭipajjati jhānaṃ etāyāti paṭipadā, gotrabhupariyosāno pubbabhāgiyo bhāvanānayo. Paripanthato visujjhanaṃ visuddhi, paṭipadāya visuddhi paṭipadāvisuddhi. Sā panāyaṃ yasmā jhānassa uppādakkhaṇe labbhati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭipadāvisuddhi ādī’’ti. Upekkhānubrūhanāti visodhetabbatādīnaṃ abhāvato jhānapariyāpannāya tatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccanipphattiyā anubrūhanā. Sā panāyaṃ yasmā visesato jhānassa ṭhitikkhaṇe labbhati, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe’’ti. Sampahaṃsanāti tattha dhammānaṃ anativattanādisādhakassa ñāṇassa kiccanipphattivasena pariyodapanā. Sā pana yasmā jhānassa osānakkhaṇe pākaṭā hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sampahaṃsanā pariyosāna’’nti. Imāni tīṇi lakkhaṇānīti paripanthato cittassa visujjhanākāro, majjhimassa samathanimittassa paṭipajjanākāro, tattha pakkhandanākāroti imāni tīṇi jhānassa ādito uppādakkhaṇe appanāppattilakkhaṇāni. Tehi ākārehi vinā appanāppattiyā abhāvato asati ca appanāyaṃ tadabhāvato ādikalyāṇañceva visuddhipaṭipadattā yathāvuttehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgatattā ca tilakkhaṇasampannañca. Iminā nayena majjhapariyosānalakkhaṇānañca yojanā veditabbā.
有些人则这样解释:所谓“行道清净”就是具足资粮的近行定,所谓“舍随增”就是安止定,所谓“庆慰”就是省察。这种说法并不合理。因为如果这样,就等于用不是禅那的法来赞叹禅那的功德了。毕竟,一个存在领域不会属于另一个存在领域,而且这种说法也与巴利经文相违背。巴利经中说:“心一境性既趣入行道清净,又被舍所随增,又被智所庆慰。”这里所说的“心一境性”,是指由于诸根一味、一境性达到顶点,与此相应、具有相应法、达到安止的心;紧接着就宣说了这颗心的趣入行道清净等。因此,由于巴利经文在同一个安止心刹那中宣说了行道清净等,就应当知道:在安止本身之内,依遍作与随顺的作用而有“行道清净”,依中舍的作用而有“舍随增”,依完成净化作用的智的作用成就而有“庆慰”——这种智是以令诸法不相逾越等状态为成就方式的。巴利
Keci pana ‘‘paṭipadāvisuddhi nāma sasambhāriko upacāro, upekkhānubrūhanā nāma appanā, sampahaṃsanā nāma paccavekkhaṇā’’ti vaṇṇayanti, taṃ na yuttaṃ. Tathā hi sati ajhānadhammehi jhānassa guṇasaṃkittanaṃ nāma kataṃ hoti. Na hi bhūmantaraṃ bhūmantarapariyāpannaṃ hoti, pāḷiyā cetaṃ virujjhati. ‘‘Ekattagataṃ cittaṃ paṭipadāvisuddhipakkhandañceva hoti upekkhānubrūhitañca ñāṇena ca sampahaṃsita’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.158) hi pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Ettha hi ekattagataṃ cittanti indriyānaṃ ekarasabhāvena ekaggatāya ca sikhāppattiyā tadanuguṇaṃ ekattagataṃ sasampayuttaṃ appanāppattaṃ cittaṃ vuttaṃ, tasseva ca paṭipadāvisuddhipakkhandatādi anantaraṃ vuccate. Tasmā pāḷiyaṃ ekasmiṃyeva appanācittakkhaṇe paṭipadāvisuddhiādīnaṃ vuttattā antoappanāyameva parikammāgamanavasena paṭipadāvisuddhi, tatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccavasena upekkhānubrūhanā, dhammānaṃ anativattanādibhāvasādhanena pariyodāpakassa ñāṇassa kiccanipphattivasena sampahaṃsanā ca veditabbā.
怎样呢?在安止生起的那一阶段,被称为盖的烦恼群是那禅那的障碍,心由此得到净化;因为清净,心就远离了障盖,进入中道的奢摩他相。所谓中道的奢摩他相,其实就是已经等起的安止定本身:因为不落入昏沉和掉举这两个极端,所以是中道;因为殊胜地止息了敌对法,所以是奢摩他;因为它是瑜伽行者殊胜快乐的因,所以是相。然而,作为那安止心的无间缘的种姓心,虽然有有限与广大、缘与缘所生的差别,但由于在同一相续中转向成熟,依同一相续转变的方式,以安止的力量正在达到等持状态,这就称为进入中道的奢摩他相。由于这样进入,以转向那种状态而称为趣入。因为就在进入中道奢摩他相的那一刹那,即以转向那种状态、以安止定达到等持而称为趣入。这样,存在于前一种姓心中的障碍清净、进入中道奢摩他、趣入等行相,依随顺的作用而成就,在初禅生起的那一刹那,就应知为行道清净。因为这些行相,以殊胜的缘在禅那刹那成就,所以说为行道清净。巴利
Kathaṃ? Yasmiṃ (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.158; visuddhi. 1.175) vāre appanā uppajjati , tasmiṃ yo nīvaraṇasaṅkhāto kilesagaṇo tassa jhānassa paripantho, tato cittaṃ visujjhati, visuddhattā āvaraṇavirahitaṃ hutvā majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati. Majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ nāma samappavatto appanāsamādhiyeva, līnuddhaccasaṅkhātānaṃ ubhinnaṃ antānaṃ anupagamanena majjhimo, savisesaṃ paccanīkadhammānaṃ vūpasamanato samatho, yogino sukhavisesānaṃ kāraṇabhāvato nimittanti katvā. Tassa pana appanācittassa anantarapaccayabhūtaṃ gotrabhucittaṃ satipi parittamahaggatabhāvabhede paccayapaccayuppannabhāvabhede ca ekissāyeva santatiyā pariṇāmūpagamanato ekasantatipariṇāmanayena tathattaṃ appanāsamādhivasena samāhitabhāvaṃ upagacchamānaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati nāma. Evaṃ paṭipannattā tathattupagamanena tattha pakkhandati nāma. Yasmiñhi khaṇe tathattaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati, tasmiṃyeva khaṇe tathattupagamanena appanāsamādhinā samāhitabhāvūpagamanena tattha pakkhandati nāma. Evaṃ tāva purimasmiṃ gotrabhucitte vijjamānā paripanthavisuddhimajjhimasamathappaṭipattipakkhandanākārā āgamanavasena nipphajjamānā paṭhamassa jhānassa uppādakkhaṇeyeva paṭipadāvisuddhīti veditabbā. Teyeva hi ākārā paccayavisesato jhānakkhaṇe nipphajjamānā paṭipadāvisuddhīti vuttā.
对于已经这样清净的心,因为再也没有需要净化的东西,所以不再做净化的动作,这就叫“对清净心保持舍”。因为已经进入奢摩他,对于已进入奢摩他的心,不再做让其等持的动作,这就叫“对已进入奢摩他者保持舍”。正因为已经进入奢摩他,这颗心已经断除了与烦恼的接触,以单一性现起;对于这种单一性的现起,不再做让其现为单一性的动作,这就叫“对单一性的现起保持舍”。应当这样理解:通过中舍的作用,舍得以增长。巴利
Evaṃ visuddhassa pana tassa cittassa puna sodhetabbābhāvato visodhane byāpāraṃ akaronto visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Samathabhāvūpagamanena samathappaṭipannassa puna samādhāne byāpāraṃ akaronto samathappaṭipannaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Samathappaṭipannabhāvato eva cassa kilesasaṃsaggaṃ pahāya ekattena upaṭṭhitassa puna ekattupaṭṭhāne byāpāraṃ akaronto ekattupaṭṭhānaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Evaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccavasena upekkhānubrūhanā veditabbā.
当禅那心这样被舍不断培育时,便生起那些被称为定与慧的双运法,它们彼此不相逾越地运作;而信等诸根,因为已从种种烦恼中解脱,就以解脱之味成为一味而运作;同时,与这些不相逾越、一味之法相应的精进也被发起;还有在那刹那中生起的反复修习。所有这些行相之所以成就,都是因为以智慧照见杂染与清净中的种种过患和功德,从而以各种方式获得庆慰、得到净化、达到遍净。因此应当理解:这种庆慰的完成,靠的是智慧的作用;而智慧是通过令诸法达到不相逾越等状态来使其遍净的。巴利
Ye panete evaṃ upekkhānubrūhite tasmiṃ jhānacitte jātā samādhipaññāsaṅkhātā yuganaddhadhammā aññamaññaṃ anativattamānā hutvā pavattā, yāni ca saddhādīni indriyāni nānākilesehi vimuttattā vimuttirasena ekarasāni hutvā pavattāni, yañcesa tadupagaṃ tesaṃ anativattanaekarasasabhāvānaṃ anucchavikaṃ vīriyaṃ vāhayati, yā cassa tasmiṃ khaṇe pavattā āsevanā, sabbepi te ākārā yasmā ñāṇena saṃkilesavodānesu taṃ taṃ ādīnavañca ānisaṃsañca disvā tathā tathā sampahaṃsitattā visodhitattā pariyodāpitattā nipphannā, tasmā dhammānaṃ anativattanādibhāvasādhanena pariyodāpakassa ñāṇassa kiccanipphattivasena sampahaṃsanā veditabbāti vuttaṃ.
那么,为什么只说“庆慰”是终结,而不说“舍随增”呢?因为在那个修习心中,由于舍的力量,智变得明显,所以作为智的作用的庆慰被称为终结。确实,在安止的时候,因为修习已经平等运转,敌对法已经善加断除,策励等功用已无可作,所以只有中舍。关于这一点,有这样的话:“其时,心的中舍舍于清净心”等等。然而,这种中舍是为了成就智的作用,特别是因为安止的功用是以智为成就之因,所以作为智的作用的庆慰被称为终结。如此,依已获殊胜的三种行道清净,依三种舍随增,以慧根极为增胜,四种庆慰也得以成就。因此,依趋入舍与智的作用,应当知道这十种行相只在禅那中。巴利
Atha kasmā sampahaṃsanāva ‘‘pariyosāna’’nti vuttā, na upekkhānubrūhanāti? Yasmā tasmiṃ bhāvanācitte upekkhāvasena ñāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, tasmā ñāṇakiccabhūtā sampahaṃsanā ‘‘pariyosāna’’nti vuttā. Tathā hi appanākāle bhāvanāya samappavattiyā paṭipakkhassa ca suppahānato paggahādīsu byāpārassa akātabbato ajjhupekkhanāva hoti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘samaye cittassa ajjhupekkhanā visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhatī’’ti ca ādi. Sā panāyaṃ ajjhupekkhanā ñāṇassa kiccasiddhiyā hoti visesato ñāṇasādhanattā appanābyāpārassa, tasmā ñāṇakiccabhūtā sampahaṃsanā ‘‘pariyosāna’’nti vuttā. Evaṃ tividhāya paṭipadāvisuddhiyā laddhavisesāya tividhāya upekkhānubrūhanāya sātisayaṃ paññindriyassa adhimattabhāvena catubbidhāpi sampahaṃsanā sijjhatīti āgamanupekkhāñāṇakiccavasena dasapi ākārā jhāne eva veditabbā.
“如此到达三种状态的心”等语,是对这心的赞叹之词。其中,“如此到达三种状态”是指:依照前面所说的方式,通过修行清净、坚持、舍随增、以智随喜这四个方面,而达到三种状态。“具足寻”是指:因为远离了烦恼的扰动,以寻而达到美好的状态。“具足心的胜解”是指:在同一所缘上,以心不间断地持续运转,也就是以“胜解”而具足、无有欠缺。正如在“胜解自在”中所说的,“胜解”就是禅那的运转,同样地,这里“心的胜解”也适用于心一境性,因为心正是依此而安住在同一所缘上,不会在这里散乱到别处。“具足定”因为被单独说出,所以应按照前面所说的方式来理解。或者,由于定被包含在禅支之中,“具足心的胜解”是依五禅支而说的;而由于定被包含在根之中,“具足定”是依五根而说的。巴利
Evaṃtividhattagataṃ cittantiādīni tasseva cittassa thomanavacanāni. Tattha evaṃ tividhattagatanti evaṃ yathāvuttena vidhinā paṭipadāvisuddhipakkhandanaupekkhānubrūhanañāṇasampahaṃsanāvasena tividhabhāvaṃ gataṃ. Vitakkasampannanti kilesakkhobhavirahitattā vitakkena sundarabhāvamupagataṃ. Cittassa adhiṭṭhānasampannanti tasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe cittassa nirantarappavattisaṅkhātena adhiṭṭhānena sampannaṃ anūnaṃ. Yathā adhiṭṭhānavasiyaṃ adhiṭṭhānanti jhānappavatti, tathā idhāpi cittassa adhiṭṭhānanti cittekaggatāpi yujjati. Tena hi ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe cittaṃ adhiṭṭhāti, na ettha vikkhipatīti. Samādhisampannanti visuṃ vuttattā pana vuttanayeneva gahetabbo. Atha vā samādhisseva jhānaṅgasaṅgahitattā ‘‘cittassa adhiṭṭhānasampanna’’nti jhānaṅgapañcakavasena vuttaṃ. Samādhisampannanti indriyasaṅgahitattā indriyapañcakavasena.
“以不净想所熟习的”是说,因为心与“全身是不净的”这种想一起生起,所以这个禅那就叫不净想,以这个想来熟习、来反复修习。“以心”就是以心意。“多”就是频繁。“住”是指正在安住的人,意思是经常进入不净等至的人。“于淫欲法等至”是因为与淫欲法相应。“回避”是指缩向一边,像躲藏起来一样。“蜷缩”是指收缩。“反转”是指退回去。“不舒展”是指不流散开去,意思是不会因为贪乐而投身其中。另一种说法是,“回避”指收缩,因为在那里由于厌恶而安住。“蜷缩”指退开,不靠近。“反转”指退回去,正因为如此,才“不舒展”。“筋腱片”指一段筋,或筋的割痕。巴利
Asubhasaññāparicitenāti sakalaṃ kāyaṃ asubhanti pavattāya saññāya sahagatattā jhānaṃ asubhasaññā, tena paricitena paribhāvitena. Cetasāti cittena. Bahulanti abhiṇhaṃ. Viharatoti viharantassa, asubhasamāpattibahulassāti attho. Methunadhammasamāpattiyāti methunadhammena samaṅgibhāvato. Paṭilīyatīti ekapassena nilīyati nilīnaṃ viya hoti. Paṭikuṭatīti saṅkucati. Paṭivattatīti nivattati. Na sampasārīyatīti na visarati, abhirativasena na pakkhandatīti attho. Atha vā paṭilīyatīti saṅkucati tattha paṭikūlatāya saṇṭhitattā. Paṭikuṭatīti apasakkati na upasakkati. Paṭivattatīti nivattati, tato eva na sampasārīyatīti. Nhārudaddulanti nhārukhaṇḍaṃ nhāruvilekhanaṃ vā.
“半月”是与持续关联有关的业格表达。“独处”是指在上述那段时间里,日复一日地把心安住、收敛于等至和法随念之中。“说关联之语”是指说与资具相关的话,比如:“佛陀在这些日子里不外出乞食,只坐在精舍里,供养他们的果报很大”等等。巴利
Addhamāsanti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Paṭisallīyitunti yathāvuttakālaṃ paṭi paṭi divase divase samāpattiyaṃ dhammacintāya cittaṃ nilīyituṃ. Payuttavācanti paccayapaṭisaṃyuttavācaṃ, buddhā imesu divasesu piṇḍāya na caranti, vihāreyeva nisīdanti, tesaṃ dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ hotīti ādivacanaṃ.
依善依止是指依出家的因缘。据说这个词是表示不悦的意思。因此说“然而这只是他们的愿望”,意思是:对已发生之事的不知晓、未予告知,以及已知后的阻止——这些只是他们自己的愿望,并不是真正的理由。另一些人则说:“据说在这半个月里,没有一个人是佛陀能调伏的。于是导师心想:‘我要用果等至的快乐来度过这半个月,这样我自己能安住在快乐中,将来后世的人也会跟着学,心想:导师都舍弃僧团独自而住,何况我们呢?这会给他们带来长远的利益和安乐。’就是因为这个原因才这样说。”“没有一个人到世尊跟前来”是说除了负责取食物的人以外,没有其他人来到世尊面前。不过比丘僧团接受了导师的话,派了一位比丘去。他一大早就把香室庭院的清扫、洗脸水、齿木等一切事务都在各自相应的时刻做好,然后离开。巴利
Kalyāṇūpanissayavasenāti pabbajjāya upanissayavasena. Pare kirāti kira-saddo arucisūcanattho. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ pana icchāmatta’’nti, pavattiajānanaṃ ārocayitābhāvo ñāte nivāraṇañcāti idaṃ tesaṃ icchāmattaṃ , na pana kāraṇanti attho. Apare pana vadanti ‘‘etasmiṃ kira aḍḍhamāse na koci buddhaveneyyo ahosi, atha satthā imaṃ aḍḍhamāsaṃ phalasamāpattisukhena vītināmessāmi, iti mayhañceva sukhavihāro bhavissati, anāgate ca pacchimā janatā ‘satthāpi gaṇaṃ pahāya ekako vihāsi, kimaṅgaṃ pana maya’nti diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjissati, tadassa bhavissati dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyāti iminā kāraṇena evamāhā’’ti. Neva koci bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamatīti ṭhapetvā piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ añño koci neva bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamati, bhikkhusaṅgho pana satthu vacanaṃ sampaṭicchitvā ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ adāsi. So pātova gandhakuṭipariveṇasammajjanamukhodakadantakaṭṭhadānādīni sabbakiccāni tasmiṃ tasmiṃ khaṇe katvā apagacchati.
“由多种原因混合而成”在这里是说:身体的不净、恶臭、可厌、令人反感,这些就是多种原因。“有装饰本性”是指有装饰的习性。有些人虽然年少,却不算年轻人;有些人虽然是年轻人,却没有装饰的习性,比如本性寂静的人,或者被懒惰、放逸等压垮的人。但这里指的是既年少、又是年轻人、又有装饰习性的人。所谓“青年初期”,是从十五岁到三十二岁,或者从十六岁到三十三岁。“尸体”指死尸,蛇的尸体就是蛇尸,其他也照此类推。要知道,正是因为极度令人反感和厌恶,这里才只说了这三种。因为其他像兔子、猪等的尸体,人们还会用辛辣调料等加工后拿来吃;但这些尸体就算新鲜也让人厌恶,更不用说过了时候腐烂的了。据说,它们之所以极度令人反感和厌恶,是因为恶臭极重;而蛇的恶臭来自它们猛烈的嗔怒,狗和人的恶臭则来自以米饭、豆粥等滋养的身体。巴利
Anekakāraṇasammissoti ettha kāyassa asuciduggandhajegucchapaṭikūlatāva anekakāraṇaṃ. Maṇḍanakapakatikoti alaṅkārakasabhāvo. Koci taruṇopi yuvā na hoti, koci yuvāpi maṇḍanakajātiko na hoti yathā upasantasabhāvo ālasiyabyasanādīhi vā abhibhūto, idha pana daharo ceva yuvā ca maṇḍanakajātiko ca adhippeto. Paṭhamayobbanaṃ nāma pannarasavassato yāva dvattiṃsa saṃvaccharāni, soḷasavassato vā yāva tettiṃsa vassāni. Kuṇapanti matakaḷevaraṃ, ahissa kuṇapaṃ ahikuṇapaṃ. Evaṃ itarānipi. Atipaṭikūlajigucchanīyasabhāvato cettha imāneva tīṇi vuttānīti veditabbāni. Aññesañhi sasasūkarādīnaṃ kuṇapaṃ manussā kaṭukabhaṇḍādīhi abhisaṅkharitvā paribhuñjantipi, imesaṃ pana kuṇapaṃ abhinavampi jigucchantiyeva, ko pana vādo kālātikkamena pūtibhūte. Atipaṭikūlajigucchanīyatā ca nesaṃ ativiya duggandhatāya, sā ca ahīnaṃ tikhiṇakopatāya kukkuramanussānaṃ odanakummāsūpacayatāya ca sarīrassa hotīti vadanti.
“沙门行者”是指做沙门该做的事,也就是通过穿袈裟等方式来履行沙门的职责,所以说成“持沙门衣者”。因此说“持沙门形相者”。“他们全都做了”是说,凡夫即使面对有罪过的事,也把它当成没有罪过,于是自己做、让别人做、随喜等,各种方式全都做了。“罗希塔卡”在这里,也有人读作“罗希塔伽塔”。“瓦古”是指被看作可爱的。“被认可为福”是说,因为能产生值得供养的果报,能净化、清净众生,所以被认可为福德。“我将令其流出”是说,我将使它流出,我将令它清净。巴利
Samaṇakuttakoti samaṇakiccako, kāsāvanivāsanādivasena samaṇakiccakārīti vuttaṃ hoti . Tenāha ‘‘samaṇavesadhārako’’ti. Sabbamakaṃsūti puthujjanā sāvajjepi tattha anavajjasaññino hutvā karaṇakārāpanasamanuññatādibhedaṃ sabbamakaṃsu. Lohitakanti ettha ‘‘lohitagata’’ntipi paṭhanti. Vaggūti matā vaggumatā. Puññasammatāti pujjabhavaphalanibbattanena sattānaṃ punanena visodhanena puññanti sammatā. Pavāhessāmīti gamayissāmi, visodhessāmīti attho.
163 163. “魔境”指的是三界诸法。从词义上说,魔的领域就是魔境。“领域”指处所、基地、住处、活动范围。或者说,魔在这里安住、停留、活动,所以叫魔境;这里说的“魔”指烦恼魔,而且正是依靠烦恼魔,天子魔才能在欲界中得自在。他心里想:“他不可能超越魔境。”——他这样生起悚惧感之后,本来也可能超越魔境,但在我这样说了之后,他就平息了已生起的悚惧,又想:“他不可能超越魔境。”所谓“双言”就是说两次,也就是重复的话。至于“劝导”,应当知道:这个愚痴盲目的天女,生起了以悚惧感为根源的沙门法之后,心想“这个人或许能超越魔境”,却因为自己的无知,持有“死者从轮回中解脱”的邪见,没有去审察“比丘们死后从轮回中解脱”这个道理,就凭自己的邪见这样去劝导。巴利
163. Māradheyyaṃ vuccati tebhūmakā dhammā. Vacanatthato pana mārassa dheyyaṃ māradheyyaṃ. Dheyyanti ṭhānaṃ vatthu nivāso gocaro. Māro vā ettha dhiyati tiṭṭhati pavattatīti māradheyyaṃ, māroti cettha kilesamāro adhippeto, kilesamāravaseneva ca devaputtamārassa kāmabhave ādhipaccanti. Māravisayaṃ nātikkamissatīti cintetvāti evamayaṃ saṃvegaṃ paṭilabhitvā māravisayaṃ atikkameyyāpi, mayā pana evaṃ vutte uppannaṃ saṃvegaṃ paṭippassambhetvā māravisayaṃ nātikkamissatīti evaṃ cintetvā. Dvivacananti dvikkhattuṃ vacanaṃ, āmeḍitavacananti vuttaṃ hoti. Niyojentīti ettha ayaṃ andhabālā devatā evaṃ uppannasaṃvegamūlakaṃ samaṇadhammaṃ katvā ‘‘ayaṃ māravisayaṃ atikkameyyāpī’’ti cintetvā attano aññāṇatāya ‘‘matā saṃsārato muccantī’’ti evaṃladdhikāpi samānā attano laddhivasena matā bhikkhū saṃsārato muccantīti imamatthaṃ anupaparikkhitvā taṃ tattha niyojesīti veditabbaṃ.
世尊讲说不净的谈论时,是以让那些比丘不生起死亡恐惧的方式来讲的。而且比丘们听了那番法谈之后,修习不净观,身体已离欲贪,又希求死亡,所以对死亡没有恐惧。然而,他们见到那个拿着刀到处走动的人,其他比丘因此生起恐惧,所以才有“确实有恐惧”等说法——他们是这么说的。经中说“自己也夺取自己的生命,也互相夺取生命”,因此“他夺取了全部五百比丘的生命”这句话,应当按多数来理解。因为少一点或多一点,都不算入整数,所以说“五百”。因此应当知道,除了那些自己结束自己生命以及互相夺取生命的人之外,其余凡夫比丘和所有圣者,都是被这个人夺取了生命。巴利
Kiñcāpi asubhakathaṃ kathentena bhagavatā yathā tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ maraṇabhayaṃ na bhavissati, tathā desitattā bhikkhūnañca taṃ dhammakathaṃ sutvā asubhabhāvanānuyogena kāye vigatachandarāgatāya maraṇassa abhipatthitabhāvato bhayaṃ natthi, taṃ pana asihatthaṃ tathā vicarantaṃ disvā tadaññesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ uppajjanakabhayaṃ sandhāya ‘‘hotiyeva bhaya’’ntiādi vuttanti vadanti. ‘‘Attanāpi attānaṃ jīvitā voropenti, aññamaññampi jīvitā voropentī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘sabbānipi tāni pañca bhikkhusatāni jīvitā voropesī’’ti idaṃ yebhuyyavasena vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Appakañhi ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotīti ‘‘pañcasatānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā ye ca attanāva attānaṃ aññamaññañca jīvitā voropesuṃ, te ṭhapetvā avasese puthujjanabhikkhū sabbe ca ariye ayaṃ jīvitā voropesīti veditabbaṃ.
164 从独处静坐起来:这里的“独处静坐”,是指从种种有情行作中回转、退开,然后隐居、潜藏、远离,也就是身心由此而分离、成为单独一体的状态。因此说“从独一状态”,意思是远离。“独一”说的就是身远离和心远离。“起来”是指由于有分生起、与色所缘等诸行的结合,以及与在家、出家等有情的聚会,而从这两种远离中出来。他们各自在自己的师长跟前受持总说与问难。虽然十随念的受持已经包含了入出息念,但它在这里对聚集的比丘众中多数人适宜而且有利益,所以再次受持。正因为如此,世尊也为那些比丘宣说了这个业处。食厌想和不净业处相似,而四种无色对初学者不适宜,因此应当知道这里没有受持它们。巴利
164.Paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitoti ettha paṭisallānanti tehi tehi sattasaṅkhārehi paṭinivattitvā apasakkitvā sallānaṃ nilīyanaṃ vivecanaṃ, kāyacittehi tato vivittatā ekībhāvoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘ekībhāvato’’ti , pavivekatoti attho. Ekībhāvoti hi kāyacittaviveko vutto. Vuṭṭhitoti tato duvidhavivekato bhavaṅguppattiyā rūpārammaṇādisaṅkhārasamāyogena gahaṭṭhapabbajitādisattasamāgamena ca apeto. Uddesaṃ paripucchaṃ gaṇhantīti attano attano ācariyānaṃ santike gaṇhanti. Kāmaṃ dasānussatiggahaṇeneva ānāpānassatipi gahitā, sā pana tattha sannipatitabhikkhūsu bahūnaṃ sappāyā sātthikā ca, tasmā puna gahitā. Tathā hi bhagavā tameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kathesi. Āhāre paṭikūlasaññā asubhakammaṭṭhānasadisā, cattāro pana āruppā ādikammikānaṃ ananurūpāti tesaṃ idha aggahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
以毗舍离为依靠:就是把毗舍离城当作乞食的村落。在侍奉堂:就是在法堂里。仅片刻间:因为那些出于对世尊和正法的恭敬而前来的比丘们,一听到话就立刻站了起来,所以这样说。据说在佛在世时,比丘们为了用头顶恭敬地领受世尊的教导,一直侧耳倾听而安住。其:指所应做的事。时:指说法的时候。巴利
Vesāliṃ upanissāyāti vesālīnagaraṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvā. Upaṭṭhānasālāyanti dhammasabhāyaṃ. Muhuttenevāti satthari saddhamme ca gāravena upagatabhikkhūnaṃ vacanasamanantarameva uṭṭhahiṃsūti katvā vuttaṃ. Buddhakāle kira bhikkhū bhagavato sandesaṃ sirasā sampaṭicchituṃ ohitasotā viharanti. Yassāti yassa kattabbassa. Kālanti desanākālaṃ sandhāya vadati.
入出息念定的注释巴利
Ānāpānassatisamādhikathāvaṇṇanā
165 “为了证得阿拉汉果”,意思是为了达到证得阿拉汉果的目的。“另一种方式”,意思是为了证得阿拉汉果的另一个原因。“宣说”,是指以称赞作为开头来教导;这里的称赞,是为了通过让人产生欢喜来激励精进。比丘们听了之后,心里想:“世尊以种种方式称赞这个定,这个定确实是寂静的、殊胜的、纯粹的、安乐的住处,而且能当场让恶法消失。”他们因此生起欢喜和精进,认为应当认真投入、依之修行。巴利
165.Arahattappattiyāti arahattappattiatthāya. Aññaṃ pariyāyanti arahattādhigamatthāya aññampi kāraṇaṃ. Ācikkhantoti pasaṃsāpubbakaṃ desento, pasaṃsā ca tattha abhirucijananena ussāhanatthā. Tañhi sutvā bhikkhū ‘‘bhagavā imaṃ samādhiṃ anekehi ākārehi pasaṃsati, santo kirāyaṃ samādhi paṇīto ca asecanako ca sukho ca vihāro, pāpadhamme ca ṭhānaso antaradhāpetī’’ti sañjātābhirucino ussāhajātā sakkaccaṃ anuyuñjitabbaṃ paṭipajjitabbaṃ maññanti.
“义理与连接次第”,就是义理以及连接的次第。世尊以说法的威力,把自己亲证的定变得连那些比丘也能贴近、亲证,于是以归纳的方式说“这确实也是”等话。“执持入出息”,就是连同长、短等差别一起,限定并执取入出息,意思是以它们为所缘而转起。巴利
Atthayojanakkamanti atthañca yojanakkamañca. Bhagavā attano paccakkhabhūtaṃ samādhiṃ desanānubhāvena tesampi bhikkhūnaṃ āsannaṃ paccakkhañca karonto sampiṇḍanavasena ‘‘ayampi kho’’tiādimāha. Assāsapassāsapariggāhikāti dīgharassādivisesehi saddhiṃ assāsapassāse paricchijja gāhikā, te ārabbha pavattāti attho.
现在,为了用巴利圣典阐明前面所说的义理,而说“已说”等句。其中,“非呼出、非吸入”是通过否定来简别,从而说明的就是同一个意思。“依吸入”是说以吸入为所缘。“依呼出”也是同样的道理。“念现前”是指由于不忘失,而近住于那吸入与呼出,这就称为念。至此,已经说明了“于入出息中念,即是入出息念”这个意思。接着,为了以念来指称那个修行人,而说“若吸入者,则念现前;若呼出者,则念现前”。意思是:当他吸入时,念便近住于吸入而安住;当他呼出时,念便近住于呼出而安住。巴利
Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ pāḷiyā vibhāvento āha ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi. Tattha no passāsono assāsoti so soyeva attho paṭisedhena visesetvā vutto. Assāsavasenāti assāsaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Passāsavasenāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Upaṭṭhānaṃ satīti asammussanatāya tameva assāsaṃ passāsañca upagantvā ṭhānaṃ sati nāmāti attho. Ettāvatā ānāpānesu sati ānāpānassatīti ayamattho vutto hoti. Idāni sativaseneva puggalaṃ niddisitukāmena ‘‘yo assasati, tassupaṭṭhāti, yo passasati, tassupaṭṭhātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yo assasati, tassa sati assāsaṃ upagantvā tiṭṭhati. Yo passasati, tassa sati passāsaṃ upagantvā tiṭṭhatīti attho.
“相应”就是“结合”。所谓“入出息念”,是以入出息念为缘的意思。在第一种含义里,由于“相应”这个说法,已经说明了定与念之间有俱生缘等缘的关系;而在第二种含义里,则还有亲依止缘的关系,因为伴随近行定的念是安止定的亲依止缘。这样,就从俱生缘等七种缘的角度,显示了这两种情况下的缘关系。关于“修习”,在“再者,伍达义,我为弟子们宣说了行道,我的弟子们依照这行道修习四念处”等文句里,是从令生起、令增长的意义上说的。为了显示这两种意义,所以说“已修习,就是已令生起、已令增长”。其中,“已修习”是指已存在、已到达,也就是已令生起、只是已获得的意思。但对已生起、已获得修习的人来说,他就是“已修习”,也就是已令达到熟练、已令增长的意思。“多修习”是指频繁地现起,以此说明达到了转向自在等状态。因为已经达到自在的人,能在任何想要的时候入定,所以会一再地现起;因此说“一再而作”。又如在“在此,比丘们,有沙门……离诸欲……”等处,第一句里出现的“eva”一词,在第二句等里也同样适用;这里也是如此,所以说“两处都应当以‘eva’一词来限定理解”。巴利
Yuttoti sampayutto. Ānāpānassatiyanti ānāpānassatiyaṃ paccayabhūtāyanti attho. Purimasmiñhi atthe samādhissa satiyā sahajātādipaccayabhāvo vutto sampayuttavacanato, dutiyasmiṃ pana upanissayabhāvopi. Upacārajjhānasahagatā hi sati appanāsamādhissa upanissayo hotīti ubhayathāpi sahajātādīnaṃ sattannampi paccayānaṃ vasena paccayabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Puna caparaṃ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṃ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne bhāventī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.247) uppādanavaḍḍhanaṭṭhena bhāvanāti vuccatīti tadubhayavasena atthaṃ dassento ‘‘bhāvitoti uppādito vaḍḍhito cā’’ti āha. Tattha bhāvaṃ vijjamānataṃ ito gatoti bhāvito, uppādito paṭiladdhamattoti attho. Uppanno pana laddhāsevano bhāvito, paguṇabhāvaṃ āpādito vaḍḍhitoti attho. Bahulīkatoti bahulaṃ pavattito. Tena āvajjanādivasībhāvappattimāha. Yo hi vasībhāvaṃ āpādito, so icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpajjitabbato punappunaṃ pavattissati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘punappunaṃ kato’’ti. Yathā ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo (ma. ni. 1.139; a. ni. 4.241) vivicceva kāmehī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.226; saṃ. ni. 2.152) ca evamādīsu paṭhamapade vutto eva-saddo dutiyādīsupi vuttoyeva hoti, evamidhāpīti āha ‘‘ubhayattha eva-saddena niyamo veditabbo’’ti.
为了说明通过“两者兼具”这一限定而获得的功德,才说了“这确实……”等话。“不净业处”指的是以不净为所缘的禅那。因为它在不净的对象上作为修行者的修行活动,又是修行者获得殊胜快乐的原因,所以称为“不净业处”。“唯”这个字,是用来排除其他所缘的。“以通达之力”,是指以禅那通达的力量。禅那通过殊胜的修习而成就时,就在通达自己境界的同时运作,并且如实通达,因此称为“通达”。因为所缘粗显,所以是令人厌恶的所缘;因为所缘可厌,所以是应当厌离的所缘。“以方便”,是指以某种理由或某种间接方式。“也因所缘的寂静性”,这是就所缘逐渐变得极为微细的状态而说的。因为当所缘寂静、安定时,在其上生起的法自身也变得寂静、安定。因此说“寂静、寂止、寂灭”,意思是一切热恼都已寂灭。所缘的寂静性,以及以彼为所缘的诸法的寂静性,应当通过观察出世间法的观智来阐明。巴利
Ubhayapadaniyamena laddhaguṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asubhakammaṭṭhānanti asubhārammaṇaṃ jhānamāha. Tañhi asubhesu yogakammabhāvato yogino sukhavisesānaṃ kāraṇabhāvato ca ‘‘asubhakammaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Kevalanti iminā ārammaṇaṃ nivatteti. Paṭivedhavasenāti jhānapaṭivedhavasena. Jhānañhi bhāvanāvisesena ijjhantaṃ attano visayaṃ paṭivijjhantameva pavattati yathāsabhāvato paṭivijjhīyati cāti paṭivedhoti vuccati. Oḷārikārammaṇattāti bībhacchārammaṇattā. Paṭikūlārammaṇattāti jigucchitabbārammaṇattā. Pariyāyenāti kāraṇena lesantarena vā. Ārammaṇasantatāyapīti anukkamena vicetabbataṃ pattārammaṇassa paramasukhumataṃ sandhāyāha. Sante hi sannisinne ārammaṇe pavattamāno dhammo sayampi sannisinnova hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘santo vūpasanto nibbuto’’ti, nibbutasabbapariḷāhoti attho. Ārammaṇasantatāya tadārammaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ santatā lokuttaradhammārammaṇāhi paccavekkhaṇāhi dīpetabbā.
它没有任何能带来寂静与殊胜状态的浇灌,所以是“无浇灌”;因为无浇灌,所以是“未被浇灌”;正因为未被浇灌,所以是“不混杂”“不与遍作等相杂”;也正因如此,它是“各别”“单独”“独特”“不共”的。这一切都是就自性本身来说明其寂静的状态,或者也可说遍作是寂静之因。所谓“遍作”,是指从作遍开始,直到相的生起为终点;这里并没有那样的东西,这就是其意旨。因为那时业处没有滋味,就可能是不寂静、不殊胜的。或者,与近行定相比,这里没有寂静性,这样来理解。就像在近行定的刹那,由于盖的离去和支的显现,对其他禅那来说有寂静性,对这个禅那则不是这样。然而,这个禅那从最初作意起就是殊胜的,这样来理解。“有些人”是就北寺(无畏山寺)的住众而说的。“未被浇灌”是指没有以浇灌而浇灌。因此说“有滋养”,意思是类似有滋养。“甘美”即可爱。能带来心所之乐的获得,应依三禅、四禅之力,或因舍的寂静状态而趋向乐,所以应知这也是依于一切禅那而言。然而,能带来身乐的获得,则应理解为依于由禅那等起的殊胜色所触之身的状态,而且那是在出禅那之时。在这个观点下,“于每……”这里的“于每”应看作表示原因处的格。巴利
Nāssa santapaṇītabhāvāvahaṃ kiñci secananti asecanako, asecanakattā anāsittako, anāsittakattā eva abbokiṇṇo asammisso parikammādinā, tatoyeva pāṭiyekko, visuṃyeveko āveṇiko asādhāraṇo. Sabbametaṃ sarasato eva santabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ, parikammaṃ vā santabhāvanimittaṃ. Parikammanti ca kasiṇakaraṇādinimittuppādapariyosānaṃ, tādisaṃ idha natthīti adhippāyo. Tadā hi kammaṭṭhānaṃ nirassādattā asantaṃ appaṇītaṃ siyā. Upacārena vā natthi ettha santatāti yojanā. Yathā upacārakkhaṇe nīvaraṇavigamena aṅgapātubhāvena ca paresaṃ santatā hoti, na evamimassa. Ayaṃ pana ādimanasi…pe… paṇīto cāti yojanā. Kecīti uttaravihāravāsike sandhāyāha. Anāsittakoti upasecanena anāsittako. Tenāha ‘‘ojavanto’’ti, ojavantasadisoti attho. Madhuroti iṭṭho. Cetasikasukhappaṭilābhasaṃvattanaṃ tikacatukkajjhānavasena upekkhāya vā santabhāvena sukhagatikattā sabbesampi vasena veditabbaṃ. Jhānasamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭasarīratāvasena pana kāyikasukhappaṭilābhasaṃvattanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, tañca kho jhānato vuṭṭhitakāle. Imasmiṃ pakkhe appitappitakkhaṇeti idaṃ hetumhi bhummavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“未镇伏”是指没有靠禅那从自己的相续中去除、还没有断除。“由不巧便所生”里,不巧便就是无明,意思是从它而生。因为一切恶法都以无明为先导。“仅于刹那”就是仅在自己生起的那个刹那。“令消失”在这里,消失就是毁灭。不过,因为这里指的是修禅那者自身的情况,所以那是镇伏了缠缚烦恼,因此说“镇伏”。“令寂止”就是特别地令其寂止。而特别地寂止就是正确地寂止,所以说“善令寂止”。巴利
Avikkhambhiteti jhānena sakasantānato anīhaṭe appahīne. Akosallasambhūteti akosallaṃ vuccati avijjā, tato sambhūte. Avijjāpubbaṅgamā hi sabbe pāpadhammā. Khaṇenevāti attano pavattikkhaṇeneva. Antaradhāpetīti ettha antaradhāpanaṃ vināsanaṃ. Taṃ pana jhānakattukassa idhādhippetattā pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘vikkhambhetī’’ti. Vūpasametīti visesena upasameti. Visesena upasamanaṃ pana sammadeva upasamanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘suṭṭhu upasametī’’ti.
难道其他定不也是在自己生起的那个刹那,就让敌对的法消失、止息吗?那为什么偏偏只把这种定特别提出来说呢?因为从前行阶段开始,它就有止息种种寻思的特性。经里确实这样说过:“应当修习入出息念,以断除寻思。”(《增支部》9.1;《优陀那》31)再说,这是利慧者、以智慧为最上者的业处,而以智慧为最上者断除烦恼,比其他类型的人更为殊胜,就像见至者比信解者更殊胜一样。所以,针对这一殊胜之处,才说它“彻底地令消失、止息”。或者也可以说,因为当相显现时,诸支在那一刹那就全部具足,所以唯独这种定被称为“彻底地令消失、止息”,就像大非时云突然涌起、降下大雨,地面的尘土垢秽在那一刹那就被止息了一样。因此他说:“诸比丘,譬如大非时云涌起……”等等。教法中的禅那修习,大多是顺决择分的,所以说“因为是顺决择分的”。但对诸佛来说,则必定是顺决择分的。因为正是修习这个业处,一切正自觉者才证得正等觉。这种定作为圣道的基础,次第增长之后,就好像达到了圣道的状态,所以说“次第达到圣道的增长”。而这个义理,依离贪、灭尽、舍遣随观来说,是完全成立的。巴利
Nanu ca aññopi samādhi attano pavattikkhaṇeneva paṭipakkhadhamme antaradhāpeti vūpasameti, atha kasmā ayameva samādhi evaṃ visesetvā vuttoti? Pubbabhāgato paṭṭhāya nānāvitakkavūpasamanasabbhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘ānāpānassati bhāvetabbā vitakkupacchedāyā’’ti (a. ni. 9.1; udā. 31). Apica tikkhapaññassa ñāṇuttarassetaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ, ñāṇuttarassa ca kilesappahānaṃ itarehi sātisayaṃ yathā saddhādhimuttehi diṭṭhippattassa, tasmā imaṃ visesaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti vūpasametī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā nimittapātubhāve sati khaṇeneva aṅgapātubhāvasabbhāvato ayameva samādhi ‘‘ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti vūpasametī’’ti vutto yathā taṃ mahato akālameghassa uṭṭhitassa dhārānipāte khaṇeneva pathaviyaṃ rajojallassa vūpasamo. Tenevāha ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, mahā akālamegho uṭṭhito’’tiādi. Sāsanikassa jhānabhāvanā yebhuyyena nibbedhabhāgiyāva hotīti āha ‘‘nibbedhabhāgiyattā’’ti. Buddhānaṃ pana ekaṃsena nibbedhabhāgiyāva hoti. Imameva hi kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā sabbepi sammāsambuddhā sammāsambodhiṃ adhigacchanti, ariyamaggassa pādakabhūto ayaṃ samādhi anukkamena vaḍḍhitvā ariyamaggabhāvaṃ upagato viya hotīti āha ‘‘anupubbena ariyamaggavuḍḍhippatto’’ti. Ayaṃ panattho virāganirodhapaṭinissaggānupassanānaṃ vasena sammadeva yujjati.
“如何”这个词,是显示提问方式的用语。这里提问是因为想要宣说,由于其他人没有这种能力,而这个提问又涵盖了上面将要讲述的一切种类差别。为了说明这个意思,他说“如何……中略……是想要详细阐明的提问”。在“如何多修习”这里,也要把“入出息念定”这个词引过来连接。其中,“如何”是想要从种种方面详细说明入出息念定多修习的提问;“多修习的入出息念定”则是指示所问的法。为了显示这个意思,他用“同样的方法”来指示。为了便于把握,把前面详细讲述的内容归纳起来显示,他说“而这里的略义是”,意思就是总括义。巴利
Kathanti idaṃ pucchanākāravibhāvanapadaṃ, pucchā cettha kathetukamyatāvasena aññesaṃ asambhavato, sā ca upari desanaṃ āruḷhānaṃ sabbesaṃ pakāravisesānaṃ āmasanavasenāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘kathanti…pe… vitthāretukamyatāpucchā’’ti āha. Kathaṃ bahulīkatoti etthāpi ānāpānassatisamādhīti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tattha kathanti ānāpānassatisamādhibahulīkāraṃ nānappakārato vitthāretukamyatāpucchā. Bahulīkato ānāpānassatisamādhīti tathā puṭṭhadhammanidassananti imamatthaṃ ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti imināyeva atidissati. Heṭṭhā papañcavasena vuttamatthaṃ sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ saṅgahetvā dassento ‘‘ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho’’ti āha, piṇḍatthoti vuttaṃ hoti.
“那个义理”指的是以“如何修习”等提问方式简略说出的义理。在“此处如来出现于世间”这类句子中,“此处”一词是就世间而说的。在“就住立于此”这类句子中,是指处所。在“诸比丘,我于此已食、已满足”这类句子中,只是起凑足音节的作用。而在“此处比丘学得法”这类句子中,则是指教法。他说“诸比丘,在此教法中比丘”,是为了说明“诸比丘,此处比丘”这里的“此处”也是指教法;接着又说“因为此”等话,则是为了把这一意思显示得更清楚。其中,“能产生一切种类入出息念定者”中的“一切种类”,是针对十六种方式说的。因为这十六种方式只存在于这个教法中。外道即使知道,也只知道最初四种方式。因此他说“是遮止其他教法有如此状态”,意思是:前面所说的那种人具有这些依止的情况,正是所要遮止的。由此表明“诸比丘,此处”这个词里已经包含了“唯”的意思,因为确实有些单个词本身就表示限定,比如“食风者”。因此他说“诸比丘,唯此处有沙门”等。因为能圆满成就沙门的法,就是能产生一切种类入出息念定的法。“外道之说”是指其他外道的种种说法,也就是外道的立足处。巴利
Tamatthanti taṃ ‘‘kathaṃ bhāvito’’tiādinā pucchāvasena saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ. ‘‘Idha tathāgato loke uppajjatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.291; a. ni. 3.61) idha-saddo lokaṃ upādāya vutto. ‘‘Idheva tiṭṭhamānassā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.369) okāsaṃ. ‘‘Idhāhaṃ, bhikkhave, bhuttāvī assaṃ pavārito’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.30) padapūraṇamattaṃ. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇātī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.73) pana sāsanaṃ. ‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhū’’ti idhāpi sāsanamevāti dassento ‘‘bhikkhave, imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhū’’ti vatvā tamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha sabbappakāraānāpānassatisamādhinibbattakassāti sabbappakāraggahaṇaṃ soḷasa pakāre sandhāya. Te hi imasmiṃyeva sāsane. Bāhirakā hi jānantā ādito catuppakārameva jānanti. Tenāha ‘‘aññasāsanassa tathābhāvappaṭisedhano’’ti, yathāvuttassa puggalassa nissayabhāvappaṭisedhanoti attho. Etena ‘‘idha, bhikkhave’’ti idaṃ antogadhaeva-saddanti dasseti. Santi hi ekapadānipi avadhāraṇāni yathā vāyubhakkhoti. Tenevāha ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo’’tiādi. Paripuṇṇasamaṇakaraṇadhammo hi yo, so sabbappakāraānāpānassatisamādhinibbattako. Parappavādāti paresaṃ aññatitthiyānaṃ nānappakāravādā titthāyatanāni.
为了说明像林野这样的住处确实适合修行,说了“因为对此……”这一段。难以调伏、没有进入调伏状态的牛,叫作倔牛。就像用乳房完全挤不出奶一样,阻碍挤奶的母牛就是倔母牛。“他的”指牧牛人的。依靠色、声等而生起的滋味,就是以色等为所缘的滋味。“以前习惯的所缘”,指出家以前,或者在无始轮回中早已熟悉的所缘。应当这样连接理解:以近行定的方式靠近,以安止定的方式安住。巴利
Araññādikasseva bhāvanānurūpasenāsanataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imassa hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Duddamo damathaṃ anupagato goṇo kūṭagoṇo. Yathā thanehi sabbaso khīraṃ na paggharati, evaṃ dohapaṭibandhinī kūṭadhenu. Assāti gopassa. Rūpasaddādike paṭicca uppajjanakaassādo rūpārammaṇādiraso. Pubbe āciṇṇārammaṇanti pabbajitato pubbe, anādimati vā saṃsāre paricitārammaṇaṃ. Upacāravasena upanisīdati, appanāvasena upanipajjatīti yojetabbaṃ.
这里指的就是这个教法。“应当系缚”就是绑住。“以念”是指以正确认取业处相的作用而现起的念。“于所缘”是指以业处为所缘。“坚固”就是稳固,意思是把它变得有力量,使得具念者的近行定和安止定等定能够成就。巴利
Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Nibandheyyāti bandheyya. Satiyāti sammadeva kammaṭṭhānasallakkhaṇavasappavattāya satiyā. Ārammaṇeti kammaṭṭhānārammaṇe. Daḷhanti thiraṃ, yathā satokārissa upacārappanābhedo samādhi ijjhati, tathā thāmagataṃ katvāti attho.
像山顶一样:因为具备寂静等殊胜功德,又因为被佛陀等圣者们所亲近,所以像山顶一样,意思是最高。殊胜证得和现法乐住的足处:是一切佛、某些独觉以及佛弟子的殊胜证得的足处,也是那些通过其他业处已证得殊胜者的现法乐住的足处。世尊就像宅相师,能为瑜伽行者指示适合居住的地方。比丘像豹一样,独自住在林中,通过摧破敌对而达成所愿。最上果:说的是沙门果。精进速度适宜的场地:成为修习精勤速度的适宜之地。巴利
Muddhabhūtanti santatādivisesaguṇavantatāya buddhādīhi ariyehi samāsevitabhāvato ca muddhasadisaṃ, uttamanti attho. Visesādhigamadiṭṭhadhammasukhavihārapadaṭṭhānanti sabbesaṃ buddhānaṃ ekaccānaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ buddhasāvakānañca visesādhigamassa ceva aññakammaṭṭhānena adhigatavisesānaṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārassa ca padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Vatthuvijjācariyo viya bhagavā yogīnaṃ anurūpanivāsaṭṭhānupadissanato. Bhikkhu dīpisadiso araññe ekako viharitvā paṭipakkhanimmathanena icchitatthasādhanato. Phalamuttamanti sāmaññaphalamāha. Parakkamajavayoggabhūminti bhāvanussāhajavassa yoggakaraṇabhūmibhūtaṃ.
按阿毗达摩的教说方式和经的教说方式所说的那些特征。树附近,就是像这样说的树的近处:中午时分,周围到处都被树荫覆盖,无风的地方树叶落下,到这个范围就称为树下。其余七种住处,就是所说的山、岩洞、山洞、墓地、林丛、露地、草堆。适合三季、适合界与性格,就是适合热季等三季、适合痰等三界、适合痴等三种性格。确实如此,热季时林野适合,因为它柔和清凉;寒季时树下适合,因为它能挡雪;雨季时空寂之处适合,因为有能遮雨的屋。痰界、痰性者,林野适合,因为远行乞食使痰平息;胆界者,树下适合,因为接触凉风;风界者,空寂之处适合,因为能挡风。痴性者,林野适合。在大林野中,心不退缩,因为开阔空旷;瞋性者,树下适合,因为能令心生净信;贪性者,空寂之处适合,因为能防止异类所缘进入。属于不昏沉不掉举的一边,属于不萎缩不散乱的一边。躺卧确实属于懈怠一边,站立和经行属于掉举一边,坐则不是这样。因此,坐是相续的。以结跏趺坐显示坐的坚固,以上身正直显示入出息运行的安乐,以将念置于面前显示执取所缘的方便。巴利
Evaṃ vuttalakkhaṇesūti abhidhammapariyāyena suttantapariyāyena vuttalakkhaṇesu. Rukkhasamīpanti ‘‘yāvatā majjhanhike kāle samantā chāyā pharati, nivāte paṇṇāni patanti, ettāvatā rukkhamūlanti vuccatī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ rukkhassa samīpaṭṭhānaṃ. Avasesasattavidhasenāsananti pabbataṃ kandaraṃ giriguhaṃ susānaṃ vanappatthaṃ abbhokāsaṃ palālapuñjanti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Ututtayānukūlaṃ dhātucariyānukūlanti gimhādiututtayassa semhādidhātuttayassa mohādicaritattayassa ca anukūlaṃ. Tathā hi gimhakāle araññaṃ anukūlaṃ sommasītalabhāvato, hemante rukkhamūlaṃ himapātanivāraṇato, vassakāle suññāgāraṃ vassanivāraṇagehasambhavato. Semhadhātukassa semhapakatikassa araññaṃ anukūlaṃ dūraṃ gantvā bhikkhācaraṇena semhassa vūpasamanato, pittadhātukassa rukkhamūlaṃ anukūlaṃ sītavātasamphassasambhavato , vātadhātukassa suññāgāraṃ anukūlaṃ vātanivāraṇato. Mohacaritassa araññaṃ anukūlaṃ. Mahāaraññe hi cittaṃ na saṅkucati vivaṭaṅgaṇabhāvato, dosacaritassa rukkhamūlaṃ anukūlaṃ pasādanīyabhāvato, rāgacaritassa suññāgāraṃ anukūlaṃ visabhāgārammaṇānaṃ pavesanivāraṇato. Alīnānuddhaccapakkhikanti asaṅkocāvikkhepapakkhikaṃ. Sayanañhi kosajjapakkhikaṃ, ṭhānacaṅkamanāni uddhaccapakkhikāni, na evaṃ nisajjā. Tato eva tassā santatā. Nisajjāya daḷhabhāvaṃ pallaṅkābhujanena, assāsapassāsānaṃ pavattanasukhataṃ uparimakāyassa ujukaṭṭhapanena, ārammaṇapariggahūpāyaṃ parimukhaṃ satiyā ṭhapanena dassento.
结大腿坐是指把大腿下方绑紧而坐。让下半身不弯曲地放着,仅凭“坐”这个词就能让人知道。在“让身体端正”这里,“身”这个词指的是上半身,所以说“把上半身放正”。为了从样子和作用两方面说明那端正的放置,才说了“十八”等。“不弯下”就是不向前倾。“不散落”就是不消失、不越出道路,正因为如此,前后之间生起殊胜,增长、兴旺。这里的“pari”和“abhi”意思相同,所以说“面向业处”,意思是挡住向外散乱于种种所缘,只将业处放在前面。“pari”是摄持之义,如“pariṇāyikā”等中那样。出离之义是从对立面出来之义,因此“摄持出离”是于一切时中持守而不忘失,断除忘失之念,令最上念与正知现前。“念而入息”是唯具念者、唯正念者入息,他没有一刻入息的运作是远离念的。“念而出息”在这里也应加上“唯”字而说“唯念者出息”。“念作者”是唯作念者,或依念而作应作之事者,或如此修习之习性者。巴利
Ūrubaddhāsananti ūrūnamadhobandhanavasena nisajjā. Heṭṭhimakāyassa anujukaṃ ṭhapanaṃ nisajjāvacaneneva bodhitanti. Ujuṃ kāyanti ettha kāya-saddo uparimakāyavisayoti āha – ‘‘uparimaṃ sarīraṃ ujukaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti. Taṃ pana ujukaṭṭhapanaṃ sarūpato payojanato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘aṭṭhārasā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na paṇamantīti na oṇamanti. Na paripatatīti na vigacchati vīthiṃ na vilaṅgheti, tato eva pubbenāparaṃ visesuppattiyā vuḍḍhiṃ phātiṃ upagacchati. Idha pari-saddo abhi-saddena samānatthoti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānābhimukha’’nti, bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇato nivāretvā kammaṭṭhānaṃyeva purakkhatvāti attho. Parīti pariggahaṭṭho ‘‘pariṇāyikā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 16, 20) viya. Niyyānaṭṭho paṭipakkhato niggamanaṭṭho, tasmā pariggahitaniyyānanti sabbathā gahitāsammosaṃ pariccattasammosaṃ satiṃ katvā, paramaṃ satinepakkaṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti attho. Satovāti satiyā samannāgato eva saranto eva assasati, nāssa kāci sativirahitā assāsappavatti hotīti attho. Sato passasatīti etthāpi satova passasatīti eva-saddo ānetvā vattabbo. Satokārīti sato eva hutvā satiyā eva vā kātabbassa kattā, karaṇasīlo vā.
“以三十二种行相”:在四组四法当中,把长、短等十六句按入息和出息分成两类,从“长入息”开始,一直到“随观弃舍的出息”为止,这样所说的三十二种行相。如果在“具念者入息,具念者出息”这个分别里已经说过了,那为什么不说“入息、出息”,而说“念行者”呢?是为了让教说成为一味。因为在第一组四法里,只有两句是用现在时说的,其余都是用未来时说的,所以为了让教说成为一味,就处处都说“念行者”。“依长入息”:就是依长入息,是省略语尾变化而作的说明。或者说“长”是依世尊所说的入息。“心一境性、无散乱”:因为与散乱相对立,所以称为无散乱,了知心一境性者,念现起,趣入所缘而住立。“依彼念、依彼智”:依如前所说的念与如前所说的智。这里所说的是:对于作为所缘的长入息,心不散乱者、或由于不迷而了知者,于彼处念确实现起;对于了知彼者,依作所缘或不迷而有了知,依彼所依的念与了知,具足彼的瑜伽行者名为念行者。“观舍遣之入息”:成为观舍遣者而入息的意思。或者说“观舍遣之入息”是读法,彼观舍遣者的入息是观舍遣之入息,依彼等的意思。巴利
Bāttiṃsāya ākārehīti catūsu catukkesu āgatāni dīgharassādīni soḷasa padāni assāsapassāsavasena dvidhā vibhajitvā vuttehi dīghamassāsaṃ ādiṃ katvā paṭinissaggānupassipassāsapariyantehi bāttiṃsākārehi. Yadi ‘‘satova assasati, sato passasatī’’ti etassa vibhaṅge vuttaṃ, atha kasmā ‘‘assasati passasati’’cceva avatvā ‘‘satokārī’’ti vuttaṃ? Ekarasaṃ desanaṃ kātukāmatāya. Paṭhamacatukke padadvayameva hi vattamānakālavasena āgataṃ, itarāni anāgatakālavasena, tasmā ekarasaṃ desanaṃ kātukāmatāya sabbattha ‘‘satokāri’’cceva vuttaṃ. Dīghaṃassāsavasenāti dīghaassāsavasena, vibhattialopaṃ katvā niddeso. Dīghanti vā bhagavatā vuttaassāsavasena. Cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepanti vikkhepassa paṭipakkhabhāvato avikkhepoti laddhanāmaṃ cittassa ekaggabhāvaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā ṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇenāti yathāvuttāya satiyā yathāvuttena ca ñāṇena. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – dīghaṃ assāsaṃ ārammaṇabhūtaṃ avikkhittacittassa asammohato vā sampajānantassa tattha sati upaṭṭhitāva hoti, taṃ sampajānantassa ārammaṇakaraṇavasena asammohavasena vā sampajaññaṃ, tadadhīnasatisampajaññena taṃsamaṅgī yogāvacaro satokārī nāma hotīti. Paṭinissaggānupassī assāsavasenāti paṭinissaggānupassī hutvā assasanassa vasena. ‘‘Paṭinissaggānupassiassāsavasenā’’ti vā pāṭho, tassa paṭinissaggānupassino assāsā paṭinissaggānupassiassāsā, tesaṃ vasenāti attho.
有人说“入息就是向外呼出去的风,出息就是向内吸进来的风”,所以经文里说“入息就是向外呼出的风”等等。但在经藏注释里,则是反过来讲的:即使已经向外呼出之后,只要还是从内部吸进来,就叫入息;即使已经向内吸入之后,只要还是向外部呼出去,就叫出息。另一种说法是:在母胎里的鼻风本来没有向外出去的空间,一旦从母胎出来,它首先就向外出去,所以律藏注释按照生起的先后顺序说“最初的气息是入息”,指的是向外呼出的风。因此说“一切胎生者”等等。但在经藏注释里,就相续而言,在开始修习之时,鼻风首先被向内吸进来,然后才向外呼出去,所以按照相续的顺序说“最初的气息是入息”,指的是向内进入的风。而这里正是经藏的主张与这段经文相符:“随念入息的初、中、后,以内心散乱之心,身与心都紧张、动摇、颤动;随念出息的初、中、后,以向外散乱之心,身与心都紧张、动摇、颤动。”他们说:“因为在开始修习时,所希望的正是相续的顺序,所以更为殊胜。”触腭而止息,就是触腭而灭。据说因此刚出生的婴儿会做出抛掷的动作。如是至,等等,是对如上所说之义的总结。有些人说:“如是至,以此相续顺序,入息应当理解为向外呼出的风,这是其意趣。”巴利
Anto uṭṭhitasasanaṃ assāso, bahi uṭṭhitasasanaṃ passāsoti āha – ‘‘assāsoti bahinikkhamanavāto’’tiādi. Suttantaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana bahi uṭṭhahitvāpi anto sasanato assāso, anto uṭṭhahitvāpi bahi sasanato passāsoti katvā uppaṭipāṭiyā vuttaṃ. Atha vā mātukucchiyaṃ bahi nikkhamituṃ aladdhokāso nāsikāvāto mātukucchito nikkhantamatte paṭhamaṃ bahi nikkhamatīti vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ uppattikkamena ‘‘ādimhi sāso assāso’’ti bahinikkhamanavāto vutto. Tenevāha ‘‘sabbesampi gabbhaseyyakāna’’ntiādi. Suttantaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana pavattiyaṃ bhāvanārambhasamaye paṭhamaṃ nāsikāvātassa anto ākaḍḍhitvā pacchā bahi vissajjanato pavattikkamena ‘‘ādimhi sāso assāso’’ti antopavisanavāto vutto. Suttantanayoyeva cettha ‘‘assāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato ajjhattaṃ vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā ca, passāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato bahiddhā vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā cā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.157) imāya pāḷiyā sameti. ‘‘Bhāvanārambhe pavattikkamasseva icchitattā sundarataro’’ti vadanti. Tāluṃ āhacca nibbāyatīti tāluṃ āhacca nirujjhati. Tena kira sampatijāto bāladārako khipitaṃ karoti. Evaṃ tāvātiādi yathāvuttassa atthassa nigamanaṃ. Keci ‘‘evaṃ tāvāti anena pavattikkamena assāso bahinikkhamanavātoti gahetabbanti adhippāyo’’ti vadanti.
“依长时”是指依时间上的长时。因为“addhāna”这个词既表示时间,也表示处所。在这里,先以处所长时作为例子来展示,然后依时间上的长时来说明入出息的长短,所以说了“正如”等话。其中,“处所长时”是指作为处所的长远。“遍满”就是周遍。即使碎成微尘,也因为有许多缠束的缘故,“长时”就是指长的区域。因此,由于缓慢地转起而有长续不断性,所以称为长。这里应当知道,在象等和狗等的身体中,入出息的长短是依时间上的长时来说的,而不是依处所长时,因为有“缓慢地充满后缓慢地出去,快速地充满后快速地出去”这样的说法。“于人中”是指在同等大小的人类身体中。“长入息”的意思是长的入息之流在转起。“出息”在这里也是同样的道理。至于狗、兔等,则连接为短入息和短出息。然而,这些入出息的长与短,应当看作那些众生身体的本性。“他们”指那些众生。“彼”指入出息。“短暂长时”就是很少的时间。“以九种行相”是就修习业处而尚未获得前后殊胜的人来说的,最初所说的只有三种行相,而这三种实际上是依三种人而说:有的人善巧观察入息,有的人善巧观察出息,有的人善巧观察这两者。也有人这样说:“‘入息与出息’合在一起说,是为了显示修习无间断地转起。”依欲乐而有如前所说的三种,同样依欢喜也有三种,这就是九种行相。巴利
Addhānavasenāti kāladdhānavasena. Ayañhi addhāna-saddo kālassa desassa ca vācakoti. Tattha desaddhānaṃ udāharaṇabhāvena dassetvā kāladdhānassa vasena assāsapassāsānaṃ dīgharassataṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha okāsaddhānanti okāsabhūtaṃ addhānaṃ. Pharitvāti byāpetvā. Cuṇṇavicuṇṇāpi anekakalāpabhāvena, dīghamaddhānanti dīghaṃ padesaṃ. Tasmāti saṇikaṃ pavattiyā dīghasantānatāya dīghāti vuccanti. Ettha ca hatthiādisarīre sunakhādisarīre ca assāsapassāsānaṃ desaddhānavisiṭṭhena kāladdhānavaseneva dīgharassatā vuttāti veditabbā ‘‘saṇikaṃ pūretvā saṇikameva nikkhamanti, sīghaṃ pūretvā sīghameva nikkhamantī’’ti vacanato. Manussesūti samānappamāṇesupi manussasarīresu. Dīghaṃ assasantīti dīghaṃ assāsappabandhaṃ pavattentīti attho. Passasantīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sunakhasasādayo viya rassaṃ assasanti passasanti cāti yojanā. Idaṃ pana dīghaṃ rassañca assasanaṃ passasanañca tesaṃ sattānaṃ sarīrassa sabhāvoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tesanti tesaṃ sattānaṃ. Teti assāsapassāsā. Ittaramaddhānanti appakaṃ kālaṃ. Navahākārehīti bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa pubbenāparaṃ aladdhavisesassa kevalaṃ addhānavasena ādito vuttā tayo ākārā, te ca kho ekacco assāsaṃ suṭṭhu sallakkheti, ekacco passāsaṃ, ekacco tadubhayanti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena. Keci pana ‘‘assasatipi passasatipīti ekajjhaṃ vacanaṃ bhāvanāya nirantaraṃ pavattidassanattha’’nti vadanti. Chandavasena pubbe viya tayo, tathā pāmojjavasenāti imehi navahi ākārehi.
在这里,虽然对某一位修行者来说,只可能得到三种行相,但按照传承,因为一切都已收在巴利圣典里,而且应当依照它们来作预备修行,所以世尊说“在这里,这位比丘以九种行相”。像这样了知,就是指依照上面所说的那些行相,对入息和出息了知,并在那里持续作意。“以一种行相”,是指在长入息等四种行相当中以一种行相,或者在九种、三种当中以一种。因为下面将会这样说:巴利
Kāmañcettha ekassa puggalassa tayo eva ākārā labbhanti, tantivasena pana sabbesaṃ pāḷiāruḷhattā tesaṃ vasena parikammassa kātabbattā ca ‘‘tatrāyaṃbhikkhu navahākārehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ pajānatoti evaṃ yathāvuttehi ākārehi assāsapassāse pajānato, tattha manasikāraṃ pavattentassa. Ekenākārenāti dīghaṃassāsādīsu catūsu ākāresu ekena ākārena, navasu tīsu vā ekena. Tathā hi vakkhati –
“ 入息有长有短,
出息也是同样的情况。
四种形态存在,
就在比丘的鼻尖上。”巴利
‘‘Dīgho rasso ca assāso, Passāsopi ca tādiso; Cattāro vaṇṇā vattanti, Nāsikaggeva bhikkhuno’’ti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165);
这个修习就是随观入出息之身,因此说“身随观的念处修习得以成就”。巴利
Ayaṃ bhāvanā assāsapassāsakāyānupassanāti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā sampajjatī’’ti.
现在,为了纯粹按照圣典的方式,说明那九种行相以及修习的方法,所以开始讲“如……”等文。其中,“如何了知?”是想要说明了知的方法而发问。“长入息”,就是具有前面所说的那种特征的长入息。“称为长时”,是指被称为长时的时间,也就是长刹那的意思。或者,“称为”这个词就像“称为盗窃”等说法里那样,是部分、区块的同义词,所以“称为长时”就是长时的部分、地方的部分,这是它的意思。“欲生起”,是因为修习能带来前后殊胜,已引生喜乐,因而于彼生起以殊胜欲作性为特征的善欲。“依欲”,是依止于如此转起的欲,而对于修习殊胜业处、令业处增长广大者。“从此更微细”,是因前述之欲的转起,而变得比先前更微细。因为依修习力,身体疲劳热恼止息,所以身的出入息变得更微细而转起。“喜悦生起”,是因出入息更微细、所缘更寂静,且业处已入行道,而与修习心俱起的、以微小等为差别的稚嫩喜得以生起。“心转回”,有人说:由于出入息渐次达到极其微细而不现前,成为须加寻索之行相,因此心从那些出入息转回、退离。然而,依修习力,当出入息达到更微细,而在那里生起似相时,心从平常的出入息转回。“舍安住”,当在那似相上生起近行、安止之别的定时,因为不再有为了再生起禅那的加行,所以成为舍置;然而这舍应知即是彼处中舍。巴利
Idāni pāḷivaseneva te nava ākāre bhāvanāvidhiñca dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘kathaṃ pajānātī’’ti pajānanavidhiṃ kathetukamyatāya pucchati. Dīghaṃ assāsanti vuttalakkhaṇaṃ dīghaṃ assāsaṃ. Addhānasaṅkhāteti addhānanti saṅkhaṃ gate dīghe kāle, dīghaṃ khaṇanti attho. Koṭṭhāsapariyāyo vā saṅkhāta-saddo ‘‘theyyasaṅkhāta’’ntiādīsu viya, tasmā addhānasaṅkhāteti addhānakoṭṭhāse desabhāgeti attho. Chando uppajjatīti bhāvanāya pubbenāparaṃ visesaṃ āvahantiyā laddhassādattā tattha sātisayo kattukāmatālakkhaṇo kusalacchando uppajjati. Chandavasenāti tathāpavattachandassa vasena visesabhāvanamanuyuñjantassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuḍḍhiṃ phātiṃ gamentassa. Tato sukhumataranti yathāvuttachandappavattiyā purimakato sukhumataraṃ. Bhāvanābalena hi paṭippassaddhadarathapariḷāhatāya kāyassa assāsapassāsā sukhumatarā hutvā pavattanti. Pāmojjaṃ uppajjatīti assāsapassāsānaṃ sukhumatarabhāvena ārammaṇassa santataratāya kammaṭṭhānassa ca vīthippaṭipannatāya bhāvanācittasahagato pamodo khuddikādibhedā taruṇapīti uppajjati. Cittaṃ vivattatīti anukkamena assāsapassāsānaṃ ativiya sukhumatarabhāvappattiyā anupaṭṭhahane vicetabbākārappattehi tehi cittaṃ vinivattatīti keci. Bhāvanābalena pana sukhumatarabhāvappattesu assāsapassāsesu tattha paṭibhāganimitte uppanne pakatiassāsapassāsato cittaṃ nivattati. Upekkhā saṇṭhātīti tasmiṃ paṭibhāganimitte upacārappanābhede samādhimhi uppanne puna jhānanibbattanatthaṃ byāpārābhāvato ajjhupekkhanaṃ hoti, sā panāyaṃ upekkhā tatramajjhattupekkhāti veditabbā.
“以这九种行相”:就是以如上所说的这九种方式生起的。“长入出息之身”:长的入出息,即使碎成微尘,从聚集的意义上说也是“身”。依于入出息而生起的相,在这里也按照入出息的通称来说。“念的现起”:念到达那个所缘之后安住下来,所以叫“现起”。“随观之智”:以止的方式随观相,以观的方式把入出息以及依于它的身确定为“色”,把心以及与心相应的诸法确定为“无色”,这样对名色进行随观,这里的智就是对它的如实了知。“身是现起”:那个身以作所缘的方式到达之后,念在这里安住,所以叫“现起”。在这里,以“身是现起”这句话,也摄受了其他身,因为这里也希求那样说的遍取行相。不是念:那个身不是念。念既是现起,也是念,因为具有忆念之义和现起之义。以那个念:以如上所说的念。以那个智:以如上所说的智。那个身:那个入出息身以及依于它的色身。随观:以与禅相应的智和以观智,一再地随观。因此说于身随观身之念处修习:通过那种随观,对于前面所说的身,这就叫作于身随观身的念处修习。这里所说的是:对于如前所说的入出息身以及作为它所依的业生身,只是对身的随观,不像对阳焰作水想那样,不是对无常等法性的身作常等随观,而是如其所应地随观其无常、苦、无我、不净之性。或者,因为在身中不存在可执取为“我”或“我的”、“女人”或“男人”的任何东西,所以不那样随观,而只是对身本身的随观,这就是身随观;与那种身随观相应的念本身就是现起,就是念处;对它修习、增长,就是于身随观身之念处修习。巴利
Imehi navahi ākārehīti imehi yathāvuttehi navahi pakārehi pavattā. Dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā kāyoti dīghākārā assāsapassāsā cuṇṇavicuṇṇāpi samūhaṭṭhena kāyo. Assāsapassāse nissāya uppannanimittampi ettha assāsapassāsasāmaññavasena vuttaṃ. Upaṭṭhānaṃ satīti taṃ ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā tiṭṭhatīti sati upaṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Anupassanā ñāṇanti samathavasena nimittassa anupassanā vipassanāvasena assāsapassāse tannissayañca kāyaṃ ‘‘rūpa’’nti, cittaṃ taṃsampayuttadhamme ca ‘‘arūpa’’nti vavatthapetvā nāmarūpassa anupassanā ca ñāṇaṃ tattha yathābhūtāvabodho. Kāyo upaṭṭhānanti so kāyo ārammaṇakaraṇavasena upagantvā sati ettha tiṭṭhatīti upaṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Ettha ca ‘‘kāyo upaṭṭhāna’’nti iminā itarakāyassapi saṅgahoti tathā vuttaṃ sammasanacārassapi idha icchitattā. No satīti so kāyo sati nāma na hoti. Sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati ca saraṇaṭṭhena upaṭṭhānaṭṭhena ca. Tāya satiyāti yathāvuttāya satiyā. Tena ñāṇenāti yathāvutteneva ñāṇena. Taṃ kāyanti taṃ assāsapassāsakāyañceva tannissayarūpakāyañca. Anupassatīti jhānasampayuttañāṇena ceva vipassanāñāṇena ca anu anu passati. Tena vuccati kāye kāyānupassanā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāti tena anupassanena yathāvutte kāye ayaṃ kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāti vuccati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yā ayaṃ yathāvutte assāsapassāsakāye tassa nissayabhūte karajakāye ca kāyasseva anupassanā anudakabhūtāya marīciyā udakānupassanā viya na aniccādisabhāve kāye niccādibhāvānupassanā, atha kho yathārahaṃ aniccadukkhānattā subhabhāvasseva anupassanā. Atha vā kāye ‘‘ahanti vā, mamanti vā, itthīti vā, puriso’’ti vā gahetabbassa kassaci abhāvato tādisaṃ ananupassitvā kāyamattasseva anupassanā kāyānupassanā, tāya kāyānupassanāya sampayuttā satiyeva upaṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ, tassa bhāvanā vaḍḍhanā kāyānupassanā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāti.
正是这个方法:以“九种行相”等所说的方式,在短呼吸的部分也显示出来。此处:在这个如所显示的、以“如何长入息”等引出的巴利教法中。于此:在这个以短呼吸部分引出的巴利教法中。此:指瑜伽行者。以长时间:即以长久的时间。以短时间:即以短暂的时间。以这些行相:即以这九种行相。巴利
Eseva nayoti ‘‘navahi ākārehī’’tiādinā vuttavidhiṃ rassa-pade atidissati. Etthāti etasmiṃ yathādassite ‘‘kathaṃ dīghaṃ assasanto’’tiādinā āgate pāḷinaye. Idhāti imasmiṃ rassapadavasena āgate pāḷinaye. Ayanti yogāvacaro. Addhānavasenāti dīghakālavasena. Ittaravasenāti parittakālavasena. Imehi ākārehīti imehi navahi ākārehi.
所谓“那样的”,就是指长和短。“四种”是指四种形态,也就是长等这些。“比丘在鼻端”:这是为了让偈颂读起来顺畅,所以省略来说。“或者在鼻端”:这里的“或”字表示不确定,用它来把上唇也包括进去。巴利
Tādisoti dīgho rasso ca. Cattāro vaṇṇāti cattāro ākārā te ca dīghādayo eva. Nāsikaggeva bhikkhunoti gāthāsukhatthaṃ rassaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Nāsikagge vāti vā-saddo aniyamattho, tena uttaroṭṭhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
觉知全身:就是对整个身体,一处一处、如实地去感受、去了知;或者说,他对于每一处都如实地有感受,或者说,他正对每一处都如实地感受着,这就是这句话的意思。在这里,虽然用“一切”这个说法已经能说明对入息等身体没有遗漏地全部涵盖,但因为身体是由许多微粒聚集合成的,为了显示对它的所有部分都有感受,所以又用了“paṭi”(逐一、各别)这个词;为了显示在这件事上是认真去做的,所以又用了“saṃ”(好好地、正确地)这个词。为了说明这个意思,说了“sakalassa”(整个的)等语。在这里,虽然入出息是相同的,但为了说明瑜伽行者于修行方法中应一处一处、认真地去修行,所以作了分别的开示;同样,为了阐明这个意思,虽然意义相同,仍以“sakalassa”等语对两个词分别作了义释,应当知道。“令明显”:令显著,令全然明了,这是其义。令明显、令明了,在那里,正是以不痴智令彼等转起,为了说明这一点,说了“evaṃ viditaṃ karonto”(如是令知)等语。“因此”:因为是以与智相应的心令入出息转起,而非以与智不相应的心,因此,如是状态者被称为“觉知全身,我当入息、出息而学”,这是诸佛等所说——应如此连接。“碎为微尘而散”:因众多聚的状态,以碎为微尘的状态而散。“开始明显”:由于依于念与智,先前已作之行作已转起。“应成为那样的”:应成为与第四人相似的状态,意思是:更何况先令念与智现前之后,于三处都应令唯与智相应之心转起。巴利
Sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedīti sabbassa kāyassa paṭi paṭi paccekaṃ sammadeva vedanasīlo jānanasīlo, tassa vā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedo etassa atthi, taṃ vā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedamānoti attho. Tattha tattha sabba-ggahaṇena assāsādikāyassa anavasesapariyādāne siddhepi anekakalāpasamudāyabhāvato tassa sabbesampi bhāgānaṃ saṃvedanadassanatthaṃ paṭi-saddaggahaṇaṃ, tattha sakkaccakāribhāvadassanatthaṃ saṃ-saddaggahaṇanti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sakalassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yathā samānesupi assāsapassāsesu yogino paṭipattividhāne paccekaṃ sakkaccaṃyeva paṭipajjitabbanti dassetuṃ visuṃ desanā katā, evaṃ tamevatthaṃ dīpetuṃ satipi atthassa samānatāya ‘‘sakalassā’’tiādinā padadvayassa visuṃ visuṃ atthavaṇṇanā katāti veditabbā. Pākaṭaṃ karontoti vibhūtaṃ karonto, sabbaso vibhāventoti attho. Pākaṭīkaraṇaṃ vibhāvanaṃ tattha asammuyhanañāṇeneva nesaṃ pavattanena hotīti dassento ‘‘evaṃ viditaṃ karonto’’tiādimāha . Tattha tasmāti yasmā ñāṇasampayuttacitteneva assāsapassāse pavatteti, na vippayuttacittena, tasmā evaṃbhūto sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatīti vuccati buddhādīhīti yojanā. Cuṇṇavicuṇṇavisaṭeti anekakalāpatāya cuṇṇavicuṇṇabhāvena visaṭe. Ādi pākaṭohoti satiyā ñāṇassa ca vasena katapubbābhisaṅkhārassa pavattattā. Tādisena bhavitabbanti catutthapuggalasadisena bhavitabbaṃ, pageva satiṃ ñāṇañca paccupaṭṭhapetvā tīsupi ṭhānesu ñāṇasampayuttameva cittaṃ pavattetabbanti adhippāyo.
“如此”是指以刚才所说的方式,也就是依遍身感受。
“努力”就是能够承担、敢于去做。
“策励”就是发起精进,也就是让作意运转起来。
“于如是状态者”是指正在修习入出息念的人。
“防护”是指念,也可以指精进。
“以彼念”是指以那依入出息而生起的念。
“以彼作意”是指那以念为前导的修习作意,意思是与它一起。
“习行”是指在所说的“三学”中修习增上善法。因为在这里,这种习行就被称为“学”。
“前一种方式”是指在先前那种修习方式中,最初两种事项,这就是所要表达的意思。
在那里,虽然由于如实了知入出息的长短,确实能够生起智慧,但这并不难,因为只是如其生起而执取它们而已,所以那里用了现在时的表达。
但这一点却很难,就像人走在刀刃上一样。因此,为了表明这里应当先有前方便,才会有更殊胜的修习,便用了未来时的表达。为了显示这个意思,才说“在那里,因为……”等。
其中,“于智的生起等”里的“等”字,包含了身行寂止、喜的感受等。不过有些人在此说:“这是防护与正受的摄集。”巴利
Evanti vuttappakārena sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedanavaseneva. Ghaṭatīti ussahati. Vāyamatīti vāyāmaṃ karoti, manasikāraṃ pavattetīti attho. Tathābhūtassāti ānāpānassatiṃ bhāventassa. Saṃvaroti sati vīriyampi vā. Tāya satiyāti yā sā ānāpāne ārabbha pavattā sati, tāya. Tena manasikārenāti yo so tattha satipubbaṅgamo bhāvanāmanasikāro, tena saddhinti adhippāyo. Āsevatīti ‘‘tisso sikkhāyo’’ti vutte adhikusaladhamme āsevati. Tadāsevanañhettha sikkhananti adhippetaṃ. Purimanayeti purimasmiṃ bhāvanānaye, paṭhamavatthudvayeti adhippāyo. Tatthāpi kāmaṃ ñāṇuppādanaṃ labbhateva assāsapassāsānaṃ yāthāvato dīgharassabhāvāvabodhasabbhāvato, tathāpi taṃ na dukkaraṃ yathāpavattānaṃ tesaṃ gahaṇamattabhāvatoti tattha vattamānakālappayogo kato. Idaṃ pana dukkaraṃ purisassa khuradhārāyaṃ gamanasadisaṃ, tasmā sātisayenettha pubbābhisaṅkhārena bhavitabbanti dīpetuṃ anāgatakālappayogo katoti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ñāṇuppādanādīsūti ādi-saddena kāyasaṅkhārapassambhanapītipaṭisaṃvedanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Keci panettha ‘‘saṃvarasamādānānaṃ saṅgaho’’ti vadanti.
所谓身行,就是入出息。它虽然也是由心产生的,但因为它是依靠这个业报身才能运作,所以被这个业报身所造作,因此称为身行。不过,另一种说法——像“身行、语行”那样提到的、以思为特征的身行,虽然它也在其他感官门中产生,但主要是通过身门运作、经常通过身门运作,所以以身门为特征——那种身行在这里并不是要说的意思。“令寂止”等说法中,后一个词是前一个词的含义说明。因此,寂止就是令平静下来,应当理解为:在这样用功的时候,由于用功到位,本来会生起的粗的身行就不再产生了。“其中”指的是“令粗的身行寂止”这句话里面。“未执取时”是指业处还没有开始修的时候,也正是身和心都还没有被执取的时候。因为“盘腿坐好,把身体端正,把念放在面前”这句话说的是对身的执取,“把念安立在面前”说的是对心的执取。所以论中说:“身和心都被执取了。”“身”就是业报所生的身体。“有燥热”就是带有热恼。而它们这种有燥热的性质,就像因为粗重而离不开粗的性质一样,所以说“粗的”。“更强”就是更有力、更粗大。“成为寂静”:首先,心因为没有向外散乱而变得专一,执取业处而运作,就变得寂静、平静;正因如此,由那个心生起的色法就达到了轻快、柔软、适合运作的状态;与那相应,其余的三类相续色法也是如此。这样,当心和身都寂静地运作时,依靠它们的入出息就具有寂静的性质,逐渐变得细微、越来越细微、最极细微地运作。因此说“然而,当他的身……”等等。“我令寂止”是最初的转向。“弯曲”是倾向,“正持”是正确地一再持取,“作意”就是在同一个意义上前后不断地转向,就是对这个意义作意、把心放在上面,“审察”就是观察。巴利
Kāyasaṅkhāranti assāsapassāsaṃ. So hi cittasamuṭṭhānopi samāno karajakāyapaṭibaddhavuttitāya tena saṅkharīyatīti kāyasaṅkhāroti vuccati. Yo pana ‘‘kāyasaṅkhāro vacīsaṅkhāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.102) evamāgato kāyasaṅkhāro cetanālakkhaṇo satipi dvārantaruppattiyaṃ yebhuyyavuttiyā tabbahulavuttiyā ca kāyadvārena lakkhito, so idha nādhippeto. Passambhentotiādīsu pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ padaṃ purimassa purimassa atthavacanaṃ. Tasmā passambhanaṃ nāma vūpasamanaṃ, tañca tathāpayoge asati uppajjanārahassa oḷārikassa kāyasaṅkhārassa payogasampattiyā anuppādananti daṭṭhabbaṃ . Tatrāti ‘‘oḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento’’ti ettha. Apariggahitakāleti kammaṭṭhānassa anāraddhakāle, tato eva kāyacittānampi apariggahitakāle. ‘‘Nisīdati pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyā’’ti hi iminā kāyapariggaho , ‘‘parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti iminā cittapariggaho vutto. Tenevāha – ‘‘kāyopi cittampi pariggahitā hontī’’ti. Kāyoti karajakāyo. Sadarathāti sapariḷāhā. Sā ca nesaṃ sadarathatā garubhāvena viya oḷārikatāya avinābhāvinīti āha ‘‘oḷārikā’’ti. Balavatarāti sabalā thūlā. Santā hontīti cittaṃ tāva bahiddhā vikkhepābhāvena ekaggaṃ hutvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā pavattamānaṃ santaṃ hoti vūpasantaṃ, tato eva taṃsamuṭṭhānā rūpadhammā lahumudukammaññabhāvappattā, tadanuguṇatāya sesaṃ tisantatirūpanti evaṃ citte kāye ca vūpasante pavattamāne tannissitā assāsapassāsā santasabhāvā anukkamena sukhumasukhumatarasukhumatamā hutvā pavattanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yadā panassa kāyopī’’tiādi. Passambhemīti paṭhamāvajjanā. Ābhujanaṃ ābhogo, sammā anu anu āharaṇaṃ samannāhāro, tasmiṃyeva atthe aparāparaṃ pavattaāvajjanā tasseva atthassa manasikaraṇaṃ citte ṭhapanaṃ manasikāro, vīmaṃsā paccavekkhaṇā.
有燥热,就是带着热恼。增盛,就是强而粗,这是就词性变异而说的。因为这里指的其实是身行。或者说,“成为增盛而转起”是对动作的限定。细,在这里也是同样的道理。于身,这里应当连带于心一起来理解。巴利
Sāraddheti sadarathe sapariḷāhe. Adhimattanti balavaṃ oḷārikaṃ, liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ. Kāyasaṅkhāro hi adhippeto. ‘‘Adhimattaṃ hutvā pavattatī’’ti kiriyāvisesanaṃ vā etaṃ. Sukhumanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Kāyamhīti ettha citte cāti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
从初禅出定后,为进入第二禅而进行的种种转向和预备修习,因为像初禅一样,已经把敌对法远远推开,所以由它产生的身行,在初禅和第二禅的近行中都被说为粗的。这个道理也适用于其余两种近行。或者,为了证得第二禅等而修行的瑜伽行者,因为走的是苦行道等而疲惫不堪,由于身体疲劳、心受损伤,以及寻等法的扰动而使心散乱波动,所以在第二禅等的近行中,应当知道身行是粗的。极细:在其他地方还能生起的身行,在第四禅中则是超越细的。在那里连细的状态都没有,更不用说粗了,因为它已不再转起。因此说达到不再转起。巴利
Paṭhamajjhānato vuṭṭhāya kariyamānaṃ dutiyajjhānassa nānāvajjanaṃ parikammaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ viya dūrasamussāritapaṭipakkhanti katvā taṃsamuṭṭhāno kāyasaṅkhāro paṭhamajjhāne ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre ca oḷārikoti sadiso vutto. Esa nayo sesupacāradvayepi. Atha vā dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamāya paṭipajjato dukkhāpaṭipadādivasena kilamato yogino kāyakilamathacittupaghātādivasena vitakkādisaṅkhobhena saparipphandatāya ca cittappavattiyā dutiyajjhānādiupacāresu kāyasaṅkhārassa oḷārikatā veditabbā. Atisukhumoti aññattha labbhamāno kāyasaṅkhāro catutthajjhāne atikkantasukhumo. Sukhumabhāvopissa tattha natthi kuto oḷārikatā appavattanato. Tenāha ‘‘appavattimeva pāpuṇātī’’ti.
中部诵者主张:当获得禅那的人依次进入各种等至时,或者在一座之中就证得全部禅那时,从下下禅那到上上禅那的近行,身行也变得越来越微细。因为在那些连同近行在内的禅那中,上上的禅那确实可能具有更殊胜、更寂静的性质;或者,这是针对单一次转向的近行而说的。这样一来,这个说法和前面所说的主张并不矛盾,因为二者所讨论的范围不同,所以能够成立。“一切”指的是这两者。因为所有那些禅那,按照所说的方式,确实都趋向寂止。“未执取时生起的身行,在执取时寂止”,这是就相续的相似性来说的。因为并不是那些粗的入出息等本身变成了微细,而是它们寂止的方式,正如前面所说的那样。巴利
Lābhissa sato anupubbasamāpattisamāpajjanavelaṃ ekāsaneneva vā sabbesaṃ jhānānaṃ paṭilābhaṃ sandhāya majjhimabhāṇakā heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimajjhānato uparūparijhānūpacārepi sukhumataraṃ icchanti. Tattha hi sopacārānaṃ jhānānaṃ uparūpari visesavantatā santatā ca sambhaveyya, ekāvajjanūpacāraṃ vā sandhāya evaṃ vuttaṃ. Evañhi heṭṭhā vuttavādena imassa vādassa avirodho siddho bhinnavisayattā. Sabbesaṃyevāti ubhayesampi. Yasmā te sabbepi vuccamānena vidhinā passaddhimicchantiyeva . Apariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro pariggahitakāle paṭippassambhatīti idaṃ sadisasantānatāya vuttaṃ. Na hi te eva oḷārikā assāsādayo sukhumā honti. Passambhanākāro pana tesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.
在把握大种时说“微细”,这是针对通过四界差别门投入观禅而说的。在把握一切色法时,因为修习层层递进、越来越殊胜,所以是微细。因此他说“在把握色与无色时是微细”。所谓“以相为所缘的观禅”,说的是对聚的遍察。从厌随观开始是强力观禅,在那之前是弱力观禅。依照前面所说的方法,就是像“未把握时”等那样,按照止禅的方法所说的。这就是说,在观禅的方法中,也应该像“未把握时转起的身行,在把握大种时寂止”等那样,把这种寂止配合起来理解。巴利
Mahābhūtapariggahe sukhumoti catudhātumukhena vipassanābhinivesaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sakalarūpapariggahe sukhumo bhāvanāya uparūpari paṇītabhāvato. Tenevāha ‘‘rūpārūpapariggahe sukhumo’’ti. Lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāyāti kalāpasammasanamāha. Nibbidānupassanāto paṭṭhāya balavavipassanā, tato oraṃ dubbalavipassanā. Pubbe vuttanayenāti ‘‘apariggahitakāle’’tiādinā samathanaye vuttanayena. ‘‘Apariggahe pavatto kāyasaṅkhāro mahābhūtapariggahe paṭippassambhatī’’tiādinā vipassanānayepi paṭippassaddhi yojetabbāti vuttaṃ hoti.
Assā是指“令身行止息”这一句里的这个词。Codanāsodhanāhi是通过追问和解答的方式。Evaṃ是指现在正要说明的那种方式。Kathaṃ是说:对于所讲的“令……止息……修习”,为了要说明身行是怎样止息、修行者又是怎样修习的,先提出问题以表示想要解释,然后从身行的自性、粗与细、寂止以及追问和解答这几个方面来展示,于是开始说“什么是身行”等等。其中,kāyikā是指存在于色身之中的。Kāyappaṭibaddhā是指依止于身的。身存在时它们才存在,身不存在时它们就不存在,因此,它们虽然不是由身所生起,却仍由身而造作,所以称为身行。Passambhento是指令粗而又粗的身行渐次止息。巴利
Assāti imassa ‘‘passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāra’’nti padassa. Codanāsodhanāhīti anuyogaparihārehi. Evanti idāni vuccamānākārena. Kathanti yaṃ idaṃ ‘‘passambhayaṃ…pe… sikkhatī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ kathaṃ kena pakārena kāyasaṅkhārassa passambhanaṃ yogino ca sikkhanaṃ hotīti kathetukāmatāya pucchitvā kāyasaṅkhāre sarūpato oḷārikasukhumato vūpasamato anuyogaparihārato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘katame kāyasaṅkhārā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kāyikāti rūpakāye bhavā. Kāyappaṭibaddhāti kāyasannissitā. Kāye sati honti, asati na honti, tato eva te akāyasamuṭṭhānāpi kāyena saṅkharīyantīti kāyasaṅkhārā. Passambhentoti oḷārikoḷārikaṃ passambhento.
剩下两个词是同一个意思的不同说法。因为让粗的身行——那种还没有平息下来的状态——沉静下来,就称为“令止息”;让它达到不再生起的灭尽,就称为“令灭”;把它引向完全寂静的状态,就称为“令寂止”。巴利
Sesapadadvayaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Oḷārikañhi kāyasaṅkhāraṃ avūpasantasabhāvaṃ sannisīdāpento ‘‘passambhento’’ti vuccati, anuppādanirodhaṃ pāpento ‘‘nirodhento’’ti, suṭṭhu santasabhāvaṃ nayanto ‘‘vūpasamento’’ti.
“像那样的”是指“如同那一类的”。“身行”是指粗的身行。“向前弯”是身体朝前方弯曲。“向侧弯”是朝各个不同方向弯曲。“向一切弯”是朝一切方向弯曲,或者说是充分地弯曲。“向后弯”是朝后方弯曲。“动”等是“向前弯”等的同义词;或者,“向前弯”等是向前移动等较强的动作,“动”等是较弱的动作。“令身行止息”是指:使那种作为向前弯等动作之因的粗身行止息。因为当那粗身行止息时,向前弯等也就止息了。巴利
Yathārūpehīti yādisehi. Kāyasaṅkhārehīti oḷārikehi kāyasaṅkhārehi. Ānamanāti abhimukhena kāyassa namanā. Vinamanāti visuṃ visuṃ passato namanā. Sannamanāti sabbato, suṭṭhu vā namanā. Paṇamanāti pacchato namanā. Iñjanādīni ānamanādīnaṃ vevacanāni, adhimattāni vā abhimukhacalanādīni ānamanādayo, mandāni iñjanādayo. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti tathārūpaṃ ānamanādīnaṃ kāraṇabhūtaṃ oḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ paṭippassambhento. Tasmiñhi passambhite ānamanādayopi passambhitā eva honti.
寂静、微细,意思是:由于那样的身行——也就是让身体不再躁动的因——弯曲等动作不再生起,所以它因为没有恼害而寂静,因为不粗重而微细。令身行止息,这是总体上把身行说为一个。或者,先让粗重再粗重的身行止息,渐次生起那些能令身体不躁动的、越来越微细的身行,再把这些也止息,直到令达到最极微细顶点的身行止息,针对这个意思才说令寂静、微细的身行止息。巴利
Santaṃ sukhumanti yathārūpehi kāyasaṅkhārehi kāyassa aparipphandanahetūhi ānamanādayo na honti, tathārūpaṃ darathābhāvato santaṃ, anoḷārikatāya sukhumaṃ. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti sāmaññato ekaṃ katvā vadati. Atha vā pubbe oḷārikoḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ paṭippassambhento anukkamena kāyassa aparipphandanahetubhūte sukhumasukhumatare uppādetvā tepi paṭippassambhetvā paramasukhumatāya koṭippattaṃ yaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ paṭippassambheti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘santaṃ sukhumaṃ passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāra’’nti.
“Iti”等是质难者的话。其中,“iti”是表示方式的助词,“kira”表示不认可,意思是“据说如此”。这里要表达的意思是:“如果按照所说的方式,即使极微细的身行也能令它止息。” “Evaṃ sante”是说:如果按照你所说的方式可以成立的话。“Vātūpaladdhiyā”是指风的获得。“Ca”这个词表示集合,意思是:以出入息等风为所缘的心,它的产生、生起、运作不会发生,而那些风也应该被他止息——这就是要表达的意思。“出入息的产生”是指:通过修习令粗的出入息止息之后,微细的出入息也不会产生,因为两者都应该被他止息。“入出息念”是指:以入出息为所缘的念的运作也不会发生,因为入出息已经不存在了。正因为如此,与它相应的入出息念定的产生、生起也不会发生。因为有所缘的法,任何时候都不可能没有所缘而生起。“Na ca naṃ taṃ”这里,“naṃ”只是助词。智者、有智慧的人既不进入所说的那种等至,也不从那里出定——应该这样连接。这样,质难者就是以“止息就是一切都归于不存在”的意思来提出质难。巴利
Itītiādi codakavacanaṃ. Tattha itīti pakāratthe nipāto, kirāti arucisūcane, evañceti attho. Ayañhettha adhippāyo ‘‘vuttappakārena yadi atisukhumampi kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhetī’’ti. Evaṃ santeti evaṃ sati tayā vuttākāre labbhamāne. Vātūpaladdhiyāti vātassa upaladdhiyā. Ca-saddo samuccayattho, assāsādivātārammaṇassa cittassa pabhāvanā uppādanā pavattanā na hoti, te ca tena passambhetabbāti adhippāyo. Assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanāti oḷārike assāsapassāse bhāvanāya paṭippassambhetvā sukhumānaṃ tesaṃ pabhāvanā ca na hoti ubhayesaṃ tesaṃ tena paṭippassambhetabbato. Ānāpānassatiyāti ānāpānārammaṇāya satiyā ca pavattanaṃ na hoti ānāpānānaṃ abhāvato. Tato eva taṃsampayuttassa ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā uppādanāpi na hoti. Na hi kadāci ārammaṇena vinā sārammaṇā dhammā sambhavanti. Na ca naṃ tanti ettha nanti nipātamattaṃ. Taṃ vuttavidhānaṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā paññavanto na ceva samāpajjantipi tato na vuṭṭhahantipīti yojanā. Evaṃ codako sabbena sabbaṃ abhāvūpanayanaṃ passambhananti adhippāyena codeti.
再者,“iti kira”等语,是对前面所说的责难作出的回答。其中,“kira”这个词,是表示“如果”这个意思的虚词。“iti kira sikkhati”的意思是:如果按照我所说的方式去修习。“evaṃ sante”的意思是:在这样止息的情况下。“pabhāvanā hoti”是说:虽然粗的身行止息了,但微细的身行仍然存在,随着逐渐达到最极微细的状态,由于相的生起,入出息念和入出息念定的修成确实能够实现——这就是这段话的意旨。巴利
Puna iti kirātiādi yathāvuttāya codanāya vissajjanā. Tattha kirāti yadīti etassa atthe nipāto. Iti kira sikkhati, mayā vuttākārena yadi sikkhatīti attho. Evaṃ santeti evaṃ passambhane sati. Pabhāvanā hotīti yadipi oḷārikā kāyasaṅkhārā paṭippassambhanti, sukhumā pana atthevāti anukkamena paramasukhumabhāvappattassa vasena nimittuppattiyā ānāpānassatiyā ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā ijjhatevāti adhippāyo.
“如那样如何”应当理解为:按照所说的方式,那应当像什么那样来看待?在说明这个道理时,是否有什么譬喻可用?这就是这里的意旨。现在为了显示譬喻,所以说“譬如”等话。其中,“譬如”是表达譬喻义的助词。“在铜器里”指在铜制的器皿中。“相”指相,也就是那些声音生起的行相,这是它的意思。这里是以属格的意义来使用业格。“因善执取”是因为善于执取。“因善作意”是因为善于安放在心中。“因善持守”是因为完全正确地持守、善加标记。“微细的声音”是指随声,也就是那些微小的声音,因为这里的“ka”音有微小的含义。“以微细声相为所缘”是说微细的声音本身就是相,即微细声相,以它为所缘,这样说。虽然那时微细的声音也已灭去,但由于声相被善加执取,心便以更加微细的声相为所缘而转起。从最初开始,对于逐一灭去的声音,以不散乱的心持守其相,次第推进,最终心便以极其微细的声相为所缘而转起。心不散乱,是因为在那现起的相上具有等持。巴利
Yathākathaṃ viyāti yathāvuttavidhānaṃ taṃ kathaṃ viya daṭṭhabbaṃ, atthi kiñci tadatthasampaṭipādane opammanti adhippāyo. Idāni opammaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha seyyathāpīti opammatthe nipāto. Kaṃseti kaṃsabhājane. Nimittanti nimittassa, tesaṃ saddānaṃ pavattākārassāti attho. Sāmiatthe hi idaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Suggahitattāti suṭṭhu gahitattā. Sumanasikatattāti suṭṭhu citte ṭhapitattā. Sūpadhāritattāti sammadeva upadhāritattā sallakkhitattā. Sukhumakā saddāti anurave āha, ye appakā. Appattho hi ayaṃ ka-saddo. Sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇatāpīti sukhumo saddova nimittaṃ sukhumasaddanimittaṃ, tadārammaṇatāyapīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kāmaṃ tadā sukhumāpi saddā niruddhā, saddanimittassa pana suggahitattā sukhumatarasaddanimittārammaṇabhāvenapi cittaṃ pavattati. Ādito paṭṭhāya hi tassa tassa niruddhassa saddassa nimittaṃ avikkhittena cittena upadhārentassa anukkamena pariyosāne atisukhumasaddanimittampi ārammaṇaṃ katvā cittaṃ pavattateva. Cittaṃ na vikkhepaṃ gacchati tasmiṃ yathāupaṭṭhite nimitte samādhānasabbhāvato.
“如此成立时”等语,是为了总结前面所说的内容而说的。其中,为了把与诘问和辨明一起解释过义理的经文句子提取出来,按身随观的分类加以显示,所以说了“令身行轻安”等语。在这里,“令身行轻安”应当理解为:所说的入出息就是身,要这样连接。或者,在“令身行轻安”这个地方,应当看到它的意思是:入出息就是身。因为在《大念处经》中开示身随观时,只说了最初的四个法;而且在《入出息念经》中也说:“诸比丘,比丘在什么时候入息长,就了知‘我入息长’……乃至……学习‘我令身行轻安而呼出’。诸比丘,那时比丘就在身上随观身而住。”所以说了“这是依身随观而说的最初四法”。巴利
Evaṃ santetiādi vuttassevatthassa nigamanavasena vuttaṃ. Tattha yassa suttapadassa saddhiṃ codanāsodhanāhi attho vutto, taṃ uddharitvā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānāni vibhāgato dassetuṃ ‘‘passambhaya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ . Tattha passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti vuttaassāsapassāsā kāyoti yojanā veditabbā. Atha vā passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti ettha assāsapassāsā kāyoti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Mahāsatipaṭṭhānasutte (dī. ni. 2.372 ādayo; ma. ni. 1.105 ādayo) kāyānupassanaṃ kathentena paṭhamacatukkasseva vuttattā, ānāpānassatisuttepi ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dīghaṃ vā assasanto dīghaṃ assasāmīti pajānāti…pe… passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati. Kāye kāyānupassī, bhikkhave, tasmiṃ samaye bhikkhu viharatī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.149) vuttattā ca ‘‘kāyānupassanāvasena vuttassa paṭhamacatukkassā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“依初学者业处”这句话,是就止业处说的;而观业处,在其余的四组里也同样可以得到。“此处”指的是第一组四法。“与无碍解俱行”这只是举例说明,对于有福德、具足亲依止的人来说,神通也确实能够成就。“四种”是指依巴帝摩卡防护等而分的四种。“不犯”是指不违犯七种犯聚中的任何一种。“已犯的出离”是指:对于已犯、可作对治的罪,通过如法作对治而出离;对于靠说戒出离的罪,通过说戒而出离;对于靠出离出离的罪,通过别住等律仪作法而出离——这样说。因为通过说戒也能从已犯的罪中出离,所以它也包含在出离之中。“不被烦恼所迫”是指不被忿、恨、覆、恼、嫉、悭、诳、谄、慢、过慢、憍、放逸等恶法所迫,也就是不让它们生起。巴利
Ādikammikassa kammaṭṭhānavasenāti samathakammaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ pana itaracatukkesupi labbhateva. Etthāti paṭhamacatukke. Saha paṭisambhidāhīti nidassanamattametaṃ, puññavantānaṃ pana upanissayasampannānaṃ abhiññāpi sijjhatiyeva. Catubbidhanti pātimokkhasaṃvarādivasena catubbidhaṃ. Anāpajjananti sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ aññatarassa anāpajjanaṃ. Āpannavuṭṭhānanti āpannasappaṭikammāpattito yathādhammaṃ paṭikammakaraṇena vuṭṭhānaṃ, desanāgāminito desanāya, vuṭṭhānagāminito parivāsādivinayakammakaraṇena vuṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ hoti . Desanāyapi hi āpannāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ hotīti sāpi vuṭṭhāneneva saṅgahitā. Kilesehi ca appaṭipīḷananti kodho upanāho makkho palāso issā macchariyaṃ māyā sāṭheyyaṃ thambho sārambho māno atimāno mado pamādoti evamādīhi pāpadhammehi appaṭipīḷanaṃ, tesaṃ anuppādananti vuttaṃ hoti.
“这被称为增上戒”是连接上下文的话。在八十二种犍度义务和十四种大义务当中,这里说的大义务,是指犍度篇里讲到的这些义务:客比丘义务、常住比丘义务、出行比丘义务、随喜义务、食堂义务、乞食义务、阿兰若义务、住所义务、浴室义务、厕所义务、和尚义务、共住弟子义务、阿阇梨义务、门人义务,一共十四种。除此之外,还有一些犍度义务,比如被呵责甘马之类的特定情况下才应行的,并不是一切情况下都要行持,所以不算在大义务里面。其中,从“我要为别住比丘制定义务”开始,到“不应授具足戒……中略……不应在地上经行时在经行处经行”为止,所说的义务有六十六种。再往后,从“诸比丘,别住比丘不应与比自己别住更年长的别住比丘、应退回原本的比丘、应行敬悦的比丘、正在行敬悦的比丘、应出罪的比丘同住一个屋檐下”等文句所说的内容,因为和正常比丘所应行的没有差别,所以不单独计算,而是按别住更年长者等不同个人来行持,把它们合并起来,每一种算一个,共五种,这样就成了七十一种义务。在受摈甘马者的义务中,按照制定义务的方式所说的“不应接受正常比丘的礼拜……中略……沐浴时不应接受擦背”,这不接受礼拜等算一种,加上“正常比丘不应以戒坏来举发”等十种,这样一共八十二种。不过,这里面有些属于呵责甘马等的义务,有些属于别住等的义务,以不取不舍的方式计算,正好是八十二种。而在其他义注的地方,稍有增减就不纳入计数,所以说为八十种犍度义务。关于“增上戒”这个词,这里的“增上行”就是最上的行为;“增上行”本身就是“增上戒”;或者,是依增上行而制定的,所以叫增上戒;那本身就是戒,所以叫增上戒。这是对犍度义务所摄之戒的另一种称呼。在“我护持戒,要增上戒做什么”等语句中,“戒”应当理解为属于两部巴帝摩卡分别所摄的戒,因为犍度义务所摄的戒已经被“增上戒”这个说法涵盖进去了。“圆满”就是已圆满,或者已满足的意思。巴利
Yamidaṃ ābhisamācārikasīlaṃ vuccatīti sambandho. Dveasīti khandhakavattāni cuddasavidhaṃ mahāvattanti ettha mahāvattaṃ nāma vattakkhandhake vuttāni āgantukavattaṃ āvāsikagamikaanumodanabhattaggapiṇḍacārikaāraññikasenāsanajantāgharavaccakuṭiupajjhāyasaddhivihārikaācariyaantevāsikavattanti cuddasa vattāni. Tato aññāni pana kadāci tajjanīyakammakatādikāleyeva caritabbāni dvāsīti khandhakavattāni, na sabbāsu avatthāsu caritabbāni, tasmā mahāvattesu agaṇitāni. Tattha ‘‘pārivāsikānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vattaṃ paññapessāmī’’ti ārabhitvā ‘‘na upasampādetabbaṃ…pe… na chamāyaṃ caṅkamante caṅkame caṅkamitabba’’nti (cūḷava. 76) vuttavattāni chasaṭṭhi, tato paraṃ ‘‘na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā pārivāsikavuḍḍhatarena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ mūlāyapaṭikassanārahena, mānattārahena, mānattacārikena, abbhānārahena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekacchanne āvāse vatthabba’’ntiādinā (cūḷava. 82) vuttāni pakatatte caritabbehi anaññattā visuṃ tāni agaṇetvā pārivāsikavuḍḍhatarādīsu puggalantaresu caritabbattā tesaṃ vasena sampiṇḍetvā ekekaṃ katvā gaṇitāni pañcāti ekasattati vattāni, ukkhepanīyakammakatavattesu vattapaññāpanavasena vuttaṃ ‘‘na pakatattassa bhikkhuno abhivādanaṃ…pe… nahāne piṭṭhiparikammaṃ sāditabba’’nti (cūḷava. 51) idaṃ abhivādanādīnaṃ asādiyanaṃ ekaṃ, ‘‘na pakatatto bhikkhu sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṃsetabbo’’tiādīni (cūḷava. 51) ca dasāti evametāni dvāsīti. Etesveva pana kānici tajjanīyakammādivattāni kānici pārivāsikādivattānīti aggahitaggahaṇena dvāsīti eva. Aññattha pana aṭṭhakathāpadese appakaṃ ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotīti asīti khandhakavattānīti vuccati. Ābhisamācārikasīlanti ettha abhisamācāroti uttamasamācāro, abhisamācārova ābhisamācārikaṃ, abhisamācāraṃ vā ārabbha paññattaṃ ābhisamācārikaṃ, tadeva sīlanti ābhisamācārikasīlaṃ. Khandhakavattapariyāpannassa sīlassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ahaṃ sīlaṃ rakkhāmi, kiṃ ābhisamācārikenātiādīsu sīlanti ubhatovibhaṅgapariyāpannameva gahetabbaṃ khandhakavattapariyāpannassa ābhisamācārikaggahaṇena gahitattā. Paripūreti paripuṇṇe, paripūriteti vā attho.
从“戒清净”之后,即如前所说的戒清净之后。住处,是指住处的障碍。族姓等也是这样。其中,住处可以是一间小屋,也可以是一座院落,或者整个僧园。但它并不是对所有人都构成障碍。只有在这里忙着新建工程等事务,或者囤积了很多物品,或者因为某种原因而有所期待、心被系缚的人,住处才成为他的障碍;对其他人则不是。巴利
Tatoti yathāvuttasīlavisodhanato paraṃ. Āvāsoti āvāsapalibodho. Kulantiādīsupi eseva nayo. Tattha (visuddhi. 1.41) āvāsoti ekopi ovarako vuccati ekampi pariveṇaṃ sakalopi saṅghārāmo. Svāyaṃ na sabbasseva palibodho hoti, yo panettha navakammādiussukkaṃ vā āpajjati, bahubhaṇḍasannicayo vā hoti, yena kenaci vā kāraṇena apekkhavā paṭibaddhacitto, tasseva palibodho hoti, na itarassa.
家族,是指亲戚家族或护持者家族。对某些人来说,即使只是和护持者家族亲密相处,以“快乐的人我也快乐”这样的方式生活,也会成为障碍。他离开那些家族的人以后,甚至连去附近的寺院听法都不去。对某些人来说,即使父母也不是障碍,就像住在戈兰达迦寺的长老的外甥——那位年轻的比丘一样。巴利
Kulanti ñātikulaṃ vā upaṭṭhākakulaṃ vā. Ekaccassa hi upaṭṭhākakulampi ‘‘sukhite sukhito’’tiādinā nayena saṃsaṭṭhassa viharato palibodho hoti, so kulamānusakehi vinā dhammassavanāya sāmantavihārampi na gacchati. Ekaccassa mātāpitaropi palibodhā na honti koraṇḍakavihāravāsittherassa bhāgineyyadaharabhikkhuno viya.
利得,就是四种资具。它们怎么会成为障碍呢?一位有福德的比丘,所到之处,人们都会带着大批随从送来资具。他一边随喜他们、一边为他们说法,就找不到时间修习沙门法。从破晓一直到初夜,跟人的交往一直断不了。到了凌晨,又有许多惯于多求的乞食比丘跑来对他说:尊者,某某护持者、近事男、近事女、大臣、大臣的女儿想见您。他就说:贤友,拿衣钵来吧。随时都准备动身,一直忙个不停。那些资具就成了他的障碍。所以,他应该离开僧众,到没人认识他的地方,独自游行。这样,那种障碍就断除了。巴利
Lābhoti cattāro paccayā. Te kathaṃ palibodhā honti? Puññavantassa hi bhikkhuno gatagataṭṭhāne manussā mahāparivāre paccaye denti, so tesaṃ anumodento dhammaṃ desento samaṇadhammaṃ kātuṃ okāsaṃ na labhati, aruṇuggamanato yāva paṭhamayāmo, tāva manussasaṃsaggo na upacchijjati, puna balavapaccūseyeva bāhullikapiṇḍapātikā āgantvā ‘‘bhante, asuko upaṭṭhāko upāsako upāsikā amacco amaccadhītā tumhākaṃ dassanakāmā’’ti vadanti, so ‘‘gaṇhāvuso pattacīvara’’nti gamanasajjova hoti niccabyāvaṭo, tasseva te paccayā palibodhā honti. Tena gaṇaṃ pahāya yattha naṃ na jānanti, tattha ekakena caritabbaṃ. Evaṃ so palibodho upacchijjati.
众,是指经师众或论师众。如果因为给他们讲说或解答问题,而得不到修习沙门法的机会,那么这些众人就成了他的障碍。他应当这样把它断除:如果那些比丘已经做了很多,剩下不多,那就把它做完再进森林。如果做得少,剩下还很多,那就不该走到超过一由旬之外,而应在一由旬范围内去找另一位能教导这群人的法师,对他说:“请尊者用讲说等来摄受他们。”如果这样也找不到,就应该说:“贤友们,我有一件事要办,你们各自去觉得方便的地方吧。”然后舍弃这群人,去做自己的事。巴利
Gaṇoti suttantikagaṇo vā ābhidhammikagaṇo vā. Yo tassa uddesaṃ vā paripucchaṃ vā dento samaṇadhammassa okāsaṃ na labhati, tassa gaṇo palibodho hoti. Tena so evaṃ upacchinditabbo – sace tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahu kataṃ hoti, appaṃ avasiṭṭhaṃ, taṃ niṭṭhapetvā araññaṃ pavisitabbaṃ. Sace appaṃ kataṃ, bahu avasiṭṭhaṃ, yojanato paraṃ agantvā antoyojanaparicchede aññaṃ gaṇavācakaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘ime āyasmā uddesādīhi saṅgaṇhatū’’ti vattabbaṃ. Evampi alabhamānena ‘‘mayhaṃ, āvuso, ekaṃ kiccaṃ atthi, tumhe yathāphāsukaṭṭhānāni gacchathā’’ti gaṇaṃ pahāya attano kammaṃ kātabbaṃ.
所谓“业”,就是业的障碍。也有写成“业以及第五”的版本。这里,“业”指的是新建工程。在做这件事的时候,必须了解从木匠等人那里得到或没得到什么,对已经做完和还没做完的事都得操心,这样一来,在各方面都成了障碍。这种障碍也应该这样断除:如果剩下不多,就该把它做完。如果还剩很多,若是僧团的工程,就该交给僧团或者负责担事的比丘。若是自己的,就该交给自己那边负责担事的人。如果找不到这样的人,就把它舍给僧团,然后离开。巴利
Kammenāti kammapalibodhena. ‘‘Kammañca pañcama’’ntipi pāṭho. Tattha kammanti navakammaṃ. Taṃ karontena vaḍḍhakīādīhi laddhāladdhaṃ jānitabbaṃ, katākate ussukkaṃ āpajjitabbanti sabbathāpi palibodho hoti. Sopi evaṃ upacchinditabbo – sace appaṃ avasiṭṭhaṃ hoti, niṭṭhapetabbaṃ. Sace bahu, saṅghikaṃ ce, navakammaṃ saṅghassa vā bhārahārakabhikkhūnaṃ vā niyyātetabbaṃ. Attano santakaṃ ce, attano bhārahārakānaṃ niyyātetabbaṃ. Tādisaṃ alabhantena saṅghassa pariccajitvā gantabbaṃ.
“路途”指的是赶路。如果有人在某处想出家,或者有些生活用品需要去拿,要是拿不到就没法安心待下去,那么即使他进了山林修沙门法,这种想走的心也很难除掉。所以,应该先去把事情办完,然后再在沙门法上用心努力。巴利
Addhānanti maggagamanaṃ. Yassa hi katthaci pabbajjāpekkho vā hoti, paccayajātaṃ vā kiñci laddhabbaṃ hoti. Sace taṃ alabhanto na sakkoti adhivāsetuṃ, araññaṃ pavisitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karontassapi gamikacittaṃ nāma duppaṭivinodayaṃ hoti, tasmā gantvā taṃ kiccaṃ tīretvāva samaṇadhamme ussukkaṃ kātabbaṃ.
亲属,指的是精舍里的戒师、依止师、共住弟子、门徒、同戒师者、同依止师者,以及家中的母亲、父亲、兄弟等。他们生病了,就成了这个人的牵挂障碍。所以要照顾他们、让他们恢复正常,以此来断除这个障碍。其中,戒师生了病,如果不能很快康复,就应当终身照料。出家时的老师、授达上的老师、共住弟子、所授达上者、所度出家者、门徒、同戒师者,也一样。依止师、教授师、依止弟子、教授弟子、同依止师者,只要依止和教授的关系还没有中断,就应当照料。如果有能力,即使关系已经断了,也还是应当继续照料。对父母应当像对戒师一样照料。即使他们身为国王,如果期望儿子来照顾自己,也应当去做。他们没有药时,应当拿自己的药给他们。自己也没有的话,就算去乞食寻求,也应当给了再算。兄弟姊妹的话,先用他们自己的财物来安排给药;如果没有,就暂时拿自己的给他们,以后他们有了再拿回来,如果始终拿不回来,也不应当去催讨。对于不是亲戚的姊妹的丈夫,不应当为他配药,也不应当直接给他药,但可以对姊妹说“给你丈夫”,然后把药交给姊妹。兄弟的妻子也是这样。不过,他们的孩子是这个人的亲属,所以可以为这些孩子配药。巴利
Ñātīti vihāre ācariyupajjhāyasaddhivihārikaantevāsikasamānupajjhāyakasamānācariyakā, ghare mātā pitā bhātāti evamādikā. Te gilānā imassa palibodhā honti. Tasmā so palibodho te upaṭṭhahitvā tesaṃ pākatikakaraṇena upacchinditabbo. Tattha upajjhāyo tāva gilāno sace lahuṃ na vuṭṭhāti, yāvajīvaṃ paṭijaggitabbo, tathā pabbajjācariyo upasampadācariyo saddhivihāriko upasampāditapabbājitaantevāsikasamānupajjhāyakā ca. Nissayācariyauddesācariyanissayantevāsikauddesantevāsikasamānācariyakā pana yāva nissayauddesā anupacchinnā, tāva paṭijaggitabbā. Pahontena tato uddhampi paṭijaggitabbā eva. Mātāpitūsu upajjhāye viya paṭijaggitabbaṃ. Sacepi hi te rajje ṭhitā honti, puttato ca upaṭṭhānaṃ paccāsīsanti, kātabbameva. Atha tesaṃ bhesajjaṃ natthi, attano santakaṃ dātabbaṃ. Asati, bhikkhācariyāya pariyesitvāpi dātabbameva. Bhātubhaginīnaṃ pana tesaṃ santakameva yojetvā dātabbaṃ. Sace natthi, attano santakaṃ tāvakālikaṃ datvā pacchā labhantena gaṇhitabbaṃ, alabhantena na codetabbā. Aññātakassa bhaginiyā sāmikassa bhesajjaṃ neva kātuṃ, na dātuṃ vaṭṭati, ‘‘tuyhaṃ sāmikassa dehī’’ti vatvā pana bhaginiyā dātabbaṃ. Bhātu jāyāyapi eseva nayo, tesaṃ pana puttā imassa ñātakāyevāti tesaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
疾病,就是任何一种病痛。当它折磨人的时候,就成了修行的障碍,所以要用治疗把它断除。如果治了好几天还是不见好,就该责备这个身体:我不是你的奴仆,也不是你雇来的人,正是我养育着你,才在无始的轮回流转中受尽痛苦。这样责备身体之后,就该继续修沙门法。巴利
Ābādhoti yo koci rogo. So bādhayamāno palibodho hoti, tasmā bhesajjakaraṇena upacchinditabbo. Sace pana katipāhaṃ bhesajjaṃ karontassapi na vūpasammati, ‘‘nāhaṃ tuyhaṃ dāso, na bhatako, taṃyevamhi posento anamatagge saṃsāravaṭṭe dukkhappatto’’ti attabhāvaṃ garahitvā samaṇadhammo kātabbo.
“结”指的是对教法的受持。只有对经常忙于诵习等事务的人来说,它才会成为障碍,对其他人则不会。巴利
Ganthoti pariyattipariharaṇaṃ. Taṃ sajjhāyādīhi niccabyāvaṭasseva palibodho hoti, na itarassa.
关于“神通”:是指以神通作为障碍。也有写成“神通有十种”的读法。这里“神通”指凡夫的神通。它就像仰面躺着的婴儿,又像刚长出的嫩苗,很难照料,稍微一点小事就能把它毁掉。不过,它只是修观的障碍,不是修定的障碍,因为那是在证得禅定之后才可能遇到的。所以,想修观的人应当切断神通的障碍,另一类人则应当切断其余的障碍。障碍,就是遮蔽、阻挠修习业处,不让它进行下去;这是把ra音转成la音来说的,意思是妨碍。应当切断,意思是通过等至和摄受来抑制它,使它不再成为障碍。巴利
Iddhiyāti iddhipalibodhena. ‘‘Iddhīti te dasā’’tipi pāṭho. Tattha iddhīti pothujjanikā iddhi. Sā hi uttānaseyyakadārako viya taruṇasassaṃ viya ca dupparihārā hoti, appamattakena ca bhijjati. Sā pana vipassanāya palibodho hoti, na samādhissa samādhiṃ patvā pattabbato, tasmā vipassanātthikena iddhipalibodho upacchinditabbo, itarena avasesāti. Kammaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ paribundheti uparodheti pavattituṃ na detīti palibodho, ra-kārassa la-kāraṃ katvā vutto, paripanthoti attho. Upacchinditabboti samāpanena saṅgahaṇena uparundhitabbo, apalibodho kātabboti attho.
致力于业处的人就是业处者,也就是精勤修习禅修的人。“由这位业处者”——即指上面所说的这位业处者。“限定之后”,是指像这样划定范围:“这座精舍里的所有比丘。”“同住者”,是指共同居住的比丘们。“令生起柔软心”,是指在自己心中生起柔软的心。而这里“对同住者生起柔和心等”的含义,应当依据《慈心功德经》(增支部8.1)中“为人所爱”等广泛开示的经文来说明。巴利
Kammaṭṭhāne niyutto kammaṭṭhāniko, bhāvanamanuyuñjanto. Tena kammaṭṭhānikena. Paricchinditvāti ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre sabbepi bhikkhū’’ti evaṃ paricchinditvā. Sahavāsīnanti sahavāsīnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ. Muducittataṃ janetīti attani muducittataṃ uppādeti. Ayañca sahavāsīnaṃ cittamaddavajananādiattho ‘‘manussānaṃ piyo hotī’’tiādinayappavattena mettānisaṃsasuttena (a. ni. 8.1) dīpetabbo.
“成为不懈怠而住者”的意思是:在正确的修行中,他不是退缩而住、精进低劣的人,而是已发起精进的人。其含义是:即使对天界的所缘也是如此,对其他所缘就更不用说了。“在一切处”是指在一切沙门应做的事中,或在一切业处的修习中。“应当亲近”是指应当以先前反复修习的方式去亲近。致力于瑜伽的修习,便是“瑜伽实践”;这瑜伽实践本身,就其“应当去做”之义而称为“业”,也就是那瑜伽实践之业。“因为是近因”的意思是:因为是成就之因。巴利
Anolīnavuttiko hotīti sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ olīnavuttiko hīnavīriyo na hoti, āraddhavīriyo hotīti attho. Dibbesupi ārammaṇesu, pageva itaresūti adhippāyo. Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ samaṇakaraṇīye, sabbasmiṃ vā kammaṭṭhānānuyoge. Atthayitabbanti pubbāsevanavasena atthayitabbaṃ. Yogassa bhāvanāya anuyuñjanaṃ yogānuyogo, tadeva karaṇīyaṭṭhena kammaṃ, tassa yogānuyogakammassa. Padaṭṭhānattāti nipphattihetuttā.
把光明遍归入白遍,把限定虚空遍归入除去遍之虚空遍,这样合并之后,由于经典中只按地遍等八种色界禅那所缘的遍各自的自性来讲述,所以此处排除虚空遍与光明遍,只依经典中“三十八种所缘”的说法来讲。不过,按照注释书的方法,把虚空遍和光明遍单独计入时,业处正好有四十种。这四十种业处就是:十遍、十不净、十随念、四梵住、四无色、一想、一差别。其中,地遍、水遍、火遍、风遍、青遍、黄遍、赤遍、白遍、光明遍、限定虚空遍,这十种是遍。膨胀相、青瘀相、脓烂相、断坏相、食残相、散乱相、斩斫离散相、血涂相、虫聚相、骨相,这十种是不净。佛随念、法随念、僧随念、戒随念、舍随念、天随念、死随念、身至念、入出息念、寂止随念,这十种是随念。慈、悲、喜、舍,这四种是梵住。空无边处、识无边处、无所有处、非想非非想处,这四种是无色。食厌想是一种想。四界差别是一种差别。巴利
Odātakasiṇe ālokakasiṇaṃ, kasiṇugghāṭimākāsakasiṇe paricchinnākāsakasiṇañca antogadhaṃ katvā pāḷiyaṃ pathavīkasiṇādīnaṃ rūpajjhānārammaṇānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃyeva kasiṇānaṃ sarūpato vuttattā ākāsakasiṇaṃ ālokakasiṇañca vajjetvā ‘‘aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesū’’ti pāḷiyaṃ āgatanayeneva vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathānayena pana ākāsakasiṇe ālokakasiṇe ca visuṃ gahite cattālīsaṃyeva kammaṭṭhānāni. Tatrimāni cattālīsa kammaṭṭhānāni – dasa kasiṇā, dasa asubhā , dasa anussatiyo, cattāro brahmavihārā, cattāro āruppā, ekā saññā, ekaṃ vavatthānanti. Tattha pathavīkasiṇaṃ āpokasiṇaṃ tejokasiṇaṃ vāyokasiṇaṃ nīlakasiṇaṃ pītakasiṇaṃ lohitakasiṇaṃ odātakasiṇaṃ ālokakasiṇaṃ paricchinnākāsakasiṇanti ime dasa kasiṇā. Uddhumātakaṃ vinīlakaṃ vipubbakaṃ vicchiddakaṃ vikkhāyitakaṃ vikkhittakaṃ hatavikkhittakaṃ lohitakaṃ puḷavakaṃ aṭṭhikanti ime dasa asubhā. Buddhānussati dhamma saṅgha sīla cāga devatānussati maraṇassati kāyagatāsati ānāpānassati upasamānussatīti imā dasa anussatiyo. Mettā karuṇā muditā upekkhāti ime cattāro brahmavihārā. Ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ nevasaññānāsaññāyatananti ime cattāro āruppā. Āhāre paṭikūlasaññā ekā saññā. Catudhātuvavatthānaṃ ekaṃ vavatthānanti.
对于“凡是适合某人习性的”,这里先说:对贪行者来说,十种不净观和身至念,这十一种业处是适合的;对嗔行者来说,四梵住和四种颜色遍,这八种是适合的;对痴行者和寻行者来说,只有入出息念这一种业处;对信行者来说,前六种随念是适合的;对觉行者来说,死随念、寂止随念、四界差别和食厌想,这四种是适合的;其余的遍和四无色对一切行者都适合。在诸遍中应当知道:任何一种有限的遍适合寻行者,无量的遍适合痴行者。这里是以刚才所说的方式,即“因为是瑜伽实践之业的近因”,来进一步说明这个意思。巴利
Yaṃ yassa caritānukūlanti ettha rāgacaritassa tāva dasa asubhā kāyagatāsatīti ekādasa kammaṭṭhānāni anukūlāni, dosacaritassa cattāro brahmavihārā cattāri vaṇṇakasiṇānīti aṭṭha, mohacaritassa ca vitakkacaritassa ca ekaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānameva, saddhācaritassa purimā cha anussatiyo, buddhicaritassa maraṇassati upasamānussati catudhātuvavatthānaṃ āhāre paṭikūlasaññāti cattāri, sesakasiṇāni cattāro ca āruppā sabbacaritānaṃ anukūlāni. Kasiṇesu ca yaṃ kiñci parittaṃ vitakkacaritassa, appamāṇaṃ mohacaritassa anukūlanti veditabbaṃ. Yathāvutteneva nayenāti ‘‘yogānuyogakammassa padaṭṭhānattā’’ti imamatthaṃ atidisati.
想要受持某个业处的人,应当就依着那个业处,修成四禅和五禅,以禅那作为近因来增长观智,然后在证得漏尽的漏尽者面前受取这个业处。所以说:“应当就以这个业处……而学习。”接下来“阿拉汉等”这一段,是为了说明:在授予业处这件事上,比起某些漏尽者,多闻者更为殊胜。所谓“如同开辟大象走的道路”,就像把业处这块地显示成大象行走的大道一样。所谓“辨别适合与不适合”,意思是:对向他讲说业处的人,用合乎道理的方法,替他分辨清楚哪些有帮助、哪些没有帮助。巴利
Yaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetukāmo hoti, tasseva vasena catukkapañcakajjhānāni nibbattetvā jhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā āsavakkhayappattassa khīṇāsavassa santike gahetabbanti āha – ‘‘imināva kammaṭṭhānena…pe… uggahetabba’’nti. Arahantādayo hītiādi ekaccakhīṇāsavato bahussutova kammaṭṭhānadāne seyyoti dassanatthaṃ āraddhaṃ. Mahāhatthipathaṃ nīharanto viyāti kammaṭṭhānapathaviṃ mahāhatthipathaṃ katvā dassento viya. Sappāyāsappāyaṃ paricchinditvāti yassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhati, tassa upakārānupakāraṃ yuttimagganena paricchinditvā.
现在,要去业处老师那里的人,不应该以这样的方式前往:先洗好脚、在脚上涂了油,穿上凉鞋、拿起伞,让人带上油筒、蜂蜜、糖浆等,再由弟子们簇拥着去;而应该先完成远行者的义务,自己拿好衣钵,在路上每进一座精舍,进去时就履行客僧的义务,离开时就履行远行者的义务,随宜完成这些义务,以轻便的资具、极度少欲的方式前往。为了总结这个意思,所以说“以轻便的生活方式、具足律仪与行仪”。这样前往后,进入那座精舍时,应该在路上就让人准备好允许的齿木并带上再进去。不应该怀着“先歇一会儿,做完洗脚、涂油等,再去老师那里”的想法而进入别的僧舍。为什么呢?如果那里有和老师意见不合的比丘,他们盘问来意后,会宣扬老师的过失,让他后悔:“你要是去了他那里就完了”,这样他可能就从那里折返。所以,应该问清老师住的地方,直接去那里。巴利
Idāni kammaṭṭhānadāyakassa santikaṃ gacchantena dhotamakkhitehi pādehi upāhanā āruhitvā chattaṃ gahetvā telanāḷimadhuphāṇitādīni gāhāpetvā antevāsikaparivutena na gantabbaṃ, gamikavattaṃ pana pūretvā attano pattacīvaraṃ sayameva gahetvā antarāmagge yaṃ yaṃ vihāraṃ pavisati, sabbattha paviṭṭhakāle āgantukavattaṃ, nikkhamanakāle gamikavattanti yathārahaṃ taṃ taṃ vattaṃ pūrentena sallahukaparikkhārena paramasallekhavuttinā hutvā gantabbanti imamatthaṃ saṅkhipitvā dassento ‘‘sallahukavuttinā vinayācārasampannenā’’ti āha. Evaṃ pana gantvā taṃ vihāraṃ pavisantena antarāyeva dantakaṭṭhaṃ kappiyaṃ kārāpetvā gahetvā pavisitabbaṃ, na ca muhuttaṃ vissamitvā pādadhovanamakkhanādīni katvā ācariyassa santikaṃ gamissāmīti aññaṃ pariveṇaṃ pavisitabbaṃ. Kasmā? Sace hissa tatra ācariyassa visabhāgā bhikkhū bhaveyyuṃ, taṃ te āgamanakāraṇaṃ pucchitvā ācariyassa avaṇṇaṃ pakāsetvā ‘‘naṭṭhosi, sace tassa santikaṃ āgato’’ti vippaṭisāraṃ uppādeyyuṃ, yena tatova paṭinivatteyya, tasmā ācariyassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pucchitvā ujukaṃ tattheva gantabbaṃ.
就像前面所说的那样一位老师:巴利
Vuttappakāramācariyanti –
“ 让人喜爱、受人敬重、值得培养,说话得体,也能接受别人的劝告;
能讲说深奥的话,又不把人引到不适当的地方去。”巴利
‘‘Piyo garu bhāvanīyo, vattā ca vacanakkhamo; Gambhīrañca kathaṃ kattā, no caṭṭhāne niyojako’’ti. (a. ni. 7.37; netti. 113) –
像这样,按照上面所说的方式——具备信等功德、一心为了利益、站在增长一边的善知识老师。对于以履行侍奉义务而令其心生欢喜的人:这里,如果老师比较年轻,就不应该允许他接取钵和衣等;如果老师比较年长,就应该先走过去礼敬老师,然后站着。如果被说“贤友,放下钵和衣”,就应该放下。如果被说“喝水”,如果自己想喝就可以喝。如果被说“洗脚”,就不应该马上洗——因为如果水是老师亲自拿来的,那就不合适。但如果被说“洗吧,贤友,不是我拿来的,是别人拿来的”,那就在老师看不到的地方,或者在隐蔽的角落,或者在露天住处的偏僻处坐下来洗脚。如果老师拿来油瓶,就应该站起来用双手恭敬地接过来,因为如果不接,老师心里可能会产生变化:“这个比丘从今以后要破坏共享了。”接过来之后,不应该一开始就涂脚,因为如果那是老师涂身体用的油,就不合适,所以应该先涂头,再涂肩膀等部位。但如果被说“贤友,这是全身都能用的油,脚上也涂吧”,那就涂了脚之后说“尊者,我把这个油瓶放在这里”,等老师来接时就交给他。巴利
Evamādinā vuttappakāraṃ saddhādiguṇasamannāgataṃ ekantahitesiṃ vuḍḍhipakkhe ṭhitaṃ kalyāṇamittaṃ ācariyaṃ. Vattapaṭipattiyā ārādhitacittassāti ettha sace ācariyo daharataro hoti, pattacīvarapaṭiggahaṇādīni na sāditabbāni. Sace vuḍḍhataro, gantvā ācariyaṃ vanditvā ṭhātabbaṃ. ‘‘Nikkhipāvuso, pattacīvara’’nti vuttena nikkhipitabbaṃ. ‘‘Pānīyaṃ pivā’’ti vuttena sace icchati, pātabbaṃ. ‘‘Pāde dhovā’’ti vuttena na tāva dhovitabbā. Sace hi ācariyena ābhatamudakaṃ bhaveyya, na sāruppaṃ siyā. ‘‘Dhovāvuso, na mayā ābhataṃ, aññehi ābhata’’nti vuttena pana yattha ācariyo na passati, evarūpe paṭicchanne vā okāse abbhokāsavihārassapi vā ekamante nisīditvā pādā dhovitabbā. Sace ācariyo telanāḷiṃ āharati, uṭṭhahitvā ubhohi hatthehi sakkaccaṃ gahetabbā. Sace hi na gaṇheyya, ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu ito eva paṭṭhāya sambhogaṃ kopetī’’ti ācariyassa aññathattaṃ bhaveyya. Gahetvā pana na āditova pādā makkhetabbā. Sace hi taṃ ācariyassa gattabbhañjanatelaṃ bhaveyya, na sāruppaṃ siyā, tasmā paṭhamaṃ sīsaṃ makkhetvā khandhādīni makkhetabbāni. ‘‘Sabbapārihāriyatelamidaṃ, āvuso, pādepi makkhehī’’ti vuttena pana pāde makkhetvā ‘‘imaṃ telanāḷiṃ ṭhapemi, bhante’’ti vatvā ācariye gaṇhante dātabbā.
从第二天开始,不应当说“尊者,请为我讲业处”。但从第二天起,如果老师有固定的侍者,就应当先向他请求,然后再履行侍奉的义务。如果请求了还是不让做,那就只有在得到机会时才做。做的时候,应当奉上小、中、大三种齿木,还要准备好冷、热两种洗脸水和洗澡水。此后,老师连续三天用什么样的齿木,就应当经常准备同样的;如果不固定,那就随老师用什么就奉上什么。何必多说呢?凡是世尊在犍度中制定的:“诸比丘,弟子应当对老师正行侍奉。这里的正行是:清晨早起,脱掉鞋子,偏袒上衣,奉上齿木,奉上洗脸水,铺设座位。如果有粥,洗净钵后奉上粥”等等,这一切都应当做。应当知道,像这样按照上面所说的方式去做的人,就是以履行侍奉仪轨来让老师心里满意。巴利
Gatadivasato paṭṭhāya ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ me, bhante, kathetha’’iccevaṃ na vattabbaṃ. Dutiyadivasato pana paṭṭhāya sace ācariyassa pakatiupaṭṭhāko atthi, taṃ yācitvā vattaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sace yācitopi na deti, okāse laddheyeva kātabbaṃ. Karontena ca khuddakamajjhimamahantāni tīṇi dantakaṭṭhāni upanāmetabbāni. Sītaṃ uṇhanti duvidhaṃ mukhadhovanudakañca nhānodakañca paṭiyādetabbaṃ. Tato yaṃ ācariyo tīṇi divasāni paribhuñjati, tādisameva niccaṃ upaṭṭhāpetabbaṃ, niyamaṃ akatvā yaṃ vā taṃ vā paribhuñjantassa yathāladdhaṃ upanāmetabbaṃ. Kiṃ bahunā vuttena, yaṃ taṃ bhagavatā ‘‘antevāsikena, bhikkhave, ācariyamhi sammā vattitabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ sammāvattanā – kālasseva vuṭṭhāya upāhanā omuñcitvā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā dantakaṭṭhaṃ dātabbaṃ, mukhodakaṃ dātabbaṃ, āsanaṃ paññapetabbaṃ. Sace yāgu hoti, bhājanaṃ dhovitvā yāgu upanāmetabbā’’tiādikaṃ (mahāva. 66) khandhake vattaṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ sabbampi kātabbaṃ. Iti iminā yathāvuttena nayena paṭipajjanto vattapaṭipattiyā cittaṃ ārādhetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“五连结”是指五个部分,也就是五节的意思。“业处的学习”是指学习业处的典籍;为了弄清其中的含义而提问,就是对业处的询问。或者也可以说,从文本和义理两方面学习业处,叫做“学”;对其中生起的疑惑提问,叫做“问”。“业处的现起”是指禅相现起,也就是对这样精进修习的人加以确认:“这个相是这样现起的”;同样,业处的安止是指:“这样入定”。“业处的特相”是指通过计数、随逐、触等方式精勤修习之后,达到安住的成就,或者更进一步通过观察等方式达到究竟,这就是对业处本质的观察。因此说:“所说的就是对业处本质的审察。”巴利
Pañcasandhikanti pañcapabbaṃ, pañcabhāganti attho. Kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhananti kammaṭṭhānaganthassa uggaṇhanaṃ, tadatthaparipucchā kammaṭṭhānassa paripucchanā. Atha vā ganthato atthato ca kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanaṃ uggaho, tattha saṃsayaparipucchanā paripucchā. Kammaṭṭhānassa upaṭṭhānanti nimittupaṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa ‘‘evamidaṃ nimittaṃ upaṭṭhātī’’ti upadhāraṇaṃ, tathā kammaṭṭhānappanā ‘‘evaṃ jhānamappetī’’ti. Kammaṭṭhānassa lakkhaṇanti gaṇanānubandhanāphusanānaṃ vasena bhāvanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ṭhapanāya sampatti, tato parampi vā sallakkhaṇādivasena matthakappattīti kammaṭṭhānasabhāvassa sallakkhaṇaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasabhāvupadhāraṇanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti.
自己也不会因为逐个学习业处而疲劳,但正因为这样,既不会打扰老师,也能通过修习把法的利益推到顶点。因此,这个理由就是:自己不疲劳、不令老师困扰。少许,就是一点一点。在那里,就是指老师居住的地方。适合,是指因为得到住所适合等条件,作意轻松、修习顺利。以一由旬为限,这句话也把半由旬、一伽浮他包括在内。然而,钝根的人如果住在半由旬、一伽浮他或一由旬的地方,在业处某处生起疑惑或忘失正念时,清晨在精舍里做完义务后,途中乞食,吃完饭就前往老师住的地方,当天在老师面前把业处弄清楚,第二天礼敬老师后出发,途中乞食,就能不疲劳地回到自己的住处。所以说:钝根的人以一由旬为限而前往。如果利根的人在一由旬内找不到舒适的地方,就应该断除业处中的一切疑难结缚,把业处变得纯净、与作意相系之后,即使前往超过一由旬的远处也可以。因此说:利根的人即使远行也可以。巴利
Attanāpina kilamati odhiso kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanato, tato eva ācariyampi na viheṭheti dhammādhikaraṇampi bhāvanāya matthakaṃ pāpanato. Tasmāti taṃnimittaṃ attanoakilamanaācariyāviheṭhanahetu. Thokanti thokaṃ thokaṃ. Tatthāti yattha ācariyo vasati, tattha. Sappāyaṃ hotīti āvāsasappāyādilābhena manasikāraphāsutā bhāvanānukūlatā hoti. Yojanaparamanti iminā gāvutaaḍḍhayojanānipi saṅgaṇhāti. Yasmā pana mandapañño gāvute aḍḍhayojane yojanamatte vā vasanto kammaṭṭhānassa kismiñcideva ṭhāne sandehe vā satisammose vā jāte kālasseva vihāre vattaṃ katvā antarāmagge piṇḍāya caritvā bhattakiccapariyosāneyeva ācariyassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā taṃ divasaṃ ācariyassa santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ sodhetvā dutiyadivase ācariyaṃ vanditvā nikkhamitvā antarāmagge piṇḍāya caritvā akilamantoyeva attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ āgantuṃ sakkhissati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘mandapañño yojanaparamaṃ gantvā’’ti. Sace tikkhapañño yojanaparame phāsukaṭṭhānaṃ na labhati, tena kammaṭṭhāne sabbaṃ gaṇṭhiṭṭhānaṃ chinditvā visuddhaṃ āvajjanapaṭibaddhaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ katvā yojanaparamato dūrampi gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘tikkhapañño dūrampi gantvā’’ti.
远离十八种住所过失,是指:太大、太新、太旧、紧靠道路、有岩池、有叶子、有花、有果、被人贪求、靠近城市、靠近木材、靠近田地、有不合意的人存在、靠近商埠、靠近边境、靠近国界、不合适、得不到善友。具备这十八种过失中的任何一种,这样的住所就不适合用来修行。巴利
Aṭṭhārasasenāsanadosavivajjitanti mahattaṃ, navattaṃ, jiṇṇattaṃ, panthanissitattaṃ, soṇḍī, paṇṇaṃ, pupphaṃ, phalaṃ, patthanīyatā, nagarasannissitatā, dārusannissitatā, khettasannissitatā, visabhāgānaṃ puggalānaṃ atthitā, paṭṭanasannissitatā, paccantasannissitatā, rajjasīmasannissitatā, asappāyatā, kalyāṇamittānaṃ alābhoti imehi aṭṭhārasahi senāsanadosehi vivajjitaṃ. Imesañhi aṭṭhārasannaṃ dosānaṃ aññatarena samannāgataṃ senāsanaṃ bhāvanāya ananurūpaṃ.
为什么这么说呢?在大寺里,首先有许多想法各不相同的人聚在一起。他们彼此对立,不履行应尽的义务,结果菩提树园等地方没人打扫,饮用水和用水也没人准备。在这种情况下,有比丘心想“我要去乞食的村庄乞食”,于是拿着衣钵出门,如果看到义务没做,或者水瓶空了,他就必须去做义务、准备饮用水;如果不做,就犯了违越义务的恶作罪。如果去做,时间就过去了,过了正午才进村,乞食已经结束,什么都得不到。即使他去独自静修,也会被沙弥和年轻比丘的高声喧哗以及僧团事务打扰。但如果在一个地方,一切义务都已经做好,也没有其他干扰,那么即使是这样的大寺,也应该住。巴利
Kasmā? Mahāvihāre (visuddhi. 1.52) tāva bahū nānāchandā sannipatanti, te aññamaññaṃ paṭiviruddhatāya vattaṃ na karonti, bodhiyaṅgaṇādīni asammaṭṭhāneva honti, anupaṭṭhāpitaṃ pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ ‘‘gocaragāme piṇḍāya carissāmī’’ti pattacīvaramādāya nikkhantopi sace passati vattaṃ akataṃ, pānīyaghaṭaṃ vā rittaṃ, athānena vattaṃ kātabbaṃ hoti, pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetabbaṃ , akaronto vattabhede dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Karontassa kālo atikkamati, atidivā paviṭṭho niṭṭhitāya bhikkhāya kiñci na labhati. Paṭisallānagatopi sāmaṇeradaharabhikkhūnaṃ uccāsaddena saṅghakammehi ca vikkhipati. Yattha pana sabbaṃ vattaṃ katameva hoti, avasesāpi ca ghaṭṭanā natthi, evarūpe mahāvihārepi vihātabbaṃ.
在新寺院里,有很多新的工程事务。如果不参与,就会被人指责。但如果那里的比丘们这样说:“尊者,您随意修习沙门法就好,这些新的工程事务由我们来做。”像这样的寺院,就可以住。巴利
Navavihāre bahu navakammaṃ hoti, akarontaṃ ujjhāyanti. Yattha pana bhikkhū evaṃ vadanti ‘‘āyasmā yathāsukhaṃ samaṇadhammaṃ karotu, mayaṃ navakammaṃ karissāmā’’ti, evarūpe vihātabbaṃ.
住在破旧的寺院里,需要照料打理的事情很多,哪怕只是不整理自己的坐卧处,也会被人指责;可要是去打理,修行的业处又会退失。巴利
Jiṇṇavihāre pana bahu paṭijaggitabbaṃ hoti, antamaso attano senāsanamattampi appaṭijaggantaṃ ujjhāyanti, paṭijaggantassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ parihāyati.
住在靠近大路的住处时,来来往往的客人昼夜不停地聚集。过了午后才到的客人来了,就得把自己的住处让给他们,自己只能住在树下或石头上,第二天也还是这样,于是根本没有修行的机会。但如果那个地方没有这种来客拥挤的干扰,就可以住在那里。巴利
Panthanissite mahāpathavihāre rattindivaṃ āgantukā sannipatanti. Vikāle āgatānaṃ attano senāsanaṃ datvā rukkhamūle vā pāsāṇapiṭṭhe vā vasitabbaṃ hoti, punadivasepi evamevāti kammaṭṭhānassa okāso na hoti. Yattha pana evarūpo āgantukasambādho na hoti, tattha vihātabbaṃ.
有个叫索尼迪的石砌水池。那里,大众为了喝水而聚集过来,城里居民中亲近王族的长老们的弟子们为了染衣的事来到这里。当他们问起器皿、木槽之类的东西放在哪里时,就得给他们指出来“在某处某处”。就这样,他一切时都一直忙个不停。巴利
Soṇḍī nāma pāsāṇapokkharaṇī hoti. Tattha pānīyatthaṃ mahājano samosarati, nagaravāsīnaṃ rājakulūpakattherānaṃ antevāsikā rajanakammatthāya āgacchanti, tesaṃ bhājanadārudoṇikādīni pucchantānaṃ ‘‘asuke ca asuke ca ṭhāne’’ti dassetabbāni honti. Evaṃ sabbakālampi niccabyāvaṭo hoti.
在长着各种菜叶的地方,即使比丘已经取好业处、坐在日间住处,附近那些一边唱歌一边采叶的妇女,也会因各种声音杂乱相触而障碍他的业处。巴利
Yattha nānāvidhaṃ sākapaṇṇaṃ hoti, tatthassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā divāvihāraṃ nisinnassapi santike sākahārikā gāyamānā paṇṇaṃ uccinantiyo visabhāgasaddasaṅghaṭṭanena kammaṭṭhānantarāyaṃ karonti.
而在各种花丛开得正盛的地方,也同样有这种干扰。巴利
Yattha pana nānāvidhā mālāgacchā supupphitā honti, tatrāpi tādisoyeva upaddavo.
在长着各种芒果、阎浮果、菠萝蜜等果实的地方,想要果子的人会来讨要;如果不给,他们就发火,或者强行抢夺。傍晚时分,在寺院中间经行的比丘看见他们后,对他们说:“近事男们,你们为什么这样做?”他们被这样说了之后,便随心所欲地辱骂,甚至想办法逼得他住不下去。巴利
Yattha nānāvidhaṃ ambajambupanasādiphalaṃ hoti, tattha phalatthikā āgantvā yācanti, adentassa kujjhanti, balakkārena vā gaṇhanti, sāyanhasamaye vihāramajjhe caṅkamantena te disvā ‘‘kiṃ upāsakā evaṃ karothā’’ti vuttā yathāruci akkosanti, avāsāyapissa parakkamanti.
不过,如果住在像南山、象腹、塔山、心多罗山那样被人们公认向往的精舍里,人们会把他当作“这位是应供”来推崇,想来礼拜的人从四面八方涌进来,他就住得不安稳了。但对有些人来说,那种环境是合适的,那么他就该白天到别处去,晚上再回来住。巴利
Patthanīye pana lokasammate dakkhiṇagirihatthikucchicetiyagiricittalapabbatasadise vihāre viharantaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ arahā’’ti sambhāvetvā vanditukāmā manussā samantā osaranti, tenassa na phāsu hoti. Yassa pana taṃ sappāyaṃ hoti, tena divā aññattha gantvā rattiṃ vasitabbaṃ.
住在靠近城镇的地方,各种不相应的对象会进入视野:挑水的婢女们提着水罐互相碰撞着走过,也不让路;有权势的人还会在寺院中间围起布幔,坐在里面。巴利
Nagarasannissite visabhāgārammaṇāni āpāthamāgacchanti, kumbhadāsiyopi ghaṭehi nighaṃsantiyo gacchanti, okkamitvā maggaṃ na denti, issaramanussāpi vihāramajjhe sāṇiṃ parikkhipitvā nisīdanti.
至于靠近木材的地方,如果那里有柴薪,也有可以当建材用的树木,那么拾柴的人就会像前面说的采菜采花的人一样,弄出很多麻烦。精舍里有树的话,人们会来说“砍下来盖房子”,然后就来砍。如果比丘傍晚从禅修房出来,在精舍中间经行,看到他们就说“近事男们,你们怎么能这样做?”,他们就会随心所欲地辱骂,甚至想办法把他逼得没地方住。巴利
Dārusannissaye pana yattha kaṭṭhāni ca dabbupakaraṇarukkhā ca santi, tattha kaṭṭhahārikā pubbe vuttasākapupphahārikā viya aphāsukaṃ karonti. Vihāre rukkhā santi, te ‘‘chinditvā gharāni karissāmā’’ti manussā āgantvā chindanti. Sace sāyanhasamaye padhānagharā nikkhamitvā vihāramajjhe caṅkamanto te disvā ‘‘kiṃ upāsakā evaṃ karothā’’ti vadati, yathāruci akkosanti, avāsāyapissa parakkamanti.
如果寺院坐落在田地当中,四周都被田地包围,人们就会直接在寺院中间弄出一块打谷场来碾稻谷,睡在寺院门口,还做很多其他让人不安的事。如果那里有僧团的大量财产,人们还会拦住净人家里的牛,不让他们取水,拿着稻穗到僧团面前说:“你们看看净人家里干的好事。”因为这样那样的原因,还得跑到国王和大臣家门口去(告状)。这种情况也算在“依田地而住”里面。巴利
Yo pana khettasannissito hoti samantā khettehi parivārito, tattha manussā vihāramajjheyeva khalaṃ katvā dhaññaṃ maddanti, pamukhesu sayanti, aññampi bahuṃ aphāsuṃ karonti. Yatrapi mahāsaṅghabhogo hoti, ārāmikakulānaṃ gāvo rundhanti, udakavāraṃ paṭisedhenti, manussā vīhisīsaṃ gahetvā ‘‘passatha tumhākaṃ ārāmikakulānaṃ kamma’’nti saṅghassa dassenti. Tena tena kāraṇena rājarājamahāmattānaṃ gharadvāraṃ gantabbaṃ hoti, ayampi khettasannissiteneva saṅgahito.
在有些比丘彼此不和、互相怀有敌意而住在一起的地方,当他们争吵时,别人劝他们说“尊者,请不要这样”,他们就回嘴说:“自从这个穿粪扫衣的人来了以后,我们就完了。”巴利
Yattha aññamaññavisabhāgā verī bhikkhū viharanti, ye kalahaṃ karontā ‘‘mā, bhante, evaṃ karothā’’ti vāriyamānā ‘‘etassa paṃsukūlikassa āgatakālato paṭṭhāya naṭṭhāmhā’’ti vattāro bhavanti.
如果有人依靠的是水边码头或者陆地码头,那里经常会有乘船和跟着商队来的人,他们推推搡搡地喊着“让个地方,给点水,给点盐”,把那里弄得不得安宁。巴利
Yopi udakapaṭṭanaṃ vā thalapaṭṭanaṃ vā sannissito hoti, tattha abhiṇhaṃ nāvāhi ca satthehi ca āgatamanussā ‘‘okāsaṃ detha, pānīyaṃ detha, loṇaṃ dethā’’ti ghaṭṭayantā aphāsuṃ karonti.
不过,依附于边境地区的人,对佛等则没有敬信。巴利
Paccantasannissite pana manussā buddhādīsu appasannā honti.
在靠近国界的地方,会有来自国王的危险。因为对那一带地方,一个国王会以“它不归我管辖”为理由出兵攻打,另一个国王也会以“它不归我管辖”为理由出兵攻打。在那里,这位比丘有时在这位国王的领地游走,有时在那位国王的领地游走,于是人们以为“这是个探子”,就让他遭遇不幸和灾祸。巴利
Rajjasīmasannissite rājabhayaṃ hoti. Tañhi padesaṃ eko rājā ‘‘na mayhaṃ vase vattatī’’ti paharati, itaropi ‘‘na mayhaṃ vase vattatī’’ti. Tatrāyaṃ bhikkhu kadāci imassa rañño vijite vicarati, kadāci etassa, atha naṃ ‘‘carapuriso aya’’nti maññamānā anayabyasanaṃ pāpenti.
“不适宜”是指:因为与不相应的色等所缘混杂在一起,或者因为被非人占据,所以不适宜。这里有个事例:据说有一位长老住在森林里。那时,一个女夜叉站在树叶屋门口唱歌。长老走出来,站在门口,她就走到经行道的尽头唱歌。长老走到经行道尽头,她又站在百仞深的悬崖边唱歌。长老转身返回时,她迅速上前抓住他说:“尊者,像我吃掉的您这样的人,已经不止一个两个了。”巴利
Asappāyatāti visabhāgarūpādiārammaṇasamosaraṇena vā amanussapariggahitatāya vā asappāyatā. Tatridaṃ vatthu – eko kira thero araññe vasati. Athassa ekā yakkhinī paṇṇasāladvāre ṭhatvā gāyi. So nikkhamitvā dvāre aṭṭhāsi, sā gantvā caṅkamanasīse gāyi. Thero caṅkamanasīsaṃ agamāsi, sā sataporise papāte ṭhatvā gāyi. Thero paṭinivatti, atha naṃ sā vegena gantvā gahetvā ‘‘mayā, bhante, na eko, na dve tumhādisā khāditā’’ti āha.
如果在那里没办法找到老师,或者与老师同等的人,或者依止师,或者与依止师同等的人,或者善知识,那么得不到善知识就是很大的过失。因此应当知道,具备这十八种过失中任何一种的住处,都不适合用来修行。注疏里也这样说过:巴利
Yattha na sakkā hoti ācariyaṃ vā ācariyasamaṃ vā upajjhāyaṃ vā upajjhāyasamaṃ vā kalyāṇamittaṃ laddhuṃ, tattha so kalyāṇamittānaṃ alābho mahādosoyeva. Tasmā imesaṃ aṭṭhārasannaṃ dosānaṃ aññatarena samannāgataṃ senāsanaṃ bhāvanāya ananurūpanti veditabbaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu –
大住处、新住处,老住处与路旁;
岩泉水池、菜叶、花,以及所愿之果实。
城镇木材难寻,田地不相宜,渡头不和合;
边地国界虽可安居,但于彼处难得善友。
“ 智者这样明白了这十八种情况,
要像避开一条充满危险的路那样,远远地躲开。”巴利
‘‘Mahāvāsaṃ navāvāsaṃ, jarāvāsañca panthaniṃ; Soṇḍiṃ paṇṇañca pupphañca, phalaṃ patthitameva ca. ‘‘Nagaraṃ dārunā khettaṃ, visabhāgena paṭṭanaṃ; Paccantasīmāsappāyaṃ, yattha mitto na labbhati. ‘‘Aṭṭhārasetāni ṭhānāni, iti viññāya paṇḍito; Ārakā parivajjeyya, maggaṃ sappaṭibhayaṃ yathā’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.52);
具备五种住处支,也就是具备离村庄不太远、也不太近等五种住处支。这是世尊说过的:巴利
Pañcasenāsanaṅgasamannāgatanti gāmato nātidūranāccāsannatādīhi pañcahi senāsanaṅgehi samannāgataṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,什么样的住处具备五个条件呢?比丘们,在这里,住处不太远也不太近,来往方便;白天少人往来,夜里安静无声、没有喧闹;少有蚊虫、苍蝇、风、日晒、蛇类的接触侵扰;住在这样的住处里,衣服、食物、住处、生病所需的药物等资具都容易得到;而且在这样的住处里,有长老比丘们居住,他们多闻、通达经教传承、持守法、持守律、持守论母。住在该住处的比丘时常前去拜访、反复请教提问:“尊者,这是怎样的?这有什么含义?”那些尊者就为他开示没有开示的,阐明没有阐明的,帮他在种种令人疑惑的法义上消除疑惑。比丘们,这样的住处就具备五个条件。巴利
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, senāsanaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, senāsanaṃ nātidūraṃ hoti nāccāsannaṃ gamanāgamanasampannaṃ, divā appākiṇṇaṃ rattiṃ appasaddaṃ appanigghosaṃ, appaḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassaṃ, tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane viharantassa appakasirena uppajjanti cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā, tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane therā bhikkhū viharanti bahussutā āgatāgamā dhammadharā vinayadharā mātikādharā, te kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamitvā paripucchati paripañhati ‘idaṃ, bhante, kathaṃ, imassa ko attho’ti. Tassa te āyasmanto avivaṭañceva vivaranti, anuttānīkatañca uttāniṃ karonti, anekavihitesu ca kaṅkhāṭhāniyesu dhammesu kaṅkhaṃ paṭivinodenti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, senāsanaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ hotī’’ti (a. ni. 10.11).
在这里,住处不太远也不太近、往来方便,这是一支;白天少纷杂,夜里少声响、少喧闹,这是一支;少受虻、蚊、风、热、蛇类接触,这是一支;住在那个住处时……资具容易得到,这是一支;住在那个住处时,长老们……能帮助消除疑惑,这是一支。应当这样了知这五支。巴利
Ettha ca nātidūraṃ nāccāsannaṃ gamanāgamanasampannanti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, divā appākiṇṇaṃ rattiṃ appasaddaṃ appanigghosanti ekaṃ, appaḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassanti ekaṃ, tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane viharantassa…pe… parikkhārāti ekaṃ, tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane therā…pe… kaṅkhaṃ paṭivinodentīti ekaṃ. Evaṃ pañcaṅgāni veditabbāni.
这里,“断除细小的障碍”是指:在断除细小障碍时,应该剪短长的头发、指甲和体毛;对破旧的袈裟,要通过加装补布、贴边、补缀物等来加固,或者在线断等处做缝补,或者把脏了的染一染。如果钵里有污垢,就要把钵煮一煮;床、椅等也要清理干净。“消除食后倦怠”是指消除由饮食引起的疲劳。因为食物刚进到胃里时,由于它是新进来的,身体大多数情况下会有某种疲劳,要把它平息下来。如果那疲劳没有平息,身体就会疲惫,心就无法获得一境性。“应受持”是指应当受持,也就是一切业处的修习方法,并不只是前面所说的受持本身。“从师受持”是指从老师那里受持。“乃至一句”是指乃至一个部分。巴利
Upacchinnakhuddakapalibodhenāti ettha pana khuddakapalibodhe upacchindantena dīghāni kesanakhalomāni chinditabbāni, jiṇṇacīvaresu aggaḷaanuvātaparibhaṇḍadānādinā daḷhīkammaṃ vā tantucchedādīsu tunnakammaṃ vā kātabbaṃ, kiliṭṭhāni vā rajitabbāni. Sace patte malaṃ hoti, patto pacitabbo, mañcapīṭhādīni sodhetabbāni. Bhattasammadaṃ paṭivinodetvāti bhojananimittaṃ parissamaṃ vinodetvā. Āhāre hi āsayaṃ paviṭṭhamatte tassa āgantukatāya yebhuyyena siyā sarīrassa koci parissamo, taṃ vūpasametvā. Tasmiñhi avūpasante sarīrakhedena cittaṃ ekaggataṃ na labheyyāti. Uggahetabbato uggaho, sabbopi kammaṭṭhānavidhi, na pubbe vuttauggahamattaṃ. Ācariyato uggaho ācariyuggaho, tato. Ekapadampīti ekakoṭṭhāsampi.
随逐:就是正念持续不断地跟随入出息,没有间断地运转。触:对于计数入出息的人,在放下计数之后,以正念跟随入出息,当他如此使心安住而达到安止时,心停留在鼻端等部位;这时,心同它们(入出息)的接触,就是触。然而,由于并不像计数那样,在触等方面有各自单独的作意,为了说明应当在每一次接触的地方计数,这里提出“触”这个词,并解释说“触就是接触的地方”。安住:就是定。因为心正确地安放在所缘上,就是安住。正如“定”被解释为“心的住立、安住”。而安止以定为主导,所以说“安住就是安止”。随观:就是观察无常等相,这是观。转离:就是从运转和从相状上转离,这是道。遍净:因为一切杂染完全止息,所以是果。那些:指转离和遍净。对观:就是反复地看、观察。因此说“省察”。巴利
Anubandhanāti assāsapassāsānaṃ anugamanavasena satiyā nirantaraṃ anupavattanā. Phusanāti assāsapassāse gaṇentassa gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā te satiyā anubandhantassa yathā appanā hoti, tathā cittaṃ ṭhapentassa ca nāsikaggādiṭṭhānassa nesaṃ phusanā. Yasmā pana gaṇanādivasena viya phusanādivasena visuṃ manasikāro natthi, phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva gaṇanā kātabbāti dassetuṃ idha phusanāgahaṇanti dīpento ‘‘phusanāti phuṭṭhaṭṭhāna’’nti āha. Ṭhapanāti samādhānaṃ. Tañhi sammadeva ārammaṇe cittassa ādhānaṃ ṭhapanaṃ hoti. Tathā hi samādhi ‘‘cittassa ṭhiti saṇṭhitī’’ti niddiṭṭho. Samādhippadhānā pana appanāti āha ‘‘ṭhapanāti appanā’’ti. Aniccatādīnaṃ saṃlakkhaṇato sallakkhaṇā vipassanā. Pavattato nimittato ca vinivaṭṭanato vinivaṭṭanā maggo. Sakalasaṃkilesapaṭippassaddhibhāvato sabbaso suddhīti pārisuddhi phalaṃ. Tesanti vivaṭṭanāpārisuddhīnaṃ. Paṭipassanāti pati pati dassanaṃ pekkhanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paccavekkhaṇā’’ti.
“分断”是指以一、三、五这样的数目来划分。“开端”是就计数方法而说的,也就是依于计数,而不是依于业处。“是否已达顶点”这句话,是针对长时间以计数来作意的人说的。因为那个人可能只凭这样得到的不散乱,就产生这种想法。“取入出息中现起者”这句话,是就入出息中最初只有一个现起的情况而说的。如果两个都现起,就应该取两个一起来计数。通过“现起者”这个词,也应理解到:在两道鼻风中,应当取比较明显的那一个。“转起、转起”这个重复的说法,显示了对入出息不间断地观察。“如是”是说,以如上所说的方式观察之后。初学时即使所缘一个一个各自现起,但这样观察并计数的人,后来两个都会变得明显,所以说“入出息变得明显”。因此,“观察之后计数”这个因句,应当理解为“当他这样计数时……变得明显”。其中的“变得明显”,是指因为依于计数,没有外在的散乱,所以变得清楚显著。巴利
Khaṇḍanti ekaṃ tīṇi pañcāti evaṃ gaṇanāya khaṇḍanaṃ. Okāseti gaṇanāvidhiṃ sandhāyāha, gaṇanānissitova na kammaṭṭhānanissito. Sikhāppattaṃ nu khoti idaṃ cirataraṃ gaṇanāya manasikarontassa vasena vuttaṃ. So hi tathā laddhaṃ avikkhepamattaṃ nissāya evaṃ maññeyya. Assāsapassāsesu yo upaṭṭhāti, taṃ gahetvāti idaṃ assāsapassāsesu yassa ekova paṭhamaṃ upaṭṭhāti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yassa pana ubhopi upaṭṭhahanti, tena ubhayampi gahetvā gaṇetabbaṃ . Yo upaṭṭhātīti iminā ca dvīsu nāsāpuṭavātesu yo pākaṭataro upaṭṭhāti, so gahetabboti ayampi attho dīpitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pavattamānaṃ pavattamānanti āmeḍitavacanena nirantaraṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ dasseti. Evanti vuttappakārena upalakkhetvāvāti attho. Paṭhamaṃ ekekasmiṃ upaṭṭhitepi upalakkhetvāva gaṇentassa kamena ubhopi pākaṭā hontīti āha – ‘‘assāsapassāsā pākaṭā hontī’’ti. Tena ‘‘upalakkhetvāva gaṇetabba’’nti imassa ‘‘tassevaṃ gaṇayato…pe… pākaṭā hontī’’ti idaṃ kāraṇavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha pākaṭā hontīti gaṇanāvasena bahiddhā vikkhepābhāvato vibhūtā honti.
门闩转动的部分所安放的地方,那就是门闩柱。“三夜”是与极端结合有关的受格用法。“按前面的方式”,意思是快速计数,也就是像牧牛人计数那样。一、二、三、四、五,这是展示计数的方法。因此,在“八”等数目上,也应该从“一”开始,逐一数到“八”等。说了“应该快快地计数”之后,又用“因为与计数相连”等话,来说明其中的道理和譬喻。其中,船靠它来行进的是桨,也就是拨水的棍棒。用桨来支撑,叫桨的支撑,这是就依靠它的力量来说的。巴利
Palighāya parivattanakaṃ yattha nikkhipanti, so palighatthambho. Tiyāmarattinti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Purimanayenāti sīghagaṇanāya, gopālakagaṇanāyāti attho. Eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañcāti gaṇanāvidhidassanaṃ. Tasmā aṭṭhātiādīsupi ekato paṭṭhāyeva paccekaṃ aṭṭhādīni pāpetabbāni. ‘‘Sīghaṃ sīghaṃ gaṇetabbamevā’’ti vatvā tattha kāraṇaṃ nidassanañca dasseti ‘‘gaṇanāpaṭibaddhe hī’’tiādinā. Tattha arīyati tena nāvāti arittaṃ, pājanadaṇḍo. Arittena upatthambhanaṃ arittupatthambhanaṃ, tassa vasena.
从究竟意义上说,无间断的持续本身就是安住,所以论中说“如同无间断的持续”。作意于进入内部的气息时,就叫作把心引入内部。把心引向外部时,道理也是一样。所谓“被风冲击”,是说如果过度作意于内部的风,那个部位就会像是被风冲击,又像是被脂肪充满一样,这样显现出来。“引出”是指松开所触之处而把心引出去。然而,这样引出的时候,由于去追寻风的去向,心就会在种种不同的所缘上奔驰,所以说“心散乱于种种所缘”。巴利
Nippariyāyato nirantarappavatti nāma ṭhapanāyamevāti āha ‘‘nirantarappavattaṃ viyā’’ti. Anto pavisantaṃ manasikaronto anto cittaṃ paveseti nāma. Bahi cittanīharaṇepi eseva nayo. Vātabbhāhatanti abbhantaragatavātaṃ bahulaṃ manasikarontassa vātena taṃ ṭhānaṃ abbhāhataṃ viya medena pūritaṃ viya ca hoti, tathā upaṭṭhāti. Nīharatoti phuṭṭhokāsaṃ muñcitvā nīharato. Tathā pana nīharato vātassa gatisamanvesanamukhena nānārammaṇesu cittaṃ vidhāvatīti āha ‘‘puthuttārammaṇe cittaṃ vikkhipatī’’ti.
所谓“此”,就是指这入出息本身。“随逐”是指:对不断生起的入出息,以念把它们当作所缘,持续不断地跟随、随行。因此说“而那是依初、中、后的随逐”。脐是初,因为入出息最先在那里生起。这里说的“初”是按最初生起来说的,并不是只就“生起”这一点来说。因为实际上,它们从脐开始,一直到鼻端,到处都在生起。而且在哪里生起,就在哪里坏灭,因为诸法并没有移动;只是随着各种因缘到达别处,才假名为“行”。心脏是中间,即心脏附近,它的上部分是中间。鼻端是后,即鼻子的部位,是它的终点,因为入出息以那一名称而以此为极限。因为这样说它们是由心生起的,而在外面并没有心生起的可能。因此说“内部进入之风以鼻端为首”。应当知道,入息与出息的同义语,是以与此类似的方式来说的。“散乱”是指进入散乱,即散乱、不专一的意思。“焦躁”是指不安的状态。“动摇”是指对业处作意之动摇。“以散乱之心”一语中,这是就因上说的工具格,或者是依“如是状态”之相来说。“焦躁”即是不安。“动摇”即是动摇、颤动,同样,“颤动”也是如此。巴利
Etanti etaṃ assāsapassāsajātaṃ. Anugamananti pavattapavattānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena satiyā anu anu pavattanaṃ anugacchanaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘tañca kho ādimajjhapariyosānānugamanavasenā’’ti. Nābhi ādi tattha paṭhamaṃ uppajjanato. Paṭhamuppattivasena hi idha ādicintā, na uppattimattavasena. Tathā hi te nābhito paṭṭhāya yāva nāsikaggā sabbattha uppajjanteva. Yattha yattha ca uppajjanti, tattha tattheva bhijjanti dhammānaṃ gamanābhāvato. Yathāpaccayaṃ pana desantarappattiyaṃ gatisamaññā. Hadayaṃ majjhanti hadayasamīpaṃ tassa uparibhāgo majjhaṃ. Nāsikaggaṃ pariyosānanti nāsikaṭṭhānaṃ tassa pariyosānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ samaññāya tadavadhibhāvato. Tathā hete cittasamuṭṭhānā vuttā, na ca bahiddhā cittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ sambhavo atthi. Tenāha ‘‘abbhantarapavisanavātassa nāsikaggaṃ ādī’’ti. Pavisananikkhamanapariyāyo pana taṃsadisavaseneva vuttoti veditabbo. Vikkhepagatanti vikkhepaṃ upagataṃ, vikkhittaṃ asamāhitanti attho. Sāraddhāyāti sadarathabhāvāya. Iñjanāyāti kammaṭṭhānamanasikārassa calanāya. Vikkhepagatena cittenāti hetumhi karaṇavacanaṃ, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe vā. Sāraddhāti sadarathā. Iñjitāti iñjanakā calanakā, tathā phanditā.
“依初、中、后”是说:不应依照初、中、后的次第去跟随作意——这就是它们的关联。为了阐明“以随逐而作意的人,应当依触和依安住而作意”这句话所表达的意图,论师说了“如同依计数和随逐”等话。其中,“没有单独的作意”是说:离开计数和随逐,便没有单依触、单依安住而依次生起的业处作意。难道不也像没有触就没有安住那样,没有触就没有依计数的作意吗?虽然没有,但计数是业处作意的根本,应当以主要地位来把握;同样,随逐是安住的根本,离开它安住便不可能,所以也应当以主要地位来把握。因此,即使触存在,也并非直接邻近;正因计数和随逐是根本,才应当以主要地位来把握。为了显示其余二者离开它们便不存在,论师说:“如同依计数和随逐,依触和安住并没有单独的作意。”如果这样,那为什么在论母中它们被单独取出呢?回答说:“就在触触之处”等。其中,“就在触触之处计数”以此显示触是计数的支分,因此说:“以计数和触而作意。”“就在那里”即就在触触之处;“它们”即入出息。“以念随逐”即随顺计数的方法以念系缚,意思是在所触之处无间断地确定它们。“以安止而安立心”即为了生起安止,如是将心安立于呈现的相上,令其等持。在“以随逐”等句中,说的就是以随逐、触和安住而作意。其义即:凡是说“就在触触之处计数,在那里将计数收回,以念随逐它们”的,这就是其义。凡是不以究竟来衡量、不加抉择的,那就近于慢,譬如同牛与牛迹。巴利
Ādimajjhapariyosānavasenātiādimajjhapariyosānānugamanavasena na manasi kātabbanti sambandho. ‘‘Anubandhanāya manasikarontena phusanāvasena ṭhapanāvasena ca manasi kātabba’’nti yena adhippāyena vuttaṃ, taṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘gaṇanānubandhanāvasena viyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha visuṃ manasikāro natthīti gaṇanāya anubandhanāya ca vinā yathākkamaṃ kevalaṃ phusanāvasena ṭhapanāvasena ca kammaṭṭhānamanasikāro natthi. Nanu phusanāya vinā ṭhapanāya viya phusanāya vinā gaṇanāyapi manasikāro natthiyevāti? Yadipi natthi, gaṇanā pana yathā kammaṭṭhānamanasikārassa mūlabhāvato padhānabhāvena gahetabbā, evaṃ anubandhanā ṭhapanāya tāya vinā ṭhapanāya asambhavato. Tasmā satipi phusanāya nānantarikabhāve gaṇanānubandhanā eva mūlabhāvato padhānabhāvena gahetvā itarāsaṃ tadabhāvaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘gaṇanānubandhanāvasena viya hi phusanāṭhapanāvasena visuṃ manasikāro natthī’’ti. Yadi evaṃ tā kasmā uddese visuṃ gahitāti āha ‘‘phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyevā’’tiādi. Tattha phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva gaṇentoti iminā gaṇanāya phusanā aṅganti dasseti. Tenāha – ‘‘gaṇanāya ca phusanāya ca manasi karotī’’ti. Tatthevāti phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva. Teti assāsapassāse. Satiyā anubandhantoti gaṇanāvidhiṃ anugantvā satiyā nibandhanto, phuṭṭhokāseyeva te nirantaraṃ upadhārentoti attho. Appanāvasena cittaṃ ṭhapentoti yathā appanā hoti, evaṃ yathāupaṭṭhite nimitte cittaṃ ṭhapento samādahanto. Anubandhanāya cātiādīsu anubandhanāya ca phusanāya ca ṭhapanāya ca manasi karotīti vuccatīti yojanā. Svāyamatthoti yvāyaṃ ‘‘phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva gaṇento tattheva gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā te satiyā anubandhanto’’ti vutto, so ayamattho. Yā accantāya na minoti na vinicchinati, sā mānassa samīpeti upamā yathā goṇo viya gavayoti.
“跛脚的人”是指靠臀部挪着走的人。“秋千”是指吊篮。“在玩耍”是指那些正在玩的人。“母亲和儿子”是指自己的妻子和儿子。“两端”是指来的人那一头的前端、去的人那一头的后端,这两端。“中间”是指秋千板的正中间。“像绑缚用的柱子一样”就是绑缚用的柱子,指鼻尖或口相,站在它下面、靠近它的地方。怎么站呢?靠念的力量。修行的人把念好好地安放在那里,就可以说他站在那里,因为整体不能仅凭部分来断言。“相”是指鼻尖等。“以念而坐”是指以念力而坐。应当像“把念好好地安放在那里”等处那样说。“于彼处”是指所触之处。“他们”是指进出城内外的人们,以及属于那些人者,已在手中。“从最初以来”是指从显示所喻之义开始。巴利
Paṅguḷoti pīṭhasappī. Dolāti peṅkholo. Kīḷatanti kīḷantānaṃ. Mātāputtānanti attano bhariyāya puttassa ca. Ubho koṭiyoti āgacchantassa purimakoṭiṃ, gacchantassa pacchimakoṭinti dvepi koṭiyo. Majjhañcāti dolāphalakasseva majjhaṃ. Upanibandhanatthambho viyāti upanibandhanatthambho, nāsikaggaṃ mukhanimittaṃ vā, tassa mūle samīpe ṭhatvā. Kathaṃ ṭhatvā ? Satiyā vasena. Satiñhi tattha sūpaṭṭhitaṃ karonto yogāvacaro tattha ṭhito nāma hoti avayavadhammena samudāyassa apadisitabbato . Nimitteti nāsikaggādinimitte. Satiyā nisinnoti sativasena nisīdanto. ‘‘Satiñhi tatthā’’tiādinā ṭhāne viya vattabbaṃ. Tatthāti phuṭṭhaṭṭhāne. Teti nagarassa anto bahi ca gatā manussā tesaṃ saṅgahā ca hatthagatā. Ādito pabhutīti upameyyatthadassanato paṭṭhāya.
偈颂里说的“相”,是指系缚的相。“不是单一心的所缘”,意思是它不是单一心的所缘,也就是不能成为所缘。“不知三法的人”,是指没能把相、入息、出息这三法当作所缘来把握的人。“且”这个字表示区别。“修习”就是入出息念定的修习。“不能获得”,就是不能获得、不能成就,这是责难偈颂的意思。第二首遮护偈颂则很容易理解。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ nimittanti upanibandhananimittaṃ. Anārammaṇamekacittassāti ekassa cittassa na ārammaṇaṃ, ārammaṇaṃ na hontīti attho. Ajānato ca tayo dhammeti nimittaṃ assāso passāsoti ime nimittādayo tayo dhamme ārammaṇakaraṇavasena avindantassa. Ca-saddo byatireke. Bhāvanāti ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanā. Nupalabbhatīti na upalabbhati na sijjhatīti ayaṃ codanāgāthāya attho. Dutiyā pana parihāragāthā suviññeyyāva.
“如何”这个问题,是为了阐明那些责难与回应偈颂的含义、想要解说而提出的。在“这些三法”等句子中,结合词语的搭配,其含义解释如下:这些相、入息、出息三法,为什么不是单一心的所缘?即使它们不是所缘,为什么这三法不是未被了知?如果它们未被了知,心为什么不会陷入散乱?作为修习成就根本的精勤,又如何显现?能镇伏盖障、真正带来等持的修习实践——也就是所谓的加行,修行者又如何成就?又怎样一步步证得世间与出世间的殊胜?巴利
Kathanti tāsaṃ codanāparihāragāthānaṃ atthaṃ vivarituṃ kathetukamyatāpucchā. Ime tayo dhammātiādīsu padayojanāya saddhiṃ ayamatthaniddeso – ime nimittādayo tayo dhammā ekacittassa kathaṃ ārammaṇaṃ na honti, asatipi ārammaṇabhāve na cime na ca ime tayo dhammā aviditā honti, kathañca na honti aviditā, tesañhi aviditatte cittañca kathaṃ vikkhepaṃ na gacchati, padhānañca bhāvanāya nipphādakaṃ vīriyañca kathaṃ paññāyati, nīvaraṇānaṃ vikkhambhakaṃ sammadeva samādhānāvahaṃ bhāvanānuyogasaṅkhātaṃ payogañca yogī kathaṃ sādheti, uparūpari lokiyalokuttarañca visesaṃ kathamadhigacchatīti.
现在为了用锯喻说明这个道理,就说了“譬如”等话。如果地面不平,树又在摇晃,砍伐的工作就不容易进行;这样一来,锯齿移动的轨迹也难以辨认,所以他说“在平坦的地面上”。“用锯”,是指用细小而锐利的锯。因此他说“人”。“触到锯齿”,是就所触到的每一个锯齿来说的。这是显示:那人只在锯齿所触到的地方,念才现前。因此他说:“他不对来的或去的锯齿作意。”巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ kakacopamāya sādhetuṃ ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhūmibhāgassa visamatāya cañcale rukkhe chedanakiriyā na sukarā siyā, tathā ca sati kakacadantagati duviññeyyāti āha – ‘‘same bhūmibhāge’’ti. Kakacenāti khuddakena kharapattena. Tenāha ‘‘puriso’’ti. Phuṭṭhakakacadantānanti phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhakakacadantānaṃ vasena. Tena kakacadantehi phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva purisassa satiyā upaṭṭhānaṃ dasseti. Tenāha – ‘‘na āgate vā gate vā kakacadante manasi karotī’’ti.
拉锯的时候,朝着人这边过来的锯齿,叫作“来”;推锯的时候,从人这边离开的锯齿,叫作“去”。但来去的锯齿并非不被觉知:一则因为念在一切处都现前,二则因为凡是往来行进的锯齿,没有不触及应切割之处的。精进,就是砍树的努力。加行,就是那砍伐的动作。在譬喻里,“证得殊胜”这个词巴利原文中并没有,但要结合上下文把它补出来说明。正因如此,《清净道论》在譬喻中也把“证得殊胜”这个词结合进去才说。它的注释里解释其含义:“殊胜,就是成就多种状态,以此应当成办的利益殊胜。”巴利
Kakacassa ākaḍḍhanakāle purisābhimukhaṃ pavattā āgatā, pellanakāle tato vigatā gatāti vuttā, na ca āgatā vā gatā vā kakacadantā aviditā honti sabbattha satiyā upaṭṭhitattā chinditabbaṭṭhānaṃ aphusitvā gacchantānaṃ āgacchantānañca kakacadantānaṃ abhāvato. Padhānanti rukkhassa chedanavīriyaṃ. Payoganti tasseva chedanakiriyaṃ. Upamāyaṃ ‘‘visesamadhigacchatī’’ti padaṃ pāḷiyaṃ natthi, yojetvā pana dassetabbaṃ. Teneva visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.227) upamāyampi ‘‘visesamadhigacchatī’’ti padaṃ yojetvāva vuttaṃ. Taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyañca ‘‘visesanti anekabhāvāpādanaṃ, tena ca sādhetabbaṃ payojanavisesa’’nti attho vutto.
“如树”等,是譬喻的对应说明。心被它系缚在所缘上,所以叫做念系缚;对入出息标记的觉察之相,就是系缚之相,也就是鼻端或口相。就像这样:正如那人用锯子砍树时,虽然不刻意注意来去的锯齿,但只在每一个接触的地方让念现前,就能知道来去的锯齿,而且不偏离墨线,完成该做的事,同样地——在鼻端或口相上:长鼻子的人取鼻端,其他人取口相,也就是上唇,因为“口”是食物,在这里被标记、被覆盖,所以得到“口相”这个名字。巴利
Yathā rukkhotiādi upamāsaṃsandanaṃ. Upanibandhati ārammaṇe cittaṃ etāyāti sati upanibandhanā nāma, tassā assāsapassāsānaṃ sallakkhaṇassa nimittanti upanibandhanānimittaṃ, nāsikaggaṃ mukhanimittaṃ vā. Evamevanti yathā so puriso kakacena rukkhaṃ chindanto āgatagate kakacadante amanasikarontopi phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva satiyā upaṭṭhapanena āgatagate kakacadante jānāti, suttapadañca avirajjhanto atthakiccaṃ sādheti, evamevaṃ. Nāsikagge mukhanimitteti dīghanāsiko nāsikagge, itaro mukhaṃ asanaṃ nimīyati chādīyati etenāti mukhanimittanti laddhanāme uttaroṭṭhe.
这就是精进:依靠这种开始精进的努力,已经发起精进的修行者,他的身体和心都变得堪能、适合修行、能够用于修行——这是用结果来显示原因。随烦恼被断除:就是那些成为心之随烦恼的诸盖,通过镇伏而被断除。寻被止息:就是从那时起,欲寻等邪寻都归于止息;或者,通过断除诸盖来显示初禅的证得之后,又以寻止息的说法来说明第二禅等的证得。这是加行:这就是作为证得禅那之因的业处修习,叫做加行。结被断除:就是十种结,依照道的次第,通过正断而被断除。随眠被消除:同样,七种随眠通过令不再生起的法则,即使只是坏灭也无余地被消除。在这里,所谓结的断除,实际上就是随眠的灭尽;而且为了显示在已断的结中,随眠连一丝痕迹也不会存在,所以说了“结被断除,随眠被消除”。这是殊胜:依靠这种定,次第获得的结断除等,就是这种定的殊胜,这是意思。巴利
Idaṃ padhānanti yena vīriyārambhena āraddhavīriyassa yogino kāyopi cittampi kammaniyaṃ bhāvanākammakkhamaṃ bhāvanākammayoggaṃ hoti, idaṃ vīriyaṃ padhānanti phalena hetuṃ dasseti. Upakkilesā pahīyantīti cittassa upakkilesabhūtāni nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhanavasena pahīyanti. Vitakkā vūpasammantīti tato eva kāmavitakkādayo micchāvitakkā upasamaṃ gacchanti, nīvaraṇappahānena vā paṭhamajjhānādhigamaṃ dassetvā vitakkavūpasamāpadesena dutiyajjhānādīnamadhigamamāha. Ayaṃ payogoti ayaṃ jhānādhigamassa hetubhūto kammaṭṭhānānuyogo payogo. Saṃyojanā pahīyantīti dasapi saṃyojanāni maggappaṭipāṭiyā samucchedavasena pahīyanti. Anusayā byantī hontīti tathā sattapi anusayā anuppattidhammatāpādanena bhaṅgamattassapi anavasesato vigatantā honti. Ettha ca saṃyojanappahānaṃ nāma anusayanirodheneva hoti, pahīnesu ca saṃyojanesu anusayānaṃ lesopi na bhavissatīti ca dassanatthaṃ ‘‘saṃyojanā pahīyanti, anusayā byantī hontī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ visesoti imaṃ samādhiṃ nissāya anukkamena labbhamāno ayaṃ saṃyojanappahānādiko imassa samādhissa visesoti attho.
“Yassā”的意思是“由那种”。“Anupubbaṃ”的意思是“次第地”。“Paricitā”的意思是“已熟习”。这里的简要含义是这样的:入出息念正如佛陀、世尊所教导的那样,以了知长短等方法次第熟习、善加修习,正因为如此,它圆满成就了十六种事的圆满而完全具足。那位比丘以智慧的光明照亮自己的蕴等世间。像什么呢?就像脱离了云的月亮,即脱离了云等随烦恼的月亮,众星之王。应当知道,在解释“如月离云”这个词时,因为也提到了地等,所以这里省略了“等”字。巴利
Yassāti yena. Anupubbanti anukkamena. Paricitāti pariciṇṇā. Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho – ānāpānassati yathā buddhena bhagavatā desitā, tathā yena dīgharassapajaānanādividhinā anupubbaṃ paricitā suṭṭhu bhāvitā, tato eva paripuṇṇā soḷasannaṃ vatthūnaṃ pāripūriyā sabbaso puṇṇā, so bhikkhu imaṃ attano khandhādilokaṃ paññobhāsena pabhāseti. Yathā kiṃ? Abbhā muttova candimā abbhādiupakkilesavimutto candimā tārakarājā viyāti. ‘‘Abbhā muttova candimā’’ti hi padassa niddese mahikādīnampi vuttattā ettha ādi-saddalopo katoti veditabbo.
这里“在此”是指锯喻。“那位”是指修行者。或者,“在此”是指在这个地方,“那位”是指作为比喻的锯子。就像那个人对锯子的来去不作意一样,对入出息也只是在来去时保持不作意,这就是此处要引出的用意。“不久”这句话是针对已经做过准备工作的人说的。“相”是指似相。“为其余禅支所庄严”:他们说是指为寻等其余禅支所庄严,但应该说“为伺等”,因为严格来说,寻并不存在于安止中。原因是:经文中把寻说成“安止、遍止”;又由于与它相应,禅那在注释传统中被称为安止。而诸禅支当中,定是主要的。所以,为了显示那安止,就说“为其余禅支所庄严、称为安止的安立也成就”。不过,在某些抄本中,这里以“仅仅以计数的方式,从作意的时候开始”起首,而“次第地……如同已经达到”这一整段文字则缺失了,但在一些古旧写本中,那段文字仍然被写下来保留着。巴利
Idhāti kakacūpamāya. Assāti yogino. Idhāti vā imasmiṃ ṭhāne. Assāti upamābhūtassa kakacassa. Āgatagatavasena yathā tassa purisassa amanasikāro, evaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ āgatagatavasena amanasikāramattameva ānayanappayojanaṃ. Na cirenevāti idaṃ katādhikāraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Nimittanti paṭibhāganimittaṃ. Avasesajjhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitāti vitakkādiavasesajjhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitāti vadanti, vicārādīti pana vattabbaṃ nippariyāyena vitakkassa appanābhāvato. So hi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘appanā byappanā’’ti niddiṭṭho, taṃsampayogato vā yasmā jhānaṃ appanāti aṭṭhakathāvohāro, jhānaṅgesu ca samādhi padhānaṃ, tasmā taṃ appanāti dassento ‘‘avasesajjhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitā appanāsaṅkhātā ṭhapanā ca sampajjatī’’ti āha. Kassaci pana gaṇanāvaseneva manasikārakālato pabhutīti ettha ‘‘anukkamato…pe… pattaṃ viya hotī’’ti ettakova gantho parihīno, purāṇapotthakesu pana katthaci so gantho likhitoyeva tiṭṭhati.
对于任何身体躁动的人,身体会向下弯曲,是因为膀胱等器官下垂的牵拉。发出声响,就是弄出声音。产生皱纹,就是各处出现皱纹。为什么呢?因为躁动的身体是沉重的。粗显的入出息之灭,与身躁动的止息一同达成,这是通过反证的方式来说明的。以粗显的入出息之灭为手段,则是通过顺证来成立其含义。当身躁动止息时,由于心生色法具有轻快、柔软、适业的状态,其余等流色法也具有轻快等状态,这里理解为身体的轻快。而这种轻快,因为离开心的轻快等状态就不存在,所以说身和心都变得轻快。巴利
Sāraddhakāyassa kassaci puggalassa. Onamati vatthikādipalambanena. Vikūjatīti saddaṃ karoti. Valiṃ gaṇhātīti. Tattha tattha valinaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā sāraddhakāyo garuko hotīti. Kāyadarathavūpasamena saddhiṃ sijjhamāno oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodho byatirekamukhena tassa sādhanaṃ viya vutto. Oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodhavasenāti anvayavasena tadatthassa sādhanaṃ. Kāyadarathe vūpasanteti cittajarūpānaṃ lahumudukammaññabhāvena yo sesatisantatirūpānampi lahuādibhāvo, so idha kāyassa lahubhāvoti adhippeto. Svāyaṃ yasmā cittassa lahuādibhāvena vinā natthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyopi cittampi lahukaṃ hotī’’ti.
“当粗重的入出息止息”等语之所以引出,是为了说明审察身行的方法:身行若按前面所说的方式已达到应当审察的阶段,应如何加以审察。巴利
Oḷārike assāsapassāse niruddhetiādi heṭṭhā vuttanayamhi vicetabbākārappattassa kāyasaṅkhārassa vicayanavidhiṃ dassetuṃ ānītaṃ.
由于修习的力量,它们一层比一层更清晰地显现出来。“从处所”是指从自然接触的处所,也就是先前依自己接触而确定的位置。巴利
Uparūparivibhūtānīti bhāvanābalena uddhaṃ uddhaṃ pākaṭāni honti. Desatoti pakatiyā phusanadesato, pubbe attano phusanavasena upadhāritaṭṭhānato.
为了把“在哪里没有?”按处所来考察、把“谁的没有?”按个人来考察,这样被审察的意义合在一起说清楚,所以说了“在母胎内”等话。其中,阿阇梨护法长老说:“就像沉入水中的人,因为空间被阻断,入出息不转起,在母胎内也是这样。就像死者因为没有能令其生起的心,无想者、昏迷者、或生于无想有情中的众生也是这样,入灭尽定者也是这样。”不过在《大结节》里说:“昏迷者因为心转起微弱。”第四禅的证入者,是依法性自然,他们的入出息不生起,色界和无色界的有情也是这样。但有些人说:“因为次第达到微细状态,第四禅的证入者没有入出息;因为色界中色法和有分的微细状态,色界有情没有入出息。”意思是:除了前面所说的七种情况之外,入出息确实存在,因为没有入出息不生起的情况。“依自然触处”是指依自然接触的处所。“应安立相”是指为了让念在那里安乐地转起,应让更坚固的想转起。因为坚固的想是念的近因。“正是这个”是指对于不现起入出息的人,正是这个如同拔刺的方法,也就是让身行现起的方法。“目的”指原因。因为目的是果。它依之而转起,所以叫“目的”。“失念者”指念已坏失的人。“不正知者”指缺乏正知的人,意思是:对于正在修习而次第不现起入出息的人,缺乏能够审察“这些就是入出息”并正确了知的念与慧。“从此处,其他业处”指其他业处。“沉重”指负担重。而它的沉重性是由于修习极为困难,所以说“沉重修习”。巴利
‘‘Kattha natthī’’ti ṭhānavasena ‘‘kassa natthī’’ti puggalavasena ca vīmaṃsiyamānamatthaṃ ekajjhaṃ katvā vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘antomātukucchiya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘yathā udake nimuggassa niruddhokāsatāya assāsapassāsā na pavattanti, evaṃ antomātukucchiyaṃ. Yathā matānaṃ samuṭṭhāpakacittābhāvato, evaṃ asaññībhūtānaṃ mucchāparetānaṃ asaññīsu vā jātānaṃ, tathā nirodhasamāpannāna’’nti ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ. Mahāgaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘mucchāparetānaṃ cittappavattiyā dubbalabhāvato’’ti kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Catutthajjhānasamāpannānaṃ dhammatāvaseneva nesaṃ anuppajjanaṃ, tathā rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgīnaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘anupubbato sukhumabhāvappattiyā catutthajjhānasamāpannassa, rūpabhave rūpānaṃ bhavaṅgassa ca sukhumabhāvato rūpabhavasamaṅgīnaṃ natthī’’ti kāraṇaṃ vadanti. Atthiyeva te assāsapassāsā pārisesatoti adhippāyo yathāvuttasattaṭṭhānavinimuttassa assāsapassāsānaṃ anuppajjanaṭṭhānassa abhāvato. Pakatiphuṭṭhavasenāti pakatiyā phusanaṭṭhānavasena. Nimittaṃ ṭhapetabbanti satiyā tattha sukhappavattanatthaṃ thirataraṃ saññāṇaṃ pavattetabbaṃ. Thirasaññāpadaṭṭhānā hi sati. Imamevāti imaṃ eva anupaṭṭhahantassa kāyasaṅkhārassa kaṇṭakuṭṭhāpanañāyena upaṭṭhāpanavidhimeva. Atthavasanti hetuṃ. Attho hi phalaṃ. So yassa vasena pavattati, so atthavasoti. Muṭṭhassatissāti vinaṭṭhassatissa. Asampajānassāti sampajaññavirahitassa, bhāventassa anukkamena anupaṭṭhahante assāsapassāse vīmaṃsitvā ‘‘ime te’’ti upadhāretuṃ sammadeva jānituñca samatthāhi satipaññāhi virahitassāti adhippāyo. Ito aññaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ. Garukanti bhāriyaṃ. Sā cassa garukatā bhāvanāya sudukkarabhāvenāti āha ‘‘garukabhāvana’’nti.
由于一层层地达到越来越微细的状态,所以说“应当希求强而有力、极为清净、锐利的正念与正慧”;为了说明微细之义的达成也要靠微细的方式,便说了“正如……”等话。现在,为了开示那些入出息尚未现起的人寻求的方法,而说了“然而以彼……”等。其中,“anupada”就是一步一步地跟随。“caritvā”就是取好所行境之后。“tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne”就是在那个被称为系缚相的处所。“yojetvā”就是用作意把它系上;或者说“用正念之绳系缚”,说的正是同一个意思,即“系缚在同一个处所”,因为在譬喻中,系缚和连接的地方并不能分开得到。“nimitta”指取相或似相,这里两者被合在一起说。因为棉絮等三个比喻适用于取相,其余的则两者都适用。“ekacce”指某些阿阇梨。巴利
Uparūpari santasukhumabhāvāpattito ‘‘balavatī suvisadā sūrā ca sati paññā ca icchitabbā’’ti vatvā sukhumassa nāma atthassa sādhanenapi sukhumeneva bhavitabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idāni anupaṭṭhahantānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ pariyesanupāyaṃ dassento ‘‘tāhi ca panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha anupadanti padānupadaṃ. Caritvāti gocaraṃ gahetvā. Tasmiṃyeva ṭhāneti upanibandhananimittasaññite ṭhāne. Yojetvāti manasikārena yojetvā. ‘‘Satirasmiyā bandhitvā’’ti vā vuttamevatthamāha ‘‘tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne yojetvā’’ti. Na hi upameyye bandhanayojanaṭṭhānāni visuṃ labbhanti. Nimittanti uggahanimittaṃ paṭibhāganimittaṃ vā. Ubhayampi hi idha ekajjhaṃ vuttaṃ. Tathā hi tūlapicuādi upamattayaṃ uggahe yujjati, sesaṃ ubhayattha. Ekacceti eke ācariyā.
像星星的形状那样,就是指像星星的光形那样。宝珠等的比喻,是就似相来说的。那么,为什么同一个业处会以多种方式现起呢?因此说“而那个……”等等。“经”就是一部经。因为它熟练运转、从不间断,而且所缘广大,所以说“像山间的大河”。其中,由于文句圆满,这部方方面面都善巧的经,就像一切部分都悦人、一切枝叶花果都盛开的丛林,所以说“像一片丛林”。因此世尊说:“像丛林中花满枝头。”(小诵6.13;经集236)具足种种关联、种种重复、种种微细理趣、种种业处门径的经,有需要的人应当恭敬地亲近,所以说“像清凉的树荫……像树”。“由于想有种种”这句话,是说在相现起之前生起的想有,有种种不同的状态。“想所生”,是指由修习想所生,即仅仅由修习想来认知。因为不实有之法不可能从任何地方生起。因此说“以种种方式现起”,意思是仅仅就现起的行相来说。巴利
Tārakarūpaṃ viyāti tārakāya pabhārūpaṃ viya. Maṇiguḷikādiupamā paṭibhāge vaṭṭanti. Kathaṃ panetaṃ ekaṃyeva kammaṭṭhānaṃ anekākārato upaṭṭhātīti āha ‘‘tañca paneta’’ntiādi. Suttantanti ekaṃ suttaṃ. Paguṇappavattibhāvena avicchedaṃ mahāvisayatañca sandhāyāha ‘‘mahatī pabbateyyā nadī viyā’’ti. Tattha byañjanasampattiyā samantabhaddakaṃ suttaṃ sabbabhāgamanoharā sabbapāliphullā vanaghaṭā viyāti āha ‘‘ekā vanarāji viyā’’ti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘vanappagumbe yatha phussitagge’’ti (khu. pā. 6.13; su. ni. 236) nānānusandhiyaṃ nānāpeyyālaṃ vividhanayanipuṇaṃ bahuvidhakammaṭṭhānamukhaṃ suttantaṃ atthikehi sakkaccaṃ samupapajjitabbanti āha – ‘‘sītacchāyo…pe… rukkhoviyā’’ti. Saññānānatāyāti nimittupaṭṭhānato pubbe pavattasaññānaṃ nānāvidhabhāvato. Saññajanti bhāvanāsaññājanitaṃ bhāvanāsaññāya sañjānanamattaṃ. Na hi asabhāvassa kutoci samuṭṭhānaṃ atthi. Tenāha – ‘‘nānato upaṭṭhātī’’ti, upaṭṭhānākāramattanti vuttaṃ hoti.
这些就是三种法,也就是入息、出息和相这三种法。不存在,是指就修行业处来说,它不能作为应当作意的对象而存在,也就是找不到、得不到。达不到近行,是说连近行定都到不了,更不用说安止定了,这是这里的意思。至于若有……的情况,按照前面所说的方法类推,就能明白。巴利
Ime tayo dhammāti assāso passāso nimittanti ime tayo dhammā. Natthīti kammaṭṭhānavasena manasikātabbabhāvena natthi na upalabbhati. Na upacāranti upacārampi na pāpuṇāti, pageva appananti adhippāyo. Yassa panāti vijjamānapakkho vuttanayānusāreneva veditabbo.
现在,为了说明刚才所说的义理,引用了《锯喻经》中“相”等偈颂。“相”就是指前面所说的似相。“会这样”是指专注于修习的人会这样想,因此应当对他说:“你要一再这样作意。”“可能会退缩”是指他可能会这样退缩:“相据说很难生起,而我已经得到了它,那我现在随时都可以证得殊胜。”“可能会沮丧”是指他可能会沮丧地想:“修习了这么久,连相都还没生起,我想我大概是没能力证得殊胜了。”然而,当说到“依这条道路修行,我将会从老死中解脱”时,对于这样修行的人来说,相已经生起,怎么会有退缩呢?他应当更加努力精进。中部诵者说:“应当对他说‘这是相……’等等。”所谓“这样”,是指以所说方式将修习之心安住于似相上。所谓“从此以后”,是指从似相生起以后开始。先前所说的“随逐、触、安住而作意”,其中应当舍弃随逐和触,仅以安住的方式修习,因此说“以安住的方式修习”。巴利
Idāni vuttasseva atthassa samatthanatthaṃ kakacūpamāyaṃ āgatā ‘‘nimitta’’ntiādikā gāthā paccānītā. Nimitteti yathāvutte paṭibhāganimitte. Evaṃ hotīti bhāvanamanuyuttassa evaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘punappunaṃ evaṃ manasi karohī’’ti vattabbo. Vosānaṃ āpajjeyyāti ‘‘nimittaṃ nāma dukkaraṃ uppādetuṃ, tayidaṃ laddhaṃ, handāhaṃ dāni yadā vā tadā vā visesaṃ nibbattessāmī’’ti saṅkocaṃ āpajjeyya. Visīdeyyāti ‘‘ettakaṃ kālaṃ bhāvanamanuyuttassa nimittampi na uppannaṃ, abhabbo maññe visesassā’’ti visādaṃ āpajjeyya. ‘‘Imāya paṭipadāya jarāmaraṇato muccissāmīti paṭipannassa nimitta’’nti vutte kathaṃ saṅkocāpatti, bhiyyoso mattāya ussāhameva kareyyāti ‘‘nimittamidaṃ…pe… vattabbo’’ti majjhimabhāṇakā āhu. Evanti vuttappakārena paṭibhāganimitteyeva bhāvanācittassa ṭhapanena. Ito pabhutīti ito paṭibhāganimittuppattito paṭṭhāya. Pubbe yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘anubandhanāya phusanāya ṭhapanāya ca manasi karotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.ānāpānassatisamādhikathā), tattha anubandhanaṃ phusanañca vissajjetvā ṭhapanāvaseneva bhāvetabbanti āha ‘‘ṭhapanāvasena bhāvanā hotī’’ti.
为了说明“往昔的善士们所说的就是这个意思”,而说了“于相”这首偈颂。其中,“相”是指似相。“安立心”就是安立修习的心,意思是以安住的方式作意。“种种行相”是指“四种颜色”等所说的种种行相,这里是按行相的共通性而用单数来表达。“令消失”就是令其消失、消失,因为从相生起之后,那些行相由于不作意,就好像消失了一样。“于入出息”是指在入出息中的种种行相令其消失,或者在入出息所生的相中令其消失。“系缚自心”是指以那种安住,把自己的心系缚于彼,也就是令心进入安止的意思。不过有些人把“令消失”解释为令其明显、清楚,这在前分阶段是说得通的。这里真正的意思是:具足慧力的智者瑜伽行者,令入出息中的种种行相消失,以种种方式了知它们,使它们明显、清楚,或者令粗重的种种行相止息、寂静,然后把心安立在所获得的相上,次第系缚自心,令入安止。巴利
Porāṇehi vuttovāyamatthoti dassento ‘‘nimitte’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha nimitteti paṭibhāganimitte. Ṭhapayaṃ cittanti bhāvanācittaṃ ṭhapento, ṭhapanāvasena manasikarontoti attho. Nānākāranti ‘‘cattāro vaṇṇā’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ nānākāraṃ. Ākārasāmaññavasena hetaṃ ekavacanaṃ. Vibhāvayanti vibhāvento antaradhāpento. Nimittuppattito paṭṭhāya hi te ākārā amanasikārato antarahitā viya honti. Assāsapassāseti assāsapassāse yo nānākāro, taṃ vibhāvayaṃ, assāsapassāsasambhūte vā nimitte. Sakaṃ cittaṃ nibandhatīti tāya eva ṭhapanāya attano cittaṃ upanibandhati, appetīti attho. Keci pana ‘‘vibhāvayanti vibhāvento, viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto’’ti atthaṃ vadanti, taṃ pubbabhāgavasena yujjeyya. Ayañhettha attho – dhitisampannattā dhīro yogī assāsapassāse nānākāraṃ vibhāvento nānākārato te pajānanto vidite pākaṭe karonto nānākāraṃ vā oḷārikoḷārike passambhento vūpasamento tattha yaṃ laddhaṃ nimittaṃ, tasmiṃ cittaṃ ṭhapento anukkamena sakaṃ cittaṃ nibandhati appetīti.
当信等诸根变得非常清净、锐利而持续运作时,由于不信等已经远离,那些寻等禅支便得到七力强有力的支撑,大量地显现出来,但它们仍然只是属于欲界的禅支。正因为如此,与它们直接对立的欲贪等,连同与欲贪等俱生的种种恶法,便随着似相的生起而远远退离,依靠这一点,近行定就生起了。因此说“从似相出现开始,诸盖就已经被镇伏了”等等。其中,“已安坐”是指完全正确地安坐,意思是已经寂静。“已镇伏而安坐”这一强调,则说明应当为这个意义而努力。以两种方式,是指禅那诸法的敌对法远离,以及达到坚固状态,以这两种原因。现在,为了通过阶段来显示这些原因,所以说“在近行地”等等。其中,“在近行地”指近行阶段。因为那时虽然禅支还没有变得更强、还没有达到广大状态,但通过镇伏它们的敌对法,心就能得定,因此说“由断除诸盖”。“在获得地”指证得禅那的阶段。因为那时,已达到安止的禅那诸法生起,心就能得定,因此说“由诸支显现”。巴利
Yadā saddhādīni indriyāni suvisadāni tikkhāni pavattanti, tadā assaddhiyādīnaṃ dūrībhāvena sātisayaṃ thāmappattehi sattahi balehi laddhupatthambhāni vitakkādīni kāmāvacarāneva jhānaṅgāni bahūni hutvā pātubhavanti. Tato eva tesaṃ ujuvipaccanīkabhūtā kāmacchandādayo saddhiṃ tadekaṭṭhehi pāpadhammehi vidūrī bhavanti paṭibhāganimittuppattiyā saddhiṃ, taṃ ārabbha upacārajjhānaṃ uppajjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘nimittupaṭṭhānato pabhuti nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhitāneva hontī’’tiādi. Tattha sannisinnāvāti sammadeva nisīdiṃsu eva, upasantāyevāti attho. Vikkhambhitāneva sannisinnāvāti avadhāraṇena pana tadatthaṃ ussāho kātabboti dasseti. Dvīhākārehīti jhānadhammānaṃ paṭipakkhadūrībhāvo thirabhāvappatti cāti imehi dvīhi kāraṇehi. Idāni tāni kāraṇāni avatthāmukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘upacārabhūmiyaṃ vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha upacārabhūmiyanti upacārāvatthāyaṃ. Yadipi hi tadā jhānaṅgāni paṭutarāni mahaggatabhāvappattāni nuppajjanti, tesaṃ pana paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ vikkhambhanena cittaṃ samādhiyati. Tenāha ‘‘nīvaraṇappahānenā’’ti. Paṭilābhabhūmiyanti jhānassa adhigamāvatthāyaṃ. Tadā hi appanāppattānaṃ jhānadhammānaṃ uppattiyā cittaṃ samādhiyati. Tenāha ‘‘aṅgapātubhāvenā’’ti.
在近行阶段,诸支并不强健有力,因为诸支本身无力。就像把一个幼小的孩子抱起来让他站着,他却一次又一次地跌回地上;同样,当近行定生起时,心有时把相作为所缘,有时又落入有分。因此说:“近行定在善速行路中运行之后,落入有分。”但在安止阶段,诸支变得强健有力,因为诸支本身有力。就像一个强壮的人从座位上站起来,能站一整天;同样,当安止定生起时,心一次截断有分,便能持续整夜、整日,唯依善速行的相续而运转。因此说:“安止定……不落入有分。”从颜色来说,就像棉团、星形等色那样呈现;从特相来说,则是从粗涩等自性,或从无常等自性来说。应当守护那个相——这就是这里的关联。巴利
Upacāre aṅgāni na thāmajātāni honti aṅgānaṃ athāmajātattā. Yathā nāma daharo kumārako ukkhipitvā ṭhapiyamāno punappunaṃ bhūmiyaṃ patati, evameva upacāre uppanne cittaṃ kālena nimittaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karoti, kālena bhavaṅgaṃ otarati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘upacārasamādhi kusalavīthiyaṃ javitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otaratī’’ti. Appanāyaṃ pana aṅgāni thāmajātāni honti tesaṃ thāmajātattā. Yathā nāma balavā puriso āsanā vuṭṭhāya divasampi tiṭṭheyya, evameva appanāsamādhimhi uppanne cittaṃ sakiṃ bhavaṅgavāraṃ chinditvā kevalampi rattiṃ kevalampi divasaṃ tiṭṭhati, kusalajavanapaṭipāṭivaseneva pavattati. Tenāha – ‘‘appanāsamādhi…pe… na bhavaṅgaṃ otaratī’’ti. Vaṇṇatoti picupiṇḍatārakarūpādīsu viya upaṭṭhitavaṇṇato. Lakkhaṇatoti kharabhāvādisabhāvato aniccādisabhāvato vā. Rakkhitabbaṃ taṃ nimittanti sambandho.
“已获得的退失”是指已经得到的近行禅那的退失。当相没有坏灭时,以那个相为所缘的禅那就不会退失;但如果因为缺乏守护而使相坏灭了,那么已经得到的禅那也会随之坏灭,因为它是依靠那个相才能持续运作的。所以说“在守护方面”等等。巴利
Laddhaparihānīti laddhaupacārajjhānaparihāni. Nimitte avinassante tadārammaṇaṃ jhānaṃ aparihīnameva hoti, nimitte pana ārakkhābhāvena vinaṭṭhe laddhaṃ laddhaṃ jhānampi vinassati tadāyattavuttito. Tenāha ‘‘ārakkhamhī’’tiādi.
现在,在这里,用“守护的方法”等语句来说明——巴利
Idāni tatrāyaṃ rakkhaṇūpāyotiādinā –
住处行境与言谈,人食时节及威仪;
此七若为不宜者,悉当远避莫亲近。
“ 应亲近七种适合的,如此践行者,
不用多久,安止定就会在某人生起。”巴利
‘‘Āvāso gocaro bhassaṃ, puggalo bhojanaṃ utu; Iriyāpathoti sattete, asappāye vivajjaye. ‘‘Sappāye satta sevetha, evañhi paṭipajjato; Na cireneva kālena, hoti kassaci appanā’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.59) –
像这样,对所说的守护方法作了简要说明。这里详细说明如下:如果住在某个住处时,尚未生起的相不生起,或者已经生起的相消失,尚未现前的念不现前,尚未得定的心不得定,这个住处就是不合适的。如果相能够生起并且稳固,念能现前,心能得定,这个住处就是合适的。因此,如果一座精舍里有很多住处,就应该在每一处各住三天,哪里能让他的心专一,就应该住在那里。巴利
Evaṃ vuttaṃ rakkhaṇavidhiṃ saṅkhepato vibhāveti. Tatrāyaṃ vitthāro – yasmiṃ āvāse vasantassa anuppannaṃ vā nimittaṃ nuppajjati, uppannaṃ vā vinassati, anupaṭṭhitā ca sati na upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṃ na samādhiyati, ayaṃ asappāyo. Yattha nimittaṃ uppajjati ceva thāvarañca hoti, sati upaṭṭhāti, cittaṃ samādhiyati, ayaṃ sappāyo. Tasmā yasmiṃ vihāre bahū āvāsā honti, tattha ekamekasmiṃ tīṇi tīṇi divasāni vasitvā yatthassa cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, tattha vasitabbaṃ.
至于行处村庄,如果它在住所北边或南边,不太远,在一拘卢舍半以内,而且比丘容易得到充足的食物,那就是合适的;反过来就不合适。巴利
Gocaragāmo pana yo senāsanato uttarena vā dakkhiṇena vā nātidūre diyaḍḍhakosabbhantare hoti sulabhasampannabhikkho, so sappāyo, viparīto asappāyo.
谈论属于三十二种畜生论范围的话题,是不合适的,因为那会导致禅相消失。依靠十论事而说的,则是合适的,但也应当适度地说。巴利
Bhassanti dvattiṃsatiracchānakathāpariyāpannaṃ asappāyaṃ. Tañhissa nimittantaradhānāya saṃvattati. Dasakathāvatthunissitaṃ sappāyaṃ, tampimattāya bhāsitabbaṃ.
一个人只要不沉迷于畜生论,又具备戒等功德,依靠他,未得定的心能得定,已得定的心能更加稳固,这样的人就是适合的。但若一个人偏重身体健壮、又爱谈畜生论,那就不适合。因为他就像泥水一样,只会把清水弄脏;依靠这种人,禅定就会毁坏,就像住在山顶寺院的年轻沙弥那样,更不用说禅相了。巴利
Puggalopi atiracchānakathiko sīlādiguṇasampanno, yaṃ nissāya asamāhitaṃ vā cittaṃ samādhiyati, samāhitaṃ vā cittaṃ thirataraṃ hoti, evarūpo sappāyo. Kāyadaḷhībahulo pana tiracchānakathiko asappāyo. So hi taṃ kaddamodakamiva acchaṃ udakaṃ malīnameva karoti, tādisañca āgamma koṭapabbatavāsīdaharasseva samāpatti vinassati, pageva nimittaṃ.
食物方面,甜味对某些人适合,酸味对某些人适合。季节方面,寒冷对某些人适合,炎热对某些人适合。因此,一个人受用某种食物或某个季节时,如果感到舒适,未得定的心能得定,已得定的心能更加稳固,那么这种食物和这个季节就是适合的。其他的食物和其他的季节,就是不适合的。巴利
Bhojanaṃ pana kassaci madhuraṃ, kassaci ambilaṃ sappāyaṃ hoti. Utupi kassaci sīto, kassaci uṇho sappāyo hoti. Tasmā yaṃ bhojanaṃ vā utuṃ vā sevantassa phāsu hoti, asamāhitaṃ vā cittaṃ samādhiyati, samāhitaṃ vā thirataraṃ hoti. Taṃ bhojanaṃ, so ca utu sappāyo. Itaraṃ bhojanaṃ, itaro ca utu asappāyo.
在威仪方面,有些人适合经行,有些人则适合躺卧、站立、坐着当中的某一种。因此,要像观察住处那样,用三天时间去观察:在哪种威仪下,未得定的心能够得定,已得定的心能更加稳固,那种威仪就是适合的,另一种则是不适合的,应当这样去了解。如此避开这七种不适合的,亲近适合的。因为这样修行、又多修习取相的人,不久之后就能获得安止定。巴利
Iriyāpathesupi kassaci caṅkamo sappāyo hoti, kassaci sayanaṭṭhānanisajjānaṃ aññataro. Tasmā taṃ āvāsaṃ viya tīṇi divasāni upaparikkhitvā yasmiṃ iriyāpathe asamāhitaṃ cittaṃ samādhiyati, samāhitaṃ vā thirataraṃ hoti, so sappāyo, itaro asappāyoti veditabbo. Iti imaṃ sattavidhaṃ asappāyaṃ vajjetvā sappāyaṃ sevitabbaṃ. Evaṃ paṭipannassa hi nimittāsevanabahulassa na cireneva kālena hoti kassaci appanā.
如果有人这样修行还是不能成就,为了说明他应当完成十种安止善巧,就说了“净洁所依”等话。其中,净洁所依就是让内在和外在的所依变得清净。当他的头发、指甲、体毛过长,或者身体沾满汗垢时,内在的所依就不清净、不纯净。当他的衣服破旧、污秽、发臭,或者住处肮脏时,外在的所依就不清净、不纯净。因为当内外所依不清净时,依它而生起的心与心所中,智慧也不清净,就像依靠不干净的灯盏、灯芯和灯油所生起的灯火一样。用不清净的智慧去观察诸行,诸行也不清晰;致力于业处的人,他的业处也不会增长、壮大、广大。反之,当内外所依清净时,依它而生起的心与心所中,智慧也清净,就像依靠干净的灯盏、灯芯和灯油所生起的灯火一样。用清净的智慧去观察诸行,诸行也清晰;致力于业处的人,他的业处也会增长、壮大、广大。巴利
Yassa pana evampi paṭipajjato na hoti, tena dasavidhaṃ appanākosallaṃ sampādetabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘vatthuvisadakiriyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.385; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.118; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.232; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.418) vitthuvisadakiriyā nāma ajjhattikabāhirānaṃ vatthūnaṃ visadabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Yadā hissa kesanakhalomāni dīghāni honti, sarīraṃ vā sedamalaggahitaṃ, tadā ajjhattikaṃ vatthu avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ. Yadā panassa cīvaraṃ jiṇṇaṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ duggandhaṃ hoti, senāsanaṃ vā uklāpaṃ, tadā bāhiraṃ vatthu avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ. Ajjhattikabāhire hi vatthumhi avisade uppannesu cittacetasikesu ñāṇampi aparisuddhaṃ hoti aparisuddhāni dīpakapallikavaṭṭitelāni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Aparisuddhena ca ñāṇena saṅkhāre sammasato saṅkhārāpi avibhūtā honti, kammaṭṭhānamanuyuñjato kammaṭṭhānampi vuddhiṃ viruḷhiṃ vepullaṃ na gacchati. Visade pana ajjhattikabāhire vatthumhi uppannesu cittacetasikesu ñāṇampi visadaṃ hoti parisuddhāni dīpakapallikavaṭṭitelāni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Parisuddhena ca ñāṇena saṅkhāre sammasato saṅkhārāpi vibhūtāhonti, kammaṭṭhānamanuyuñjato kammaṭṭhānampi vuddhiṃ viruḷhiṃ vepullaṃ gacchati.
所谓“诸根平衡的成就”,就是指让信等诸根达到均衡状态。假如他的信根变得很强,而其他诸根很弱,那么精进根就没办法发挥策励的作用,念根没办法发挥现前专注的作用,定根没办法发挥不散乱的作用,慧根没办法发挥照见的作用。所以,对于因为观察诸法的自性、或者按照其如何作意而变得强盛的那一根本,应当以不作意彼的方式把它减弱。这里可以举瓦咖离长老的故事作为例子。反过来,如果精进根变得很强,那么信根就没办法发挥胜解的作用,其他诸根也没办法各自发挥各自不同的作用。所以,应当通过修习轻安等来减弱它。这里则可以举索纳长老的故事来说明。同样地,应当知道,在其余诸根中也是如此:只要有一根过强,其余诸根就无法胜任各自的作用。巴利
Indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā nāma saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ samabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Sace hissa saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, itarāni mandāni, tato vīriyindriyaṃ paggahakiccaṃ, satindriyaṃ upaṭṭhānakiccaṃ, samādhindriyaṃ avikkhepakiccaṃ, paññindriyaṃ dassanakiccaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti. Tasmā taṃ dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena vā yathā vā manasikaroto balavaṃ jātaṃ, tathā amanasikārena hāpetabbaṃ. Vakkalittheravatthu cettha nidassanaṃ. Sace pana vīriyindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, atha neva saddhindriyaṃ adhimokkhakiccaṃ kātuṃ sakkoti, na itarāni itarakiccabhedaṃ. Tasmā taṃ passaddhādibhāvanāya hāpetabbaṃ. Tatrāpi soṇattheravatthu dassetabbaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi ekassa balavabhāve sati itaresaṃ attano kiccesu asamatthatā veditabbā.
在这里,特别要赞叹信与慧的平衡,以及定与精进的平衡。因为信强而慧弱的人,会变成盲目地净信,对不该信的对象也生起净信。慧强而信弱的人,会偏向狡诈那一类,就像由药物引起的病一样难以治愈。只有两者平衡,才会只对真正该信的对象生起净信。再者,定强而精进弱时,因为定属于懈怠那一方,懈怠就会压过精进;精进强而定弱时,因为精进属于掉举那一方,掉举就会压过定。但如果定和精进结合在一起,定就不会陷入懈怠;精进和定结合在一起,精进就不会陷入掉举。所以,这两者应当保持平衡。只有两者平衡,才能达到安止。另外,对于以定为修行主项的人,信强一些也是可以的。因为这样他带着信心和确信,就能达到安止。在定和慧之间,对于以定为修行主项的人,一境性强一些是合适的,因为这样他能达到安止;对于以观为修行主项的人,慧强一些是合适的,因为这样他能通达诸法的特相。不过,两者平衡时也一样能达到安止。至于念,则在任何情况下都应当强而有力。因为念能保护心,不让它因为属于掉举那一方的信、精进、慧而堕入掉举,也不让它因为属于懈怠那一方的定而堕入懈怠。所以,念就像盐在所有菜肴里、像全能大臣在一切国王事务中一样,在一切处都是需要的。巴利
Visesato panettha saddhāpaññānaṃ samādhivīriyānañca samataṃ pasaṃsanti. Balavasaddho hi mandapañño mudhappasanno hoti, avatthusmiṃ pasīdati. Balavapañño mandasaddho kerāṭikapakkhaṃ bhajati, bhesajjasamuṭṭhito viya rogo atekiccho hoti. Ubhinnaṃ samatāya vatthusmiṃyeva pasīdati. Balavasamādhiṃ pana mandavīriyaṃ samādhissa kosajjapakkhattā kosajjaṃ abhibhavati, balavavīriyaṃ mandasamādhiṃvīriyassa uddhaccapakkhattā uddhaccaṃ abhibhavati. Samādhi pana vīriyena saṃyojito kosajje patituṃ na labhati, vīriyaṃ samādhinā saṃyojitaṃ uddhacce patituṃ na labhati. Tasmā tadubhayaṃ samaṃ kātabbaṃ. Ubhayasamatāya hi appanā hoti. Apica samādhikammikassa balavatīpi saddhā vaṭṭati. Evañhi saddahanto okappento appanaṃ pāpuṇissati, samādhipaññāsu pana samādhikammikassa ekaggatā balavatī vaṭṭati. Evañhi so appanaṃ pāpuṇāti, vipassanākammikassa paññā balavatī vaṭṭati . Evañhi so lakkhaṇappaṭivedhaṃ pāpuṇāti, ubhinnaṃ pana samatāyapi appanā hotiyeva. Sati pana sabbattha balavatī vaṭṭati. Sati hi cittaṃ uddhaccapakkhikānaṃ saddhāvīriyapaññānaṃ vasena uddhaccapātato kosajjapakkhena ca samādhinā kosajjapātato rakkhati. Tasmā sā loṇadhūpanaṃ viya sabbabyañjanesu, sabbakammikaamacco viya ca sabbarājakiccesu sabbattha icchitabbā.
所谓“相善巧”,就是对地遍等(业处)心一境性的相,在还没生起时懂得怎么让它生起,已经生起时懂得怎么去修习,修习成就之后又懂得怎么守护,这就是这里所说的意思。巴利
Nimittakusalatā nāma pathavīkasiṇādikassa cittekaggatānimittassa akatassa karaṇakosallaṃ, katassa bhāvanākosallaṃ, bhāvanāya laddhassa rakkhaṇakosallañca, taṃ idha adhippetaṃ.
怎样才是“当心应当被抑制的时候,就抑制心”呢?当心因为精进过度等而变得掉举时,这时不去修习择法觉支等三种觉支,而是修习轻安觉支等三种觉支。世尊确实这样说过(相应部5.234)——巴利
Kathaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggaṇhāti? Yadāssa accāraddhavīriyatādīhi uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, tadā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādayo tayo abhāvetvā passaddhisambojjhaṅgādayo bhāveti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā (saṃ. ni. 5.234) –
比丘们,就像有人想扑灭一大堆火,却往里面扔干草、干牛粪、干柴,还用嘴吹风,又不撒土。比丘们,那个人能扑灭那堆大火吗?
不能,尊者。
正是这样,比丘们,当心掉举的时候,就不是修习择法觉支的时机,不是修习精进觉支……不是修习喜觉支的时机。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,因为掉举的心,靠这些法很难平静下来。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetukāmo assa, so tattha sukkhāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyya, sukkhāni ca gomayāni pakkhipeyya, sukkhāni ca kaṭṭhāni pakkhipeyya, mukhavātañca dadeyya, na ca paṃsukena okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so puriso taṃ mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetunti. No hetaṃ, bhante. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yasmiṃ samaye uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, akālo tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Akālo vīriya…pe… akālo pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Uddhataṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, taṃ etehi dhammehi duvūpasamayaṃ hoti.
比丘们,当心处于掉举状态时,那就是修习轻安觉支的时机,是修习定觉支……是修习舍觉支的时机。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,因为掉举的心,靠这些法就容易平息下来。
比丘们,就好比有人想扑灭一大团火,他往里面投湿草、湿牛粪、湿柴,又用水和风来喷,还撒上尘土。比丘们,那个人能扑灭那大团火吗?
是的,尊者。巴利
‘‘Yasmiṃ kho, bhikkhave, samaye uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Kālo samādhi…pe… kālo upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Uddhataṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, taṃ etehi dhammehi suvūpasamayaṃ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetukāmo assa, so tattha allāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyya, allāni ca gomayāni pakkhipeyya, allāni ca kaṭṭhāni pakkhipeyya, udakavātañca dadeyya, paṃsukena ca okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so puriso taṃ mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetunti. Evaṃ, bhante’’ti.
在这里,应当根据各自的食物来理解轻安觉支等的修习。因为世尊这样说过:巴利
Ettha ca yathāsakaṃ āhāravasena passaddhisambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ bhāvanā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,有身轻安和心轻安。在那里,反复如理作意,这就是让尚未生起的轻安觉支得以生起、让已经生起的轻安觉支进一步增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。同样,比丘们,有止相和不散乱相。在那里,反复如理作意,这就是让尚未生起的定觉支得以生起、让已经生起的定觉支进一步增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食……同样,比丘们,有适合舍觉支的法。在那里,反复如理作意,这就是让尚未生起的舍觉支得以生起、让已经生起的舍觉支进一步增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。巴利
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, kāyappassaddhi cittappassaddhi, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya , uppannassa vā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattati. Tathā atthi, bhikkhave, samathanimittaṃ abyagganimittaṃ, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattati…pe… tathā atthi, bhikkhave, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
在这里,他记取自己过去轻安等生起时的那种状态之后,为使它们生起而运转的作意,在三个地方都叫做如理作意。而“止相”也是“止”的别名;从不散乱的意义来说,它也是同一个“不散乱相”。巴利
Tattha yathāssa passaddhiādayo uppannapubbā, taṃ ākāraṃ sallakkhetvā tesaṃ uppādanavasena pavattamanasikārova tīsu padesupi yonisomanasikāro nāma. Samathanimittanti ca samathassevetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, avikkhepaṭṭhena ca tasseva abyagganimittanti.
另外,有七种法能促成轻安觉支的生起:受用精细的食物、受用舒适的气候、受用舒适的姿势、保持中舍的运用、避开身体躁动的人、亲近身体轻安的人、心倾向于它。巴利
Apica satta dhammā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – paṇītabhojanasevanatā, utusukhasevanatā, iriyāpathasukhasevanatā, majjhattappayogatā, sāraddhakāyapuggalaparivajjanatā, passaddhakāyapuggalasevanatā, tadadhimuttatāti.
有十一种法能帮助定觉支生起:依处清净、善巧于相、平衡诸根、适时压制心、适时策励心、以信心和紧迫感来激励没有喜乐的心、对平稳运转的心保持旁观、远离未得定的人、亲近已得定的人、观察禅定与解脱、心倾向于这些。巴利
Ekādasa dhammā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – vatthuvisadatā, nimittakusalatā, indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā, samaye cittassa niggahaṇatā, samaye cittassa paggahaṇatā, nirassādassa cittassa saddhāsaṃvegavasena sampahaṃsanatā, samappavattassa ajjhupekkhanatā, asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanatā, samāhitapuggalasevanatā, jhānavimokkhapaccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatāti.
有五种法能促成舍觉支的生起:对众生的中立、对诸行的中立、避开对众生和诸行执着的人、亲近对众生和诸行保持中立的人、心倾向于它。如此,以这些方式令这些法生起的人,便叫做在修习轻安觉支等。如此,在应当压制心的时候,他就在那时压制心。巴利
Pañca dhammā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – sattamajjhattatā, saṅkhāramajjhattatā, sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanatā, sattasaṅkhāramajjhattapuggalasevanatā, tadadhimuttatāti. Iti imehi ākārehi ete dhamme uppādento passaddhisambojjhaṅgādayo bhāveti nāma. Evaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggaṇhāti.
那么,在什么时候应该策励心,他就在那个时候策励心呢?当他的心因为精进过于松懈等原因而变得消沉时,他就不修习轻安觉支等三支,而修习择法觉支等。这是世尊说过的(《相应部》5.234)——巴利
Kathañca yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggaṇhāti? Yadāssa atisithilavīriyatādīhi cittaṃ līnaṃ hoti, tadā passaddhisambojjhaṅgādayo tayo abhāvetvā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādayo bhāveti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā (saṃ. ni. 5.234) –
比丘们,就像有人想点燃一小堆火,却往里面放湿草……甚至撒上尘土,这个人能点燃那小火吗?不能,尊者。同样,比丘们,当心昏沉时,那时候不是修习轻安觉支的时候,不是修习定觉支的时候……不是修习舍觉支的时候。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,昏沉的心,用这些法很难把它激发起来。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletukāmo assa, so tattha allāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyya…pe… paṃsukena ca okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so puriso taṃ parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletunti. No hetaṃ, bhante. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yasmiṃ samaye līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti. Akālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Akālo samādhi…pe… akālo upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Līnaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, taṃ etehi dhammehi dusamuṭṭhāpayaṃ hoti.
比丘们,当心有消沉迟钝的时候,那时正是修习择法觉支的时候,正是修习精进觉支……中略……正是修习喜觉支的时候。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,消沉迟钝的心,用这些法很容易被激发起来。比丘们,就好比有人想点燃一小堆火,他往里面放干草……中略……又不撒尘土,这个人能点燃那堆小火吗?是的,尊者。巴利
‘‘Yasmiñca kho, bhikkhave, samaye līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo vīriya…pe… kālo pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Līnaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, taṃ etehi dhammehi susamuṭṭhāpayaṃ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletukāmo assa, so tattha sukkhāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyya…pe… na ca paṃsukena okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so puriso taṃ parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletunti. Evaṃ, bhante’’ti.
在这里也一样,应当知道:要按照各自对应的食来修习择法觉支等。因为世尊这样说过(《相应部》5.232)——巴利
Etthāpi yathāsakaṃ āhāravasena dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ bhāvanā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā (saṃ. ni. 5.232) –
比丘们,有善与不善的法,有有罪与无罪的法,有低劣与殊胜的法,有黑与白相对的法。在这些法上反复如理作意,就是让尚未生起的择法觉支生起的食,也是让已经生起的择法觉支增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。同样,比丘们,有发勤界、出离界、勇猛界。在这些法上反复如理作意,就是让尚未生起的精进觉支生起的食,也是让已经生起的精进觉支增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。同样,比丘们,有能作为喜觉支基础的法。在这些法上反复如理作意,就是让尚未生起的喜觉支生起的食,也是让已经生起的喜觉支增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。巴利
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, kusalākusalā dhammā sāvajjānavajjā dhammā hīnappaṇītā dhammā kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattati. Tathā atthi, bhikkhave, ārambhadhātu nikkamadhātu parakkamadhātu, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattati. Tathā atthi, bhikkhave, pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti.
在这里,依靠通达自性和共相而运作的作意,在善等法中叫作如理作意。依靠发勤界等的生起而运作的作意,在发勤界等中叫作如理作意。其中,发勤界指的是最初的精进努力。出离界因为是从懈怠中出离,所以比前者更强。勇猛界因为能一步步迈向更高的境地,所以又比前者更强。至于与喜觉支相应之法,这其实是喜的另一个名称,而能令它生起的作意也叫作如理作意。巴利
Tattha sabhāvasāmaññalakkhaṇappaṭivedhavasena pavattamanasikāro kusalādīsu yonisomanasikāro nāma. Ārambhadhātuādīnaṃ uppādavasena pavattamanasikāro ārambhadhātuādīsu yonisomanasikāro nāma. Tattha ārambhadhātūti paṭhamavīriyaṃ vuccati. Nikkamadhātūti kosajjato nikkhantattā tato balavataraṃ. Parakkamadhātūti paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanato tatopi balavataraṃ. Pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammāti pana pītiyā evetaṃ nāmaṃ, tassāpi uppādakamanasikāro yonisomanasikāro nāma.
另外,有七种法有助于生起择法觉支:喜欢追问、把事物清理干净、平衡诸根、避开没有智慧的人、亲近有智慧的人、反复观察深奥智慧的运作方式,以及内心倾向于这些。巴利
Apica satta dhammā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – paripucchakatā, vatthuvisadakiriyā, indriyasamattapaṭipādanā, duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā, paññavantapuggalasevanā, gambhīrañāṇacariyapaccavekkhaṇā, tadadhimuttatāti.
有十一种法能帮助精进觉支生起:省察堕入恶趣等的恐怖;看到依靠精进才能证得世间和出世间殊胜利益的功德;省察“佛陀、独觉佛和大弟子们走过的道路,我也应当走,而懈怠的人走不了”,这样反复思量所行的道路;通过让施主获得大果报而恭敬地接受托钵食物;省察“我的导师赞叹精进的开始,他的教诫不可违背,而且对我有大利益,只有依教修行才是真正的供养,不是靠别的途径”,这样反复思量导师的伟大;省察“我应当继承被称为正法的伟大遗产,而懈怠的人继承不了”,这样反复思量遗产的伟大;用光明想、作意、变换姿势、住在空旷处等方法来去除昏沉睡眠;远离懈怠的人;亲近已经发起精进的人;省察正勤;以及心倾向于这些。巴利
Ekādasa dhammā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – apāyādibhayapaccavekkhaṇatā, vīriyāyattalokiyalokuttaravisesādhigamānisaṃsadassitā, ‘‘buddhapaccekabuddhamahaāsāvakehi gatamaggo mayā gantabbo, so ca na sakkā kusītena gantu’’nti evaṃ gamanavīthipaccavekkhaṇatā, dāyakānaṃ mahapphalatākaraṇena piṇḍāpacāyanatā, ‘‘vīriyārambhassa vaṇṇavādī me satthā, so ca anatikkamanīyasāsano, amhākañca bahūpakāro, paṭipattiyā ca pūjiyamāno pūjito hoti, na itarathā’’ti evaṃ satthu mahattapaccavekkhaṇatā, ‘‘saddhammasaṅkhātaṃ me mahādāyajjaṃ gahetabbaṃ, tañca na sakkā kusītena gahetu’’nti evaṃ dāyajjamahattapaccavekkhaṇatā, ālokasaññāmanasikārairiyāpathaparivattanaabbhokāsasevanādīhi thinamiddhavinodanatā, kusītapuggalaparivajjanatā, āraddhavīriyapuggalasevanatā, sammappadhānapaccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatāti.
有十一种法能助成喜觉支的生起:佛随念、法随念、僧随念、戒随念、舍随念、天随念、寂止随念,远离粗涩的人,亲近柔和的人,省察能引发净信的经典,以及心倾向于这些。像这样,以这些方式使这些法生起,便称为修习择法觉支等。如此,当心需要策励时,他就策励心。巴利
Ekādasa dhammā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – buddhānussati, dhammasaṅghasīlacāgadevatānussati, upasamānussati, lūkhapuggalaparivajjanatā, siniddhapuggalasevanatā, pasādanīyasuttantapaccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatāti. Iti imehi ākārehi ete dhamme uppādento dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādayo bhāveti nāma. Evaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggaṇhāti.
怎样才是“在心应当被欢喜提振的时候,让心欢喜提振”呢?当他的心因为智慧的作用微弱,或者因为还没有证得寂止之乐,而变得没有滋味时,他就通过省察八种悚惧事来让心悚惧。所谓八种悚惧事,就是生、老、病、死这四种,恶趣之苦是第五种,过去轮回之苦、未来轮回之苦、现在为求食而受苦,合起来就是这八种。接着,他又通过随念佛、法、僧的功德,让心生起净信。这样,就是在心应当被欢喜提振的时候,让心欢喜提振。巴利
Kathaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃsetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃseti? Yadāssa paññāpayogamandatāya vā upasamasukhānadhigamena vā nirassādaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tadā naṃ aṭṭhasaṃvegavatthupaccavekkhaṇena saṃvejeti. Aṭṭha saṃvegavatthūni nāma jātijarābyādhimaraṇāni cattāri, apāyadukkhaṃ pañcamaṃ, atīte vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, anāgate vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, paccuppanne āhārapariyeṭṭhimūlakaṃ dukkhanti. Buddhadhammasaṅghaguṇānussaraṇena cassa pasādaṃ janeti. Evaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃsetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃseti.
心在什么时候应该被舍置,就在那个时候把心舍置呢?当他这样修行时,心不消沉、不掉举、不无味,在所缘上平稳运转,进入了奢摩他的轨道,那时他对策励、抑制和令喜悦这些事都不再费力,就像御者面对平稳行进的马匹一样。就是这样,心在什么时候应该被舍置,就在那个时候把心舍置。巴利
Kathaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati? Yadāssa evaṃ paṭipajjato alīnaṃ anuddhataṃ anirassādaṃ ārammaṇe samappavattaṃ samathavīthippaṭipannaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tadā tassa paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu abyāpāraṃ āpajjati sārathi viya ca samappavattesu assesu. Evaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati.
所谓“远离不具定之人”,就是彻底避开那些从未踏上出离之道、整日忙于各种事务、内心散乱的人。所谓“亲近具定之人”,就是时常亲近那些已经走上出离之道、获得了定的人。所谓“倾向于彼”,就是倾向于定,意思是尊重定、以定为重、心向于定、心倾向于定、心偏向于定。这样,就应当完成这十种安止善巧。因此说:“不舍弃这十种安止善巧的人”。其中,以那种方式使人在安止上善巧,那十种方式即是安止善巧,或者由它产生的智也是安止善巧。如此完成这十种安止善巧的人,对于已经获得的相,安止就会生起。这正是所说的——巴利
Asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanā nāma nekkhammapaṭipadaṃ anāruḷhapubbānaṃ anekakiccappasutānaṃ vikkhittahadayānaṃ puggalānaṃ ārakā pariccāgo. Samāhitapuggalasevanā nāma nekkhammapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannānaṃ samādhilābhīnaṃ puggalānaṃ kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamanaṃ. Tadadhimuttatā nāma samādhimuttatā, samādhigarusamādhininnasamādhipoṇasamādhipabbhāratāti attho. Evametaṃ dasavidhaṃ appanākosallaṃ sampādetabbaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘imāni dasa appanākosallāni avijahantenā’’ti. Tattha yena vidhinā appanāya kusalo hoti, so dasavidhopi vidhi appanākosallaṃ tannibbattaṃ vā ñāṇaṃ, evametaṃ dasavidhaṃ appanākosallaṃ sampādentassa paṭiladdhanimittasmiṃ appanā uppajjati. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“ 如是成就者,即得此安止善巧;
所缘相既已获得,安止便运转起来。”巴利
‘‘Evañhi sampādayato, appanākosallaṃ imaṃ; Paṭiladdhe nimittasmiṃ, appanā sampavattatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.67);
“应当努力”:就算已经成就了安止善巧的人,如果安止还是没有生起,那也不该放弃对业处的修习。应当去观察蜜蜂等在花粉等处的活动方式,把心从昏沉和掉举中解脱出来,以均衡的精进一再用功。因为说过:巴利
Yogo karaṇīyoti appanākosallaṃ sampādentassapi yadi appanā na hoti, tena kammaṭṭhānānuyogaṃ avijahitvā reṇuādīsu madhukarādīnaṃ pavatti ākāraṃ sallakkhetvā līnuddhatabhāvehi mānasaṃ mocetvā vīriyasamataṃ yojentena punappunaṃ yogo kātabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ –
对于这样修行的人,如果它(安止)没有生起;
即使这样,智者也不该放弃修行,仍应努力精进。
因此,智者应当好好观察心的运作方式。
应当一再地让精进保持平衡。
即使稍微有点松懈,也要把心提起来。
制止了过度紧绷之后,应当让它平稳地运行。
在花粉上、在莲瓣上,在线中、在船上、在管茎中;
蜜蜂等众的活动,已被如实善说。
“ 把心从昏沉和掉举的状态中彻底解脱出来;
让心这样朝向那个相。”巴利
‘‘Evañhi paṭipannassa, sace sā nappavattati; Tathāpi na jahe yogaṃ, vāyametheva paṇḍito. ‘‘Hitvā hi sammavāyāmaṃ, visesaṃ nāma māṇavo; Adhigacche parittampi, ṭhānametaṃ na vijjati. ‘‘Cittappavattiākāraṃ, tasmā sallakkhayaṃ budho; Samataṃ vīriyasseva, yojayetha punappunaṃ. ‘‘Īsakampi layaṃ yantaṃ, paggaṇhetheva mānasaṃ; Accāraddhaṃ nisedhetvā, samameva pavattaye. ‘‘Reṇumhi uppaladale, sutte nāvāya nāḷiyā; Yathā madhukarādīnaṃ, pavatti sammavaṇṇitā. ‘‘Līnauddhatabhāvehi, mocayitvāna sabbaso; Evaṃ nimittābhimukhaṃ, mānasaṃ paṭipādaye’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.67);
就像有个不熟练的采蜜人,知道某棵树开花了,就猛冲过去,结果冲过了头,再折回来时,花粉已经没了;另一个不熟练的人慢慢飞过去,到的时候花粉也早就没了;而熟练的人用不快不慢的速度飞过去,轻松到达花丛,想取多少花粉就取多少,酿成蜂蜜,享受蜂蜜。又像刀师的弟子们在水中的莲叶上练习刀法时,一个不熟练的人急速下刀,要么把莲叶切成两半,要么把刀压进水里;另一个不熟练的人因为怕切坏或压沉,连用刀碰一下都不敢;而熟练的人用均匀的力道,在那里示范刀法,技艺纯熟之后,在类似场合做手术,得到报酬。又像国王说“谁能拿来四肘长的蜘蛛丝,就能得到四千钱”,一个不熟练的人用力拉扯蜘蛛丝,到处都拉断了;另一个不熟练的人因为怕拉断,连用手碰一下都不敢;而熟练的人从末端开始,均匀用力缠在小棍上取来,得到报酬。又像不熟练的舵手在强风中张满帆,把船冲向他方;另一个不熟练的人在风还小时就降下帆,让船停在那里;而熟练的人在风小时张帆,风大时收半帆,平安到达想去的地方。又像老师对弟子们说“谁能不洒掉油地把量筒装满,就能得到报酬”,一个不熟练的人贪图报酬,急速倒油,结果把油洒了;另一个不熟练的人因为怕洒油,连倒都不敢倒;而熟练的人用均匀的力道装满,得到报酬。同样,一个比丘在相出现时想“我要赶快达到安止”,就过度用力精进,因为精进过度,心就掉举散乱,他无法达到安止。另一个比丘看到过度精进的过患,就想“现在我还需要什么安止呢”,于是放松了精进,因为精进太松,心就陷入懈怠,他也无法达到安止。而如果有人能把稍微低沉的心从低沉中拉出来,把散乱的心从掉举中拉出来,用均匀的力道让心朝向相,他就能达到安止。应当成为这样的人。巴利
Yathā hi acheko madhukaro ‘‘asukasmiṃ rukkhe pupphaṃ pupphita’’nti ñatvā tikkhena vegena pakkhando taṃ atikkamitvā paṭinivattento khīṇe reṇumhi sampāpuṇāti, aparo acheko mandena javena pakkhando khīṇeyeva sampāpuṇāti, cheko pana samena javena pakkhando sukhena puppharāsiṃ sampatvā yāvadicchakaṃ reṇuṃ ādāya madhuṃ sampādetvā madhuṃ anubhavati, yathā ca sallakattaantevāsikesu udakathālagate uppalapatte satthakammaṃ sikkhantesu eko acheko vegena satthaṃ pātento uppalapattaṃ dvidhā vā chindati, udake vā paveseti, aparo acheko chijjanapavesanabhayā satthakena phusitumpi na visahati, cheko pana samena payogena tattha satthapadaṃ dassetvā pariyodātasippo hutvā tathārūpesu ṭhānesu kammaṃ katvā lābhaṃ labhati, yathā ca ‘‘yo catubyāmappamāṇaṃ makkaṭakasuttaṃ āharati, so cattāri sahassāni labhatī’’ti raññā vutte eko achekapuriso vegena makkaṭakasuttaṃ ākaḍḍhanto tahiṃ tahiṃ chindatiyeva, aparo acheko chedanabhayā hatthena phusitumpi na visahati, cheko pana koṭito paṭṭhāya samena payogena daṇḍake veṭhetvā āharitvā lābhaṃ labhati, yathā ca acheko niyāmako balavavāte laṅkāraṃ pūrento nāvaṃ videsaṃ pakkhandāpeti, aparo acheko mandavāte laṅkāraṃ oropento nāvaṃ tattheva ṭhapeti, cheko pana mandavāte pūretvā balavavāte aḍḍhalaṅkāraṃ katvā sotthinā icchitaṭṭhānaṃ pāpuṇāti, yathā ca ‘‘yo telena achaḍḍento nāḷiṃ pūreti, so lābhaṃ labhatī’’ti ācariyena antevāsikānaṃ vutte eko acheko lābhaluddho vegena pūrento telaṃ chaḍḍeti, aparo acheko telachaḍḍanabhayā āsiñcitumpi na visahati, cheko pana samena payogena pūretvā lābhaṃ labhati, evameva eko bhikkhu uppanne nimitte ‘‘sīghameva appanaṃ pāpuṇissāmī’’ti gāḷhaṃ vīriyaṃ karoti, tassa cittaṃ accāraddhavīriyattā uddhacce patati, so na sakkoti appanaṃ pāpuṇituṃ. Eko accāraddhavīriyatāya dosaṃ disvā ‘‘kiṃ dāni me appanāyā’’ti vīriyaṃ hāpeti, tassa cittaṃ atilīnavīriyattā kosajje patati, sopi na sakkoti appanaṃ pāpuṇituṃ. Yo pana īsakampi līnaṃ līnabhāvato, uddhataṃ uddhaccato mocetvā samena payogena nimittābhimukhaṃ pavatteti, so appanaṃ pāpuṇāti, tādisena bhavitabbaṃ.
现在,为了说明这样修行的人安止定的生起,说了“当他如此精勤时”等话。其中,“初遍作”等,是就还没有把握禅相的情况说的;如果已经把握了禅相,则不加区分,对一切(禅相)都用同一个名称。因为所有这些心对于安止定来说都是遍作、都是准备,所以也叫“遍作”。就像村落等附近的区域被称为“村近处”“家近处”一样,同样,因为它们邻近安止定、行于其近处,所以也叫“近行”。又因为它们随顺之前的遍作和之后的安止定,所以也叫“随顺”。其中最后一个,因为能镇伏狭小种姓、修习广大种姓,所以叫“种姓”。所谓“种姓”,意思是“它保护”。所谓“狭小”,是指正在生起的、以确定单一所缘为对象的欲界言说和智慧,因为那个所缘保护它们,所以叫狭小种姓。正如智慧没有作为所缘的义就不能生起,言说没有所称的义也不能生起,所以那个(所缘)保护它们,因此说“它保护”。这个狭小种姓应当看作欲贪的境域,是欲界诸法特有的形态,与广大、无上相背离。对于广大种姓,也应按同样的方式理解其含义。如此,因为能镇伏这样的狭小种姓,又能修习、生起广大种姓,所以最后一个叫“种姓”。第四或第五,是就快速证通者和迟缓证通者来说的。快速证通者在第四(速行)生起安止,迟缓证通者在第五(速行)生起安止。为什么在第四或第五生起安止,而不是在第六或第七呢?回答说:“因为邻近有分(心)的坠落。”就像一个人朝着悬崖奔跑,即使想停下来,把脚放在边缘上也停不住,还是会掉下悬崖;同样,因为邻近有分,不能在第六或第七生起安止。因此应当知道,安止只在第四和第五(速行)中生起。巴利
Idāni evaṃ paṭipannassa appanāpavattiṃ dassento ‘‘tassevaṃ anuyuttassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha paṭhamaṃ parikammantiādi aggahitaggahaṇena vuttaṃ, gahitaggahaṇena pana avisesena sabbesaṃ sabbā samaññā. Sabbānipi hi appanāya parikammattā paṭisaṅkhārakattā ‘‘parikammānī’’tipi, yathā gāmādīnaṃ āsannappadeso ‘‘gāmūpacāro gharūpacāro’’ti vuccati, evaṃ appanāya āsannattā samīpacārittā vā ‘‘upacārānī’’tipi, ito pubbe parikammānaṃ upari appanāya ca anulomanato ‘‘anulomānī’’tipi vuccanti. Yañcettha sabbantimaṃ, taṃ parittagottābhibhavanato mahaggatagottabhāvanato ca ‘‘gotrabhū’’tipi vuccati. Gaṃ tāyatīti hi gottaṃ, parittanti pavattamānaṃ abhidhānaṃ buddhiñca ekaṃsikavisayatāya rakkhatīti parittagottaṃ. Yathā hi buddhi ārammaṇabhūtena atthena vinā na vattati, evaṃ abhidhānaṃ abhidheyyabhūtena, tasmā so tāni tāyati rakkhatīti vuccati. Taṃ pana mahaggatānuttaravidhuraṃ kāmataṇhāya gocarabhūtaṃ kāmāvacaradhammānaṃ āveṇikarūpaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mahaggatagottepi iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Iti evarūpassa parittagottassa abhibhavanato mahaggatagottassa ca bhāvanato uppādanato antimaṃ ‘‘gotrabhū’’tipi vuccati. Catutthameva hi pañcamaṃ vāti khippābhiññadandhābhiññānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Khippābhiññassa hi catutthaṃ appeti, dandhābhiññassa pañcamaṃ. Kasmā pana catutthaṃ pañcamaṃ vā appeti, na chaṭṭhaṃ vā sattamaṃ vāti āha ‘‘āsannabhavaṅgapātattā’’ti. Yathā hi puriso chinnapapātābhimukho dhāvanto ṭhātukāmopi pariyante pādaṃ katvā ṭhātuṃ na sakkoti, papāte eva patati, evaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ vā sattamaṃ vā appetuṃ na sakkoti bhavaṅgassa āsannattā. Tasmā catutthapañcamesuyeva appanā hotīti veditabbā.
由于《发趣论》中说“前前的善法,以习行缘为缘,成为后后的善法的缘”,所以他说“以习行缘,善法变得有力”。正如未获得习行的第一个速行,因力量薄弱,不能生起种姓心;而获得习行的(速行),因有力,能生起作为第二个或第三个的种姓心;同样,因获得习行而有力,第六和第七(速行)也能安止——这是长老的意趣。因此他说:“所以第六或第七(速行)安止。”那句是长老的话。“被驳斥”是指:因为不被经、随顺经以及阿阇梨的论说所支持,所以说了“这只是长老自己的见解”而加以驳斥。然而“前前的善法”这句经文,并不能决定性地证明习行缘所得的力量。为什么呢?因为即使未获得习行的第一个思,也能成为现法受;而获得习行的第二个思乃至第六个思,则成为次第受。如果第六和第七因速行力尽而变弱,不是以习行缘而有力,那么第七速行的思怎么能成为生报受和无间受呢?这个差别不是由获得习行缘而有力造成的,而是仅仅因为作用阶段的不同。作用阶段有初、中、后三种。其中,后阶段因为有决意的思,所以成为生报受等,并不是因为有力,应该这样理解。他们又说:“因为对结生作为无间缘状态的异熟相续,以无间缘的力量被如此造作。”所以,第六和第七速行因趋向坠落而速行力尽,无法阻止。前分心就是三或四个心。巴利
‘‘Purimā purimā kusalā dhammā pacchimānaṃ pacchimānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ āsevanapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.12) vuttattā ‘‘āsevanapaccayena kusalā dhammā balavanto hontī’’ti āha. Yathā aladdhāsevanaṃ paṭhamaṃ javanaṃ dubbalattā gotrabhuṃ na uppādeti, laddhāsevanaṃ pana balavabhāvato dutiyaṃ vā tatiyaṃ vā gotrabhuṃ uppādeti, evaṃ laddhāsevanatāya balavabhāvato chaṭṭhampi sattamampi appetīti therassa adhippāyo. Tenāha – ‘‘tasmā chaṭṭhaṃ sattamaṃ vā appetī’’ti. Tanti therassa vacanaṃ. Paṭikkhittanti suttasuttānulomaācariyavādehi anupatthambhitattā ‘‘attanomatimattaṃ therasseta’’nti vatvā paṭikkhittaṃ. ‘‘Purimā purimā kusalā dhammā’’ti pana suttapadamakāraṇaṃ āsevanapaccayalābhassa balavabhāve anekantikattā. Tathā hi aladdhāsevanāpi paṭhamacetanā diṭṭhadhammavedanīyā hoti, laddhāsevanā dutiyacetanā yāva chaṭṭhacetanā aparāpariyavedanīyā. Yadi chaṭṭhaṃ sattamañca parikkhīṇajavattā dubbalaṃ, na āsevanapaccayena balavaṃ, kathaṃ sattamajavanacetanā upapajjavedanīyā ānantariyā ca hotīti? Nāyaṃ viseso āsevanapaccayalābhena balavappattiyā kiñcarahi kiriyāvatthāvisesato. Kiriyāvatthā hi ādimajjhapariyosānavasena tividhā. Tattha pariyosānāvatthāya sanniṭṭhāpakacetanābhāvena upapajjavedanīyāditā hoti, na balavabhāvenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Paṭisandhiyā anantarapaccayabhāvino vipākasantānassa anantarapaccayabhāvena tathā abhisaṅkhatattā’’ti ca vadanti, tasmā chaṭṭhasattamānaṃ papātābhimukhatāya parikkhīṇajavatā na sakkā nivāretuṃ. Pubbabhāgacittānīti tīṇi cattāri vā cittāni.
这里说的“在此”是指在身随观念处中。“想要获得清净”是指想要证得、想要入定。其中,应当这样搭配理解:以观察和离转的方式想要证得,以观察的方式想要入定。关于“转向、入定……乃至……达到自在”,在这里首先应当知道五种自在是这样的:从初禅出定后,当转向第一个寻时,有分心被截断,转向心生起之后,紧接着生起以寻为所缘的四或五个速行心,然后是两个有分心,之后是以伺为所缘的转向心,按照前面说的方式生起速行心。像这样,当能在五禅支中不间断地推动心时,他的转向自在就成就了。而这种中间隔着两个有分心、达到顶点的自在,在世尊的双神变中可以得到,或者在法将舍利弗等人身上,当他们像那样一次次出定、更快速地生起转向自在时也可以得到。不过那种自在是短暂的、时间很短的,不像导师在双神变中那样能持续较长时间。正因如此,那被说成是声闻弟子所不共的。从此以后,再没有比这更快的转向自在了。巴利
Etthāti etissaṃ kāyānupassanāyaṃ. Pārisuddhiṃ pattukāmoti adhigantukāmo samāpajjitukāmo ca. Tattha sallakkhaṇāvivaṭṭanāvasena adhigantukāmo, sallakkhaṇavasena samāpajjitukāmoti yojetabbaṃ. Āvajjanasamāpajjana…pe… vasippattanti ettha evaṃ tāva pañca vasiyo veditabbā – paṭhamajjhānato vuṭṭhāya paṭhamaṃ vitakkaṃ āvajjayato bhavaṅgaṃ upacchinditvā uppannāvajjanānantaraṃ vitakkārammaṇāneva cattāri pañca javanāni javanti, tato dve bhavaṅgāni, tato pana vicārārammaṇaṃ āvajjanaṃ vuttanayeneva javanānīti evaṃ pañcasu jhānaṅgesu yadā nirantaraṃ cittaṃ pesetuṃ sakkoti, athassa āvajjanavasī siddhā hoti. Ayaṃ pana bhavaṅgadvayantaritā matthakappattā vasī bhagavato yamakapāṭihāriye labbhati, aññesaṃ vā dhammasenāpatiādīnaṃ evarūpe uṭṭhāya samuṭṭhāya lahutaraṃ āvajjanavasīnibbattanakāle. Sā ca kho ittarā parittakālā, na satthu yamakapāṭihāriye viya ciratarappabandhavatī. Tathā hi taṃ sāvakehi asādhāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Ito paraṃ sīghatarā āvajjanavasī nāma natthi.
这就叫入定自在——就像尊者大目犍连调伏难陀乌巴难达龙王时那样,能迅速入定。这里说的是:起了入定之念后,在两个有分心生起的当下就截断有分,紧接着转向心生起,随即入定;这种能迅速入定的能力,就是入定自在。而这种达到顶峰的入定自在,出现在导师说法的时候。针对这一点才说:“阿吉韦萨那,我就在那番话结束的时候,就在先前那个定相上,让心向内安住、平静下来、收摄为一、专注入定,从此我就一直这样安住。”(《中部》1.387)因为比这更迅速的入定自在,确实不存在。巴利
Āyasmato pana mahāmoggallānassa nandopanandanāgarājadamane viya sīghaṃ samāpajjanasamatthatā samāpajjanavasī nāma. Ettha ca samāpajjitukāmatānantaraṃ dvīsu bhavaṅgesu uppannesu bhavaṅgaṃ upacchinditvā uppannāvajjanānantaraṃ samāpajjanaṃ sīghaṃ samāpajjanasamatthatā. Ayañca matthakappattā samāpajjanavasī satthu dhammadesanāyaṃ labbhati, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘so kho ahaṃ, aggivessana, tassāyeva kathāya pariyosāne tasmiṃyeva purimasmiṃ samādhinimitte ajjhattameva cittaṃ saṇṭhapemi sannisādemi ekodiṃ karomi samādahāmi, yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.387). Ito sīghatarā hi samāpajjanavasī nāma natthi.
能够把禅那维持仅仅一弹指或十弹指那么短的时间,这种能力就叫决意自在。同样地,成为具备禅那的人之后,能够在仅仅一弹指或十弹指这么短的时间里从禅那中出来,这种能力就叫出定自在。这里,有分心的生起就是从禅那中出来。在这里应当这样理解:就像通过事先的准备,能够决意“我只让禅那停留这么短的时间”,这是决意自在;同样地,通过事先的准备,能够做到“我成为具备禅那的人,只经过这么短的时间就从禅那中出来”,这是出定自在,这也被称为等至出定的善巧。而观察自在,已经在转向自在中说过了。因为在那里的观察速行心,就紧跟在转向心之后。从成就转向自在的那一刻起,就应当知道观察自在也已经成就了。巴利
Accharāmattaṃ vā dasaccharāmattaṃ vā khaṇaṃ jhānaṃ ṭhapetuṃ samatthatā adhiṭṭhānavasī nāma. Tatheva accharāmattaṃ vā dasaccharāmattaṃ vā lahukaṃ khaṇaṃ jhānasamaṅgī hutvā jhānato vuṭṭhātuṃ samatthatā vuṭṭhānavasī nāma. Bhavaṅgacittappavattiyeva hettha jhānato vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Ettha ca yathā ‘‘ettakameva khaṇaṃ jhānaṃ ṭhapessāmī’’ti pubbaparikammavasena adhiṭṭhānasamatthatā adhiṭṭhānavasī, evaṃ ‘‘ettakameva khaṇaṃ jhānasamaṅgī hutvā jhānato vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti pubbaparikammavasena vuṭṭhānasamatthatā vuṭṭhānavasīti veditabbā, yā samāpattivuṭṭhānakusalatāti vuccati. Paccavekkhaṇavasī pana āvajjanavasiyā eva vuttā. Paccavekkhaṇajavanāneva hi tattha āvajjanānantarāni. Yadaggena hi āvajjanavasīsiddhi, tadaggena paccavekkhaṇavasīsiddhi veditabbā.
“以无色为前行……修习观”,这是为了把略说过的含义详细展示出来,才说了“如何”等话。其中,“把握了禅支”是指:以自相、作用等方式,把握寻等禅支以及与它们相应的法。因为“禅支”这里只是举例,而观察禅支的人,也会观察到与禅支相应的法。“它们的依止是心所依处”:就像有人在内室里看见蛇,一路追踪,就看到了它的住处;同样,这位瑜伽行者审察那些无色法时,探寻“这些法依止什么而生起”,就见到了它们的依止——心所依处。在这里,“禅支是无色”这句话,应当知道也包含了与禅支相应的法。巴利
Arūpapubbaṅgamaṃ vā…pe… vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetīti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha jhānaṅgāni pariggahetvāti vitakkādīni jhānaṅgāni taṃsampayutte ca dhamme salakkhaṇarasādivasena pariggahetvā. ‘‘Jhānaṅgānī’’ti hi idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ, jhānaṅgāni pana passanto taṃsampayutte ca dhamme passati. Tesaṃ nissayaṃ hadayavatthunti yathā nāma puriso antogehe sappaṃ disvā anubandhamāno tassa āsayaṃ passati, evameva kho ayampi yogāvacaro te arūpadhamme upaparikkhanto ‘‘ime dhammā kiṃ nissāya pavattantī’’ti pariyesamāno tesaṃ nissayaṃ hadayavatthuṃ passati. Jhānaṅgāni arūpanti ettha taṃsampayuttadhammānampi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
先说明了以无色为前导来把握色,现在要说明以色为前导来把握无色,所以说“或者”等话。在头发等各个部分中……以及把握了依止于它的色之后,这里首先在头发中,应把握坚硬的特相为地界,就在那里,粘结的特相为水界,成熟的特相为火界,支持的特相为风界。这样,在一切部分中,每一个部分都应把握四大的四界。当诸界依照真实的自相显现时,在业生的当中,首先在头发中,具有所说特相的那四界,以及依止于它的色、香、味、食素、命根、身净色,这样按身十法有十种色;就在那里,由于有性根的存在,按性十法有十种色;食生的是食素第八,时节生和心生的是另外二十四色。这样,在四种生起的二十四个部分中,应把握四十四种色。至于汗、泪、唾、涕这四种,在四种时节生和心生的两个食素第八中,各有十六种色。在胃中物、粪、脓、尿这四种中,只按时节生的食素第八,应把握八种色。这是三十二身分方面的法则。巴利
Arūpapubbaṅgamaṃ rūpapariggahaṃ dassetvā idāni rūpapubbaṅgamaṃ arūpapariggahaṃ dassento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Kesādīsu koṭṭhāsesu…pe… taṃnissitarūpāni ca pariggahetvāti ettha pana kese tāva thaddhalakkhaṇaṃ pathavīdhātūti pariggahetabbaṃ, tattheva ābandhanalakkhaṇaṃ āpodhātūti, paripācanalakkhaṇaṃ tejodhātūti, vitthambhanalakkhaṇaṃ vāyodhātūti evaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsesu ekekasmiṃ koṭṭhāse cattāri cattāri mahābhūtāni pariggahetabbāni. Athānena yāthāvato sarasalakkhaṇato āvibhūtāsu dhātūsu kammasamuṭṭhānamhi tāva kese vuttalakkhaṇā tā catasso ca dhātuyo taṃnissito ca vaṇṇo gandho raso ojā jīvitaṃ kāyapasādoti evaṃ kāyadasakavasena dasa rūpāni, tattheva bhāvassa atthitāya bhāvadasakavasena dasa rūpāni, āhārasamuṭṭhānaṃ ojaṭṭhamakaṃ, utusamuṭṭhānaṃ cittasamuṭṭhānanti aparānipi catuvīsatīti evaṃ catusamuṭṭhānesu catuvīsatikoṭṭhāsesu catucattālīsa rūpāni pariggahetabbāni. Sedo assu kheḷo siṅghāṇikāti ime pana catūsu utucittasamuṭṭhānesu dvinnaṃ ojaṭṭhamakānaṃ vasena soḷasa soḷasa rūpāni. Udariyaṃ karīsaṃ pubbaṃ muttanti imesu catūsu utusamuṭṭhānesu utusamuṭṭhānasseva ojaṭṭhamakassa vasena aṭṭha aṭṭha rūpāni pariggahetabbāni. Esa tāva dvattiṃsākāre nayo.
当这三十二身分变得清楚之后,还会显现另外十个相,也就是四个火的部分和六个风的部分。其中,在消化已食等物的火这部分里,先说业生的火,有食素第八和命根,一共九种色法;同样,在心生的入出息这部分里,有食素第八和声音,一共九种;在其余八种由四种原因生起的部分里,有命根九法和三个食素第八,每一组都应把握三十三种色法。这样详细地,以四十二相,在这些已经变得明显的四大种和所造色中,再依处与门来把握,还有眼十法等等,以及心处十法,一共应把握六十种色法。如果他用各种方法把握了色法之后,再去把握无色法时,因为无色法太微细而无法显现,他也不应放弃努力,而应一次又一次地思惟、作意、把握、确定色法。因为,他的色法越是彻底洗净、没有缠结、极为清净,以它为所缘的无色法就会自己显现出来。巴利
Ye pana imasmiṃ dvattiṃsākāre āvibhūte apare cattāro tejokoṭṭhāsā, cha vāyokoṭṭhāsāti dasa ākārā āvi bhavanti, tattha asitādiparipācake tāva kammajatejokoṭṭhāsamhi ojaṭṭhamakañceva jīvitañcāti nava rūpāni, tathā cittaje assāsapassāsakoṭṭhāse ojaṭṭhamakañceva saddo cāti nava, sesesu catusamuṭṭhānesu aṭṭhasu jīvitanavakañceva tīṇi ca ojaṭṭhamakānīti tettiṃsa tettiṃsa rūpāni pariggahetabbāni. Evaṃ vitthārato dvācattālīsākāravasena imesu bhūtupādāyarūpesu pākaṭesu jātesu vatthudvāravasena pañca cakkhudasakādayo hadayavatthudasakañcāti aparānipi saṭṭhi rūpāni pariggahetabbāni. Sace panassa tena tena mukhena rūpaṃ pariggahetvā arūpaṃ pariggaṇhato sukhumattā arūpaṃ na upaṭṭhāti, tena dhuranikkhepaṃ akatvā rūpameva punappunaṃ sammasitabbaṃ manasi kātabbaṃ pariggahetabbaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ. Yathā yathā hissa rūpaṃ suvikkhālitaṃ hoti nijjaṭaṃ suparisuddhaṃ, tathā tathā tadārammaṇā arūpadhammā sayameva pākaṭā honti.
就像有眼睛的人对着不干净的镜子看自己的脸,影像显现不出来,他不会因此把镜子扔掉,而是一次又一次地擦拭它;等镜子干净了,影像自然就清清楚楚地显现出来。同样,那位比丘不要放弃努力,而应该一次又一次地反复观察色、作意于色、把握色、确定色。因为,他的色越是经过彻底清洗、没有杂乱、极为清净,那些以色为所缘的无色法就越会自然清楚地显现出来。对于这样把色把握得极为清净的人,无色法会以三种方式显现:或者以触的方式,或者以受的方式,或者以识的方式。巴利
Yathā hi cakkhumato purisassa aparisuddhe ādāse mukhanimittaṃ olokentassa nimittaṃ na paññāyatīti na ādāsaṃ chaḍḍeti, atha kho naṃ punappunaṃ parimajjati, tassa parisuddhe ādāse nimittaṃ sayameva pākaṭaṃ hoti, evameva tena bhikkhunā dhuranikkhepaṃ akatvā rūpameva punappunaṃ sammasitabbaṃ manasi kātabbaṃ pariggahetabbaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ. Yathā yathā hissa rūpaṃ suvikkhālitaṃ hoti nijjaṭaṃ suparisuddhaṃ, tathā tathā tadārammaṇā arūpadhammā sayameva pākaṭā honti. Evaṃ suvisuddharūpapariggahassa panassa arūpadhammā tīhākārehi upaṭṭhahanti phassavasena vā vedanāvasena vā viññāṇavasena vā.
怎么个显现法呢?比如,有人按照“头发里的地界是坚硬的性质……直到入出息里的地界是坚硬的性质”这样的方式,逐一去辨识诸界。对他来说,最先接触到的就是触;与触相应的受,是受蕴;想,是想蕴;与触一起的思,是行蕴;心,是识蕴——就这样显现出来。也就是说,无色法是以触为主导而显现的。
另一个人,同样按照“头发里的地界是坚硬的性质……直到入出息里的地界是坚硬的性质”去辨识,但他是以体验所缘之味的受为主:那个受是受蕴;与它相应的想,是想蕴;与它相应的触和思,是行蕴;与它相应的心,是识蕴——就这样显现出来。也就是说,无色法是以受为主导而显现的。
还有一个人,也是按照“头发里的地界是坚硬的性质……直到入出息里的地界是坚硬的性质”去辨识,但他是以了知所缘的识为主:那个识是识蕴;与它相应的受,是受蕴;想,是想蕴;触和思,是行蕴——就这样显现出来。也就是说,无色法是以识为主导而显现的。
用同样的方法,对于按照“在业所生的头发中,地界是坚硬的性质”等等方式,在四十二个界的部分中,以每组四界来辨识,并且在其余的处——眼等十法聚中——依照处门去把握“意界和意识界的依止相是心处,能承受色撞击的净色相是眼”等等的人来说,同样以最先接触到的触为触,与它相应的受为受蕴……如此等等,无色法就以触、受、识这三种方式显现出来。
因此说:“他看见与所把握的色为所缘的、或者以所把握的色为处门和所缘的、具有相应法的识。”巴利
Kathaṃ ? Ekassa tāva ‘‘kese pathavīdhātu kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā…pe… assāsapassāse pathavīdhātu kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā’’tiādinā nayena dhātuyo pariggaṇhantassa paṭhamābhinipāto phasso, taṃsampayuttā vedanā vedanākkhandho, saññā saññākkhandho, saddhiṃ phassena cetanā saṅkhārakkhandho, cittaṃ viññāṇakkhandhoti upaṭṭhāti. Evaṃ arūpadhammā phassavasena upaṭṭhahanti. Ekassa ‘‘kese pathavīdhātu kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā…pe… assāsapassāse pathavīdhātu kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā’’ti tadārammaṇarasānubhavanakavedanā vedanākkhandho, taṃsampayuttā saññā saññākkhandho, taṃsampayutto phasso ca cetanā ca saṅkhārakkhandho, taṃsampayuttaṃ cittaṃ viññāṇakkhandhoti upaṭṭhāti. Evaṃ vedanāvasena arūpadhammā upaṭṭhahanti. Aparassa ‘‘kese pathavīdhātu kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā…pe… assāsapassāse pathavīdhātu kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā’’ti ārammaṇapaṭivijānanaṃ viññāṇakkhandho, taṃsampayuttā vedanā vedanākkhandho, saññā saññākkhandho, phasso ca cetanā ca saṅkhārakkhandhoti upaṭṭhāti. Evaṃ viññāṇavasena arūpadhammā upaṭṭhahanti. Etenevupāyena ‘‘kammasamuṭṭhāne kese pathavīdhātu kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā’’tiādinā nayena dvācattālīsāya dhātukoṭṭhāsesu catunnaṃ catunnaṃ dhātūnaṃ vasena sesesupi vatthu cakkhādīsu dasakesu manodhātumanoviññāṇadhātūnaṃ nissayalakkhaṇaṃ hadayavatthu rūpābhighātārahabhūtappasādalakkhaṇaṃ cakkhūtiādinā vatthudvāravasena pariggaṇhantassa paṭhamābhinipāto phasso, taṃsampayuttā vedanā vedanākkhandhotiādinā phassādivasena tīhi ākārehi arūpadhammā upaṭṭhahanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yathāpariggahitarūpārammaṇaṃ yathāpariggahitarūpavatthudvārārammaṇaṃ vā sasampayuttadhammaṃ viññāṇañca passatī’’ti.
现在,为了用另一种方式说明以色法为先行而把握无色法,所以说了“或者”等话。其中,“正如”等部分,是在说明身体和心是入出息生起之因的状态。“铁匠的鼓风囊”,就是铁匠用来把火吹旺的皮囊。“正在鼓动时”,就是正在冒烟时,意思是正在鼓出风的时候。“与那相应的”,就是与那相随顺的。这里应当这样理解:身体好比铁匠的鼓风囊,心好比鼓风的努力。虽然入出息是心所生的,但离开身体它们就无法运作,所以说“依于身体和心而有入出息”。巴利
Idāni aññathāpi rūpapubbaṅgamaṃ arūpapariggahaṃ dassento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yathā hītiādi kāyassa cittassa ca assāsapassāsānaṃ samudayabhāvadassanaṃ. Kammāragaggarīti kammārānaṃ ukkāya aggidhamanabhastā. Dhamamānāyāti dhūmāyantiyā, vātaṃ gāhāpentiyāti attho. Tajjanti tadanurūpaṃ. Evamevanti ettha kammāragaggarī viya karajakāyo, vāyāmo viya cittaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kiñcāpi assāsapassāsā cittasamuṭṭhānā, karajakāyaṃ pana vinā tesaṃ appavattanato ‘‘kāyañca cittañca paṭicca assāsapassāsā’’ti vuttaṃ.
对于这个名色,要探求它的缘。所谓探求缘,就是依照“无明生起则色生起”等说法,去寻求、观察、把握以无明为首的各种缘。所谓超越疑惑,就是超越、舍断“我过去世是否存在”等十六种事相上生起的疑惑。所谓“任何色,无论过去、未来、现在”等说法,是对诸蕴作聚团观照。所谓前分,是指在属于行道智见清净的生灭随观智之前分生起的。所谓光明等,就是光明、智、喜、轻安、乐、胜解、策励、舍、现起、欲这十种光明等。巴利
Tassāti nāmarūpassa. Paccayaṃ pariyesatīti ‘‘avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo’’tiādinā avijjādikaṃ paccayaṃ pariyesati vīmaṃsati pariggaṇhāti. Kaṅkhaṃ vitaratīti ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhāna’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ soḷasavatthukaṃ vicikicchaṃ atikkamati pajahati. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñci rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppanna’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ kalāpasammasanaṃ. Pubbabhāgeti paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhipariyāpannāya udayabbayānupassanāya pubbabhāge uppanne. Obhāsādayoti obhāso ñāṇaṃ pīti passaddhi sukhaṃ adhimokkho paggaho upekkhā upaṭṭhānaṃ nikantīti ime obhāsādayo dasa.
在这里,“光明”是指观智发出的光。这种光明是由观智心所产生的、持续不断的、以及由时节所产生的明亮色法。其中,由观智心产生的那种光明,只在修行者自己身体内部变得明亮而安住,因为心生色法不能离开身体向外生起;另一种由时节产生的光明,则离开身体,随着智慧的力量向四周扩散,只有那位修行者自己能看见它。在光明所触及的地方,他也能看见那里的色法。看见的时候,是用眼识看见,还是用意识看见?论师们说,这应当去审察。就像获得天眼的人一样,那种光明似乎应当说是只有意识才能认知的。然而,这种光明对某些比丘来说,只照亮他打坐的那一小块地方;对某些比丘来说,照亮室内;对某些比丘来说,连室外也照亮;对某些比丘来说,照亮整个寺院、一牛吼地、半由旬、一由旬、二由旬、三由旬;对某些比丘来说,从地面直到阿迦尼吒梵天界,变成一片光明。而世尊的光明生起时,照亮了一万个世界。当这种光明生起时,修行者心想:“我以前从未生起过这样的光明,我一定已经证得道、证得果了。”于是把不是道的执为“道”,把不是果的执为“果”。当他这样把不是道的执为“道”、把不是果的执为“果”时,就叫作偏离了观智的路。他舍弃了自己原本的业处,只是坐在那里贪著光明。巴利
Tattha (visuddhi. 2.733; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.2.6) obhāsoti vipassanobhāso, so ca vipassanācittasamuṭṭhitaṃ santatipatitaṃ utusamuṭṭhānañca pabhassararūpaṃ. Tattha vipassanācittasamuṭṭhitaṃ yogino sarīraṭṭhameva pabhassaraṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati cittajarūpānaṃ sarīraṃ muñcitvā bahi appavattanato, itaraṃ sarīraṃ muñcitvā ñāṇānubhāvānurūpaṃ samantato pattharati, taṃ tasseva paññāyati. Tena phuṭṭhokāse rūpagatampi passati, passanto ca cakkhuviññāṇena passati, udāhu manoviññāṇenāti vīmaṃsitabbanti vadanti. Dibbacakkhulābhino viya taṃ manoviññāṇaviññeyyamevāti vattuṃ yuttaṃ viya dissati. So kho panāyaṃ obhāso kassaci bhikkhuno pallaṅkaṭṭhānamattameva obhāsento uppajjati, kassaci antogabbhaṃ, kassaci bahigabbhampi, kassaci sakalavihāraṃ, gāvutaṃ, aḍḍhayojanaṃ, yojanaṃ, dviyojanaṃ, tiyojanaṃ, kassaci pathavītalato yāva akaniṭṭhabrahmalokā ekālokaṃ kurumāno. Bhagavato pana dasasahassilokadhātuṃ obhāsento udapādi. Tasmiṃ pana uppanne yogāvacaro ‘‘na vata me ito pubbe evarūpo obhāso uppannapubbo, addhā maggappattosmi phalappattosmī’’ti amaggameva ‘‘maggo’’ti, aphalameva ca ‘‘phala’’nti gaṇhāti. Tassa amaggaṃ ‘‘maggo’’ti aphalaṃ vā ‘‘phala’’nti gaṇhato vipassanāvīthi ukkantā nāma hoti. So attano mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā obhāsameva assādento nisīdati.
所谓智,就是观智。据说,当他衡量、审察色法和非色法时,生起的智就像投掷出的金刚杵一样,势不可挡、锐利、勇猛、极其明净。巴利
Ñāṇanti vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Tassa kira rūpārūpadhamme tulayantassa tīrayantassa vissaṭṭhaindavajiramiva avihatavegaṃ tikhiṇaṃ sūraṃ ativisadaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati.
喜,就是观智的喜。据说,那时候,他心中会生起五种喜:小喜、刹那喜、继起喜、踊跃喜、遍满喜,这五种喜会充满整个身体。巴利
Pītīti vipassanāpīti. Tassa kira tasmiṃ samaye khuddikā pīti khaṇikā pīti okkantikā pīti ubbegā pīti pharaṇā pītīti ayaṃ pañcavidhā pīti sakalasarīraṃ pūrayamānā uppajjati.
轻安,就是观智的轻安。据说,那时他坐在夜间住处或白天住处,身心既没有不安,也没有沉重,没有僵硬,没有不适业,没有病态,没有弯曲,反而身心轻安、轻快、柔软、适业、极明净、正直。他以这些轻安等所护持的身心,在那一刻体验到一种叫作“非人间的乐”。针对这一点,有这样的偈颂说:巴利
Passaddhīti vipassanāpassaddhi. Tassa kira tasmiṃ samaye rattiṭṭhāne vā divāṭṭhāne vā nisinnassa kāyacittānaṃ neva daratho, na gāravaṃ, na kakkhaḷatā, na akammaññatā, na gelaññaṃ, na vaṅkatā hoti, atha kho panassa kāyacittāni passaddhāni lahūni mudūni kammaññāni suvisadāni ujukāniyeva honti. So imehi passaddhādīhi anuggahitakāyacitto tasmiṃ samaye amānusiṃ nāma ratiṃ anubhavati. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
进入空寂之处的比丘,内心寂静,
正确观照法的人,会生起一种不属于人间的喜乐。
“ 每当他对诸蕴的生灭进行观照,
他获得喜悦和欢欣,这就是有智慧的人所体证的不死之境。”巴利
‘‘Suññāgāraṃ paviṭṭhassa, santacittassa bhikkhuno; Amānusī ratī hoti, sammā dhammaṃ vipassato. ‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānata’’nti. (dha. pa. 373-374);
他这样追求那非人间的乐时,与轻快等相应的轻安就会生起。巴利
Evamassa imaṃ amānusiṃ ratiṃ sādhayamānā lahutādisampayuttā passaddhi uppajjati.
所谓乐,就是观智带来的乐。据说在那个时候,会对他生起一种遍满全身、极其殊胜的乐。巴利
Sukhanti vipassanāsukhaṃ. Tassa kira tasmiṃ samaye sakalasarīraṃ abhisandayamānaṃ atipaṇītaṃ sukhamuppajjati.
胜解就是信。因为对于他来说,唯有与观智相应的信才生起,这种信强而有力,成为心和心所极其清净的状态。巴利
Adhimokkhoti saddhā. Vipassanāsampayuttāyeva hissa cittacetasikānaṃ atisayappasādabhūtā balavatī saddhā uppajjati.
策励,就是精进。对他而言,与观相应的精进,正是生起时不松弛、不过度紧绷、被善加策励的。巴利
Paggahoti vīriyaṃ. Vipassanāsampayuttameva hissa asithilamanaccāraddhaṃ supaggahitaṃ vīriyaṃ uppajjati.
现起,就是念。与观智相应的念,确实是善现起、善安住,像埋入地下一样牢固,像山王一样不动摇地生起。他无论转向、注意、作意、观察哪个所缘,那个所缘就进入并跃入他的念中而现起,就像具有天眼的人看见他方世界一样。巴利
Upaṭṭhānanti sati. Vipassanāsampayuttāyeva hissa sūpaṭṭhitā suppatiṭṭhitā nikhātā acalā pabbatarājasadisā sati uppajjati. So yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ āvajjati samannāharati manasi karoti paccavekkhati, taṃ taṃ ṭhānamassa okkantitvā pakkhanditvā dibbacakkhuno paraloko viya satiyā upaṭṭhāti.
舍,就是观舍和转向舍。那时,那于一切诸行保持中舍的观舍强有力地生起,意门的转向舍也生起。当他转向各个所缘时,这舍变得锐利而勇健,运行之势如帝释天神掷出的炽热金刚杵,又像射入叶袋的箭。巴利
Upekkhāti vipassanupekkhā ceva āvajjanupekkhā ca. Tasmiñhissa samaye sabbasaṅkhāresu majjhattabhūtā vipassanupekkhā balavatī uppajjati, manodvāre āvajjanupekkhāpi. Sā hissa taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ āvajjentassa vissaṭṭhaindavajiramiva pattapuṭe pakkhandatattanārāco viya ca sūrā tikhiṇā hutvā vahati.
欲就是观智的欲求。当他的观智像这样被光明等装饰起来时,他对这观智产生执著,于是生起一种微细、寂静样态的欲求,这种欲求甚至没办法被认定为“烦恼”。巴利
Nikantīti vipassanānikanti. Evaṃ obhāsādipaṭimaṇḍitāya hissa vipassanāya ālayaṃ kurumānā sukhumā santākārā nikanti uppajjati, yā ‘‘kileso’’ti pariggahetumpi na sakkā hoti.
就像在光明中那样,当这些(智、喜等)当中任何一种生起时,修行者会想:“我以前确实从未生起过这样的智、这样的喜、这样的轻安、这样的乐、胜解、策励、现起、舍、欲求,我肯定已经证得道、已经证得果了。”于是他把不是道的当成“道”,把不是果的当成“果”。当他这样把不是道的当成道、把不是果的当成果时,就叫作偏离了观智的轨道。他丢下自己原本的根本业处,只顾沉浸在欲求里坐着。巴利
Yathā ca obhāse, evaṃ etesupi aññatarasmiṃ uppanne yogāvacaro ‘‘na vata me ito pubbe evarūpaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppannapubbaṃ, evarūpā pīti, passaddhi, sukhaṃ, adhimokkho, paggaho, upaṭṭhānaṃ, upekkhā, nikanti uppannapubbā, addhā maggappattosmi phalappattosmī’’ti amaggameva ‘‘maggo’’ti aphalameva ca ‘‘phala’’nti gaṇhāti, tassa amaggaṃ ‘‘maggo’’ti aphalaṃ ‘‘phala’’nti gaṇhato vipassanāvīthi ukkantā nāma hoti. So attano mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā nikantimeva assādento nisīdati.
在这里,光明等之所以被称为“随烦恼”,是因为它们是烦恼的依托处,并不是因为它们本身是不善的;而贪欲既是一种随烦恼,也是随烦恼的依托处。这十种只是按依托处来说的,但按执取方式来说则有三十种。怎么讲呢?如果执取“我的光明生起了”,这就是邪见执;如果执取“这光明生起真是让人满意啊”,这就是慢执;如果对光明生起贪著享受,这就是渴爱执。所以,对光明来说,依邪见、慢、渴爱就有三种执取。对其余那些也是如此。这样,按执取方式来说就有三十种随烦恼。由于这些随烦恼,不善巧、不聪慧的瑜伽行者对光明等就动摇、散乱,对光明等一一地观察为“这是我的,我就是这个,这是我的自我”。因此,古德们说:巴利
Ettha ca obhāsādayo upakkilesavatthutāya ‘‘upakkilesā’’ti vuttā, na akusalattā, nikanti pana upakkileso ceva upakkilesavatthu ca . Vatthuvaseneva cete dasa, gāhavasena pana samatiṃsa honti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Mama obhāso uppanno’’ti gaṇhato hi diṭṭhiggāho hoti, ‘‘manāpo vata obhāso uppanno’’ti gaṇhato mānaggāho, obhāsaṃ assādayato taṇhāgāho. Iti obhāse diṭṭhimānataṇhāvasena tayo gāhā. Tathā sesesupīti evaṃ gāhavasena samatiṃsa upakkilesā honti. Tesaṃ vasena akusalo abyatto yogāvacaro obhāsādīsu kampati vikkhipati, obhāsādīsu ekekaṃ ‘‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’’ti samanupassati. Tenāhu porāṇā –
在光明、智慧与欣喜上,心颤动不安;
在轻安与乐上,凡使此心摇荡者。
“ 于胜解、精勤与现起时动摇;
于舍之转向及于舍之贪著时亦动摇。”巴利
‘‘Obhāse ceva ñāṇe ca, pītiyā ca vikampati; Passaddhiyā sukhe ceva, yehi cittaṃ pavedhati. ‘‘Adhimokkhe ca paggāhe, upaṭṭhāne ca kampati; Upekkhāvajjanāya ceva, upekkhāya ca nikantiyā’’ti. (paṭi. ma. 2.7)
一位善巧、有智慧、聪慧、具足慧力的瑜伽修行者,当光明等(禅相)生起时,会用智慧这样界定和审查:“这光明确实在我这里生起了,但它是无常的、有为的、缘起的、灭尽之法、衰败之法、离贪之法、息灭之法。”或者他心里这样想:“如果光明是‘我’,那就可以执取为‘我’;但它其实是无我的,却被执取为‘我’。因此,它因为不受支配这一点而是无我,因为从有变成无这一点而是无常,因为被生灭逼迫这一点而是苦。”他这样审查。对光明如此,对其余的(禅相)也一样。他这样审查之后,就观察光明:“这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的自我。”对智……乃至对欲求,也观察:“这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的自我。”这样观察的人,对光明等(禅相)就不动摇、不颤抖。因此古德们说:巴利
Kusalo paṇḍito byatto buddhisampanno yogāvacaro obhāsādīsu uppannesu ‘‘ayaṃ kho me obhāso uppanno, so kho panāyaṃ anicco saṅkhato paṭiccasamuppanno khayadhammo vayadhammo virāgadhammo nirodhadhammo’’ti iti vā taṃ paññāya paricchindati upaparikkhati. Atha vā panassa evaṃ hoti – sace obhāso attā bhaveyya, attāti gahetuṃ vaṭṭeyya, anattāva panāyaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti gahito. Tasmā so avasavattanaṭṭhena anattā, hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena anicco, uppādavayapaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhoti upaparikkhati. Yathā ca obhāse, evaṃ sesesupi. So evaṃ upaparikkhitvā obhāsaṃ ‘‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’’ti samanupassati. Ñāṇaṃ…pe… nikantiṃ ‘‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’’ti samanupassati. Evaṃ samanupassanto obhāsādīsu na kampati na vedhati. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“ 对于这十种情况,如果一个人的慧已经把它们彻底弄清楚,
他善于处理法上的掉举,也不会陷入散乱。”巴利
‘‘Imāni dasa ṭhānāni, paññā yassa pariccitā; Dhammuddhaccakusalo hoti, na ca vikkhepa gacchatī’’ti. (paṭi. ma. 2.7);
他就这样不落入散乱,解开了那三十种随烦恼结成的缠缚,判定“光明等法不是道,只有脱离随烦恼、走上正确道路的观智才是道”,从而分清了非道与道。针对这一点才说:“舍弃光明等十种观随烦恼,判定脱离随烦恼的行道智为道之后。”所谓“舍弃生起”,就是放下在生灭随观中所执取的诸行生起,只观它们的坏灭;证得坏灭随观智之后,以过患随观为先导而生起厌离随观,在欲解脱智、审察智、行舍智、随顺智修习到终点时,生起种姓智,紧接着生起的道智对一切诸行离贪、解脱。因为在道的那一刹那,圣者就被称为离贪、解脱。因此说:“依次证得四圣道之后。”对于应当观察的道、果、涅槃、已断烦恼和残余烦恼所摄的十九种差别,他都一一观察。因为阿拉汉已没有残余烦恼,所以有十九种观察智。“他的”:指修入出息念业处的人。巴利
So evaṃ vikkhepaṃ agacchanto taṃ samatiṃsavidhaṃ upakkilesajaṭaṃ vijaṭetvā ‘‘obhāsādayo dhammā na maggo, upakkilesavimuttaṃ pana vīthippaṭipannaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggo’’ti amaggaṃ maggañca vavatthapeti. Yaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘obhāsādayo dasa vipassanupakkilese pahāya upakkilesavimuttaṃ paṭipadāñāṇaṃ maggoti vavatthapetvā’’ti. Udayaṃ pahāyāti udayabbayānupassanāya gahitaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ udayaṃ vissajjetvā tesaṃ bhaṅgasseva anupassanato bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇaṃ patvā ādīnavānupassanāpubbaṅgamāya nibbidānupassanāya nibbindanto muñcitukamyatāpaṭisaṅkhānupassanāsaṅkhārupekkhānulomañāṇānaṃ ciṇṇapariyante uppannagotrabhuñāṇānantaraṃ uppannena maggañāṇena sabbasaṅkhāresu virajjanto vimuccanto. Maggakkhaṇe hi ariyo virajjati vimuccatīti ca vuccati. Tenāha – ‘‘yathākkamaṃ cattāro ariyamagge pāpuṇitvā’’ti. Maggaphalanibbānapahīnāvasiṭṭhakilesasaṅkhātassa paccavekkhitabbassa pabhedena ekūnavīsatibhedassa. Arahato hi avasiṭṭhakilesābhāvena ekūnavīsati paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni. Assāti ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānikassa.
并没有一种单独叫“业处修习法”的方法,因为这是依据初四法组证得禅那之后,从受随观、心随观、法随观的角度来说的。“他们的”,指的是三组四法。“遍知喜者”,意思是一遍又一遍正确地感受喜,或者他有一遍又一遍正确感受喜的状态,或者他正在一遍又一遍正确地感受喜。在这里,虽然单靠“感受”这个词就已经表明对喜的了知,但为了说明希望以什么样的方式去感受,所以加上“遍”字,也就是“一遍又一遍地感受,因此叫遍知”。因此说“以两种方式”等等。巴利
Visuṃ kammaṭṭhānabhāvanānayo nāma natthīti paṭhamacatukkavasena adhigatajjhānassa vedanācittadhammānupassanāvasena desitattā vuttaṃ. Tesanti tiṇṇaṃ catukkānaṃ. Pītippaṭisaṃvedīti pītiyā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedanasīlo, tassā vā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedo etassa atthi, taṃ vā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedayamāno. Tattha kāmaṃ saṃvedanaggahaṇeneva pītiyā sakkaccaṃ viditabhāvo bodhito hoti, yehi pana pakārehi tassā saṃvedanaṃ icchitaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ paṭi-saddaggahaṇaṃ ‘‘paṭi paṭi saṃvedīti paṭisaṃvedī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘dvīhākārehī’’tiādi.
在这里,“如何由所缘而遍知喜?”这是提问的话。“入于有喜的二禅”:就是依次入于与喜俱行的初禅和第二禅。“他的”:就是由他。因为要照应“遍知”这个词,这里是属格,表示行为者。“在入定刹那”:就是在入定的那个刹那。“由证得禅那”:就是由具足禅那。“由所缘”:就是通过所缘这个门径,属于该所缘的禅那所摄的喜被遍知,因为所缘已被遍知。这话说的是什么意思呢?就像一个人到处找蛇,当蛇的住处被发现时,那条蛇也就等于被发现了,因为凭咒语和药力很容易抓住它;同样,当作为喜的住处的所缘被遍知时,那喜也就被遍知了,因为从自相和共相两方面都容易把握它。巴利
Tattha kathaṃ ārammaṇato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotīti pucchāvacanaṃ. Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjatī’’ti pītisahagatāni dve paṭhamadutiyajjhānāni paṭipāṭiyā samāpajjati. Tassāti tena. ‘‘Paṭisaṃviditā’’ti hi padaṃ apekkhitvā kattuatthe etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Samāpattikkhaṇeti samāpannakkhaṇe. Jhānapaṭilābhenāti jhānena samaṅgibhāvena. Ārammaṇatoti ārammaṇamukhena, tadārammaṇajjhānapariyāpannā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti ārammaṇassa paṭisaṃviditattā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yathā nāma sappapariyesanaṃ carantena tassa āsaye paṭisaṃvidite sopi paṭisaṃvidito eva hoti mantāgadabalena tassa gahaṇassa sukarattā, evaṃ pītiyā āsayabhūte ārammaṇe paṭisaṃvidite sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā eva hoti salakkhaṇato sāmaññalakkhaṇato ca tassā gahaṇassa sukarattāti.
要把“如何由不痴而了知喜”这一句接过来连接起来。在观刹那,是指在观慧锐利、清明地生起时,从所缘境上观察的那个刹那。由通达相,是指通达喜的自相和共相。因为,如果某一法的特相和共相被了知,那法就被如实了知了。所以说:“由不痴而了知喜。”巴利
Kathaṃ asammohato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotīti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Vipassanākkhaṇeti vipassanāpaññāya tikkhavisadappavattāya visayato dassanakkhaṇe. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhenāti pītiyā salakkhaṇassa sāmaññalakkhaṇassa ca paṭivijjhanena. Yañhi yassa visesato sāmaññato ca lakkhaṇaṃ, tasmiṃ vidite so yāthāvato vidito eva hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘asammohato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotī’’ti.
现在,为了用巴利圣典本身来阐明这件事的含义,说了“因为已说”等话。其中,在“以长入息之力”等处应当说明的内容,前面已经讲过了。不过,在那里,巴利文是依照念与作意的显现方式引出来的,而在这里,则是依照对喜的清晰觉知。对喜的清晰觉知,在含义上已经分析过了。此外,这里还有一个简要的含义:“以长入息之力”是指:对于以长入息为所缘、依其力而了知的人,那喜就成为被清晰觉知的,这就是句子的关联。“了知心的一境性、不散乱”是指:以与那禅支相应的慧,了知那属于禅那、被称为不散乱的心一境性。正如喜通过所缘之门而被清晰觉知,与它相应的诸法也同样通过所缘之门而被清晰觉知。“念已现起”是指:以长入息之力,与禅那相应的念现起于那所缘上;通过所缘之门,念也可说是在禅那中现起了。“以那念”是指:以这样现起的那念,由于那所缘被前面所说的那种智善巧地通达,依于那所缘,那喜就成为被清晰觉知的。在“以长出息之力”等处,也应当用同样的方法来理解其含义。巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ pāḷiyā eva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha dīghaṃassāsavasenātiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Tattha pana satokāritādassanavasena pāḷi āgatā, idha pītippaṭisaṃviditāvasena. Pītippaṭisaṃviditā ca atthato vibhattā eva. Apica ayamettha saṅkhepattho – dīghaṃassāsavasenāti dīghassa assāsassa ārammaṇabhūtassa vasena pajānato sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotīti sambandho. Cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānatoti jhānapariyāpannaṃ avikkhepoti laddhanāmaṃ cittassekaggataṃ taṃsampayuttāya paññāya pajānato. Yatheva hi ārammaṇamukhena pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti, evaṃ taṃsampayuttadhammāpi ārammaṇamukhena paṭisaṃviditā eva hontīti. Sati upaṭṭhitā hotīti dīghaṃassāsavasena jhānasampayuttā sati tassa ārammaṇe upaṭṭhitā ārammaṇamukhena jhānepi upaṭṭhitā nāma hoti. Tāya satiyāti evaṃ upaṭṭhitāya tāya satiyā yathāvuttena tena ñāṇena suppaṭividitattā ārammaṇassa tassa vasena tadārammaṇā sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Dīghaṃpassāsavasenātiādīsupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo.
为了把按第一组四法已展示的喜受,从所缘和不迷惑两方面分别展示,才说了“转向者”等话。其中,“转向者”是指转向禅那的人。“那喜”是指属于禅那的喜。“了知者”是指在入定的那一刻,通过所缘这个门径去了知的人。那喜就成了他所清楚感受的,这就是句子的关联。“见者”是指以见性之智从禅那出来之后去看的人。“观察者”是指观察禅那的人。“决意心者”是指决意禅那心的人:“我要在这么长的时间里具足禅那。”这样,通过五种自在力的方式,从禅那的了知门径,从所缘方面展示了喜的感受。巴利
Evaṃ paṭhamacatukkavasena dassitaṃ pītippaṭisaṃvedanaṃ ārammaṇato asammohato ca vibhāgaso dassetuṃ ‘‘āvajjato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha āvajjatoti jhānaṃ āvajjentassa. Sā pītīti sā jhānapariyāpannā pīti. Jānatoti samāpannakkhaṇe ārammaṇamukhena jānato. Tassa sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotīti sambandho. Passatoti dassanabhūtena ñāṇena jhānato vuṭṭhāya passantassa. Paccavekkhatoti jhānaṃ paccavekkhantassa. Cittaṃ adhiṭṭhahatoti ‘‘ettakaṃ velaṃ jhānasamaṅgī bhavissāmī’’ti jhānacittaṃ adhiṭṭhahantassa. Evaṃ pañcannaṃ vasībhāvānaṃ vasena jhānassa pajānanamukhena ārammaṇato pītiyā paṭisaṃvedanā dassitā.
现在,为了说明依靠哪些法能使禅那和观成就——也就是依靠属于禅那和属于观道的信等法——而体验喜,所以说了“以信胜解者”等话。其中,“胜解者”是指有信心的人,意思是依靠止观之力。“策励精进者”等处也是同样的道理。“应证知”是指应当以殊胜的智慧了知。“证知者”是指以观慧为先导的道慧了知的人。“应遍知”是指以审察遍知和道慧遍知苦谛的人。“应断”是指以断遍知和道慧断除集谛的人。“修习者”和“作证者”是指修习应修的道谛、作证应证的灭谛的人。不过,有些人在这里只以喜来列举应证知等,这是不恰当的,因为这里的意思是先举出禅那等的整体,再从中拣择出喜。巴利
Idāni yehi dhammehi jhānaṃ vipassanā ca sijjhanti, tesaṃ jhānapariyāpannānaṃ vipassanāmaggapariyāpannānañca saddhādīnaṃ vasena pītippaṭisaṃvedanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saddhāya adhimuccato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha adhimuccatoti saddahantassa, samathavipassanāvasenāti adhippāyo. Vīriyaṃ paggaṇhatotiādīsupi eseva nayo. Abhiññeyyanti abhivisiṭṭhāya paññāya jānitabbaṃ. Abhijānatoti vipassanāpaññāpubbaṅgamāya maggapaññāya jānato. Pariññeyyanti dukkhasaccaṃ tīraṇapariññāya maggapaññāya ca parijānato. Pahātabbanti samudayasaccaṃ pahānapariññāya maggapaññāya ca pajahato. Bhāvayato sacchikaroto bhāvetabbaṃ maggasaccaṃ, sacchikātabbaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ. Keci panettha pītiyā eva vasena abhiññeyyādīni uddharanti, taṃ ayuttaṃ jhānādisamudāyaṃ uddharitvā tato pītiyā niddhāraṇassa adhippetattā.
在这里,关于“以长入息之力”等,是依第一组四法,从所缘方面说明了喜的觉知;同样,“转向者”等五句也是从所缘方面说的。而“应证知者证知”等,则是从不迷惑方面说的;“以信胜解者”等,则是从两方面简要说明——止的力量从所缘方面,观的力量从不迷惑方面——说明了喜的觉知。应当这样理解。那么,为什么在这里的受随观念处中,是以喜为代表来取受,而不是直接按受本身的样貌来说呢?这是为了依地等的差别把受分开,以四种方式显示受随观念处。再者,世尊在显示受为业处时,因为喜比较粗显,为了把握与喜相应的乐,就以喜为代表来显示。巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘dīghaṃassāsavasenā’’tiādinā paṭhamacatukkavasena ārammaṇato pītippaṭisaṃvedanaṃ vuttaṃ, tathā ‘‘āvajjato’’tiādīhi pañcahi padehi. ‘‘Abhiññeyyaṃ abhijānato’’tiādīhi pana asammohato, ‘‘saddhāya adhimuccato’’tiādīhi ubhayathāpi saṅkhepato samathavasena ārammaṇato vipassanāvasena asammohato pītippaṭisaṃvedanaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kasmā panettha vedanānupassanāyaṃ pītisīsena vedanā gahitā, na sarūpato evāti? Bhūmivibhāgādivasena vedanaṃ bhinditvā catudhā vedanānupassanaṃ dassetuṃ. Apica vedanākammaṭṭhānaṃ dassento bhagavā pītiyā oḷārikattā taṃsampayuttasukhaṃ sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ pītisīsena dasseti.
按照同样的方法,其余的词句,也就是“感受乐者”“感受心行者”这些词句,应当依照“感受喜者”这个词句中所用的方法来理解它们的含义。因为可以把“以两种方式感受乐、感受心行:从所缘方面……”等等,在讲喜的地方替换成乐等词句,再通过“进入与乐俱行的三禅或四禅”等等来了知它的含义。因此说“依三禅之力”等等。“受等”中的“等”字包含了想,所以说“二蕴”。为了显示观的阶段——也就是以杂行思惟的方式显示观的阶段——而说“乐:有两种乐”等等,因为在止当中没有身乐。“那”是指以止息为同义语所说的灭。“因为当这位比丘尚未执取时”等等,是详细地就身行而说的,因此应当依照那里所说的方法来了知。在那里是就身行而说的,这里则是就心行而说的,这就是唯一的不同之处。巴利
Eteneva nayena avasesapadānīti sukhappaṭisaṃvedī cittasaṅkhārappaṭisaṃvedīti padāni pītippaṭisaṃvedī-pade āgatanayeneva atthato veditabbāni. Sakkā hi ‘‘dvīhākārehi sukhappaṭisaṃviditā hoti, cittasaṅkhārappaṭisaṃviditā hoti ārammaṇato’’tiādinā pītiṭṭhāne sukhādipadāni pakkhipitvā ‘‘sukhasahagatāni tīṇi jhānāni cattāri vā jhānāni samāpajjatī’’tiādinā atthaṃ viññātuṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ jhānānaṃ vasenā’’tiādi. Vedanādayoti ādi-saddena saññā gahitā. Tenāha ‘‘dve khandhā’’ti. Vipassanābhūmidassanatthanti pakiṇṇakasaṅkhārasammasanavasena vipassanāya bhūmidassanatthaṃ ‘‘sukhanti dve sukhānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ samathe kāyikasukhābhāvato. Soti so passambhanapariyāyena vutto nirodho. ‘‘Imassa hi bhikkhuno apariggahitakāle’’tiādinā vitthārato kāyasaṅkhāre vutto, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Tattha kāyasaṅkhāravasena āgato, idha cittasaṅkhāravasenāti ayameva viseso.
像这样,先以补充说明的方式阐明了心行的平息;接着为了说明此四法组中还应讲述的其他内容,便说出“再者”等语。其中在“喜一词句”处,指的是以“觉知喜者”等所阐明的那一部分。以喜为首而说受,意思是藉着“喜”这个词句,说了与喜相应的受,并非说喜本身——这是本处的意趣。其理由前已说过。在“两个心行的词句”处,指的是“觉知心行者”“平息心行者”这两个与心行相关联的词句。依“识缘名色”之说,它们系缚于心,故称“心所系缚”。正因如此,它们虽由心所造作,却名为“心行”,即想、受等;但此处仅举其一作为代表,实际所指是想与受,所以说“与想相应的受”。巴利
Evaṃ cittasaṅkhārassa passambhanaṃ atidesena dassetvā yadaññaṃ imasmiṃ catukke vattabbaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pītipadeti ‘‘pītippaṭisaṃvedī’’tiādinā desitakoṭṭhāse. Pītisīsena vedanā vuttāti pītiapadesena taṃsampayuttā vedanā vuttā, na pītīti adhippāyo. Tattha kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Dvīsu cittasaṅkhārapadesūti ‘‘cittasaṅkhārappaṭisaṃvedī passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāra’’nti cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃyuttesu dvīsu padesu. ‘‘Viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti vacanato cittena paṭibaddhāti cittapaṭibaddhā. Tato eva kāmaṃ cittena saṅkharīyantīti cittasaṅkhārā, saññāvedanādayo, idha pana upalakkhaṇamattaṃ, saññāvedanāva adhippetāti āha ‘‘saññāsampayuttā vedanā’’ti.
“觉知心”在这里,心通过两种方式被觉知:从所缘方面,以及从不迷惑方面。如何从所缘方面呢?他进入四种禅那,在他进入禅那的刹那,依照“由获得禅那”等所说的方法,一切都很容易了知,因此说“应当了知,由四种禅那之力而觉知心”。令心喜悦:以与禅那相应的喜,令与禅那相应的心喜悦;或者,以那喜为所缘而生起的观心,通过那作为所缘的喜而令观心喜悦。“令欣喜”等词句是它的同义词,因为它们是喜的别名。巴利
Cittappaṭisaṃvedīti ettha dvīhākārehi cittapaṭisaṃviditā hoti ārammaṇato asammohato ca. Kathaṃ ārammaṇato? Cattāri jhānāni samāpajjati, tassa samāpattikkhaṇe jhānapaṭilābhenātiādinā vuttanayānusārena sabbaṃ suviññeyyanti āha – ‘‘catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena cittapaṭisaṃviditā veditabbā’’ti. Cittaṃ modentoti jhānasampayuttaṃ cittaṃ sampayuttāya pītiyā modayamāno, taṃ vā pītiṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattaṃ vipassanācittaṃ tāya eva ārammaṇabhūtāya pītiyāmodayamāno. Pamodentotiādīni padāni tasseva vevacanāni pītipariyāyabhāvato.
以与禅那心相应的喜,令心喜悦:这里说的是,与禅那心相应、具有喜觉支性质、以昂扬为特相的禅那喜,通过俱生缘等以及禅那缘,使那禅那心不断增长,让它呈现出欢喜踊跃的状态,于是令它喜悦、令它欣喜。作为所缘:瑜伽行者以殊胜的、与禅那相应的喜作为所缘,生起观心,借着这作为所缘的喜,让心呈现出欢喜踊跃的状态,所以说令喜悦、令欣喜。巴利
Sampayuttāya pītiyā cittaṃ āmodetīti jhānacittasampayuttāya pītisambojjhaṅgabhūtāya odagyalakkhaṇāya jhānapītiyā tameva jhānacittaṃ sahajātādipaccayavasena ceva jhānapaccayavasena ca paribrūhento haṭṭhappahaṭṭhākāraṃ pāpento āmodeti pamodeti ca. Ārammaṇaṃ katvāti uḷāraṃ jhānasampayuttaṃ pītiṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānaṃ vipassanācittaṃ tāya eva ārammaṇabhūtāya pītiyā yogāvacaro haṭṭhappahaṭṭhākāraṃ pāpento ‘‘āmodeti pamodetī’’ti vuccati.
让心稳稳安住:既不落入哪怕一丁点儿的昏沉,也不落入掉举,不偏低也不偏高,就像诸根以平等的方式运作那样不偏斜;或者通过定力的提升达到不动,真正稳稳地安立,这就是以安止的方式让心住下来。以通达相:就是对无常等相一次又一次地穿透,在每一个刹那中觉悟。刹那心一境性:就是只安住于一个刹那的定。这个定确实能在所缘上毫无间断地以同一种方式持续生起,不被对立面压倒,就像安止一样让心不动摇地安立。因此说“如此生起”等等。巴利
Samaṃṭhapentoti yathā īsakampi līnapakkhaṃ uddhaccapakkhañca anupaggamma anonataṃ anunnataṃ yathā indriyānaṃ samattapaṭipattiyā avisamaṃ, samādhissa vā ukkaṃsagamanena āneñjappattiyā sammadeva ṭhitaṃ hoti, evaṃ appanāvasena ṭhapento. Lakkhaṇappaṭivedhenāti aniccādikassa lakkhaṇassa paṭi paṭi vijjhanena khaṇe khaṇe avabodhena. Khaṇikacittekaggatāti khaṇamattaṭṭhitiko samādhi. Sopi hi ārammaṇe nirantaraṃ ekākārena pavattamāno paṭipakkhena anabhibhūto appito viya cittaṃ niccalaṃ ṭhapeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ uppannāyā’’tiādi.
“令解脱”的意思是:以镇伏解脱的方式令它远离、令它分开,也就是断除诸盖。“于观刹那”是指在坏灭随观的刹那。因为坏灭确实是无常的终极边际,所以,以坏灭随观的瑜伽行者通过心,把一切诸行都看作无常,而不是看作常;由于无常就是苦,苦就是无我,所以他随观那本身就是苦,而不是随观为乐;随观为无我,而不是随观为我。又因为凡是无常、苦、无我的,就不应欢喜;凡不应欢喜的,就不应染着。因此,依照坏灭之见,当诸行被见为“无常、苦、无我”时,他对它厌离,而不欢喜;离欲,而不染着。他这样厌离、离欲时,首先仅以世间智令贪灭去,而不是令它生起——意思是不让它生起。或者,他这样离欲之后,对于如所见那样的诸行,以自身的智令那如所见者灭去,而不是令它生起;他只是作意于灭,而不是作意于生起——这就是说他这样修行时,是弃舍,而不是执取。因为这种无常等随观,连同诸蕴行,一方面由于舍弃烦恼、由于看见有为法的过患,另一方面由于倾向并跃入与有为法相反的涅槃,所以被称为“舍离舍”和“跃入舍”。因此,具足它的瑜伽行者,按所说的方式,既舍弃烦恼,又跃入涅槃。所以说:“他在观刹那,以无常随观令心从常想中解脱、令脱离……以舍遣随观令心从执取中解脱、令脱离,而入息、出息。”巴利
Mocentoti vikkhambhanavimuttivasena vivecento visuṃ karonto, nīvaraṇāni pajahantoti attho. Vipassanākkhaṇeti bhaṅgānupassanākkhaṇe. Bhaṅgo hi nāma aniccatāya paramā koṭi, tasmā tāya bhaṅgānupassako yogāvacaro cittamukhena sabbaṃ saṅkhāragataṃ aniccato passati, no niccato, aniccassa dukkhattā dukkhassa ca anattattā tadeva dukkhato anupassati, no sukhato, anattato anupassati, no attato. Yasmā pana yaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā, na taṃ abhinanditabbaṃ, yañca na abhinanditabbaṃ, na taṃ rañjitabbaṃ, tasmā bhaṅgadassanānusārena ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’’ti saṅkhāragate diṭṭhe tasmiṃ nibbindati, no nandati, virajjati, no rajjati, so evaṃ nibbindanto virajjanto lokiyeneva tāva ñāṇena rāgaṃ nirodheti no samudeti, nāssa samudayaṃ karotīti attho. Atha vā so evaṃ viratto yathā diṭṭhaṃ saṅkhāragataṃ, taṃ tathā diṭṭhaṃ attano ñāṇena nirodheti no samudeti, nirodhamevassa manasi karoti, no samudayanti attho, so evaṃ paṭipanno paṭinissajjati, no ādiyatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayañhi aniccādianupassanā saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilesānaṃ pariccajanato saṅkhatadosadassanena tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandanato ca pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissaggocāti vuccati. Tasmā tāya samannāgato yogāvacaro vuttanayena kilese ca pariccajati, nibbāne ca pakkhandati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘so vipassanākkhaṇe aniccānupassanāya niccasaññāto cittaṃ mocento vimocento…pe… paṭinissaggānupassanāya ādānato cittaṃ mocento vimocento assasati ceva passasati cā’’ti.
在这里,无常随观就是对无常、或者“无常”的随观。这是以三地法(欲界、色界、无色界)的无常性为所缘而生起的观,这个名称就指它。“从常想”是指对有为法生起“常、永恒”这种错误想。应当知道,以“想”为代表,也一并包含了心和邪见。对乐想等也是这样。“以厌离随观”是指以对诸行厌离的方式生起的随观。“从欢喜”是指从带有喜的渴爱。“以离欲随观”是指以同样离欲的方式生起的随观。因此说“从贪令解脱”。“以灭随观”是指对诸行灭的随观。或者,像诸行确实灭去、未来不再以再生方式生起那样,这样的随观就是灭随观。因为这即是已达强有力的欲解脱。因此说“从集令解脱”。以弃舍的方式生起的随观就是弃舍随观。“从执取”是指从以“常”等方式执取,或者从结生执取。这里的意思应当这样理解。巴利
Tattha aniccassa, aniccanti vā anupassanā aniccānupassanā. Tebhūmakadhammānaṃ aniccataṃ gahetvā pavattāya vipassanāya etaṃ nāmaṃ. Niccasaññātoti saṅkhatadhamme ‘‘niccā sassatā’’ti pavattāya micchāsaññāya. Saññāsīsena cittadiṭṭhīnampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Esa nayo sukhasaññādīsupi. Nibbidānupassanāyāti saṅkhāresu nibbindanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya . Nanditoti sappītikataṇhāto. Virāgānupassanāyāti tathā virajjanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘rāgato mocento’’ti. Nirodhānupassanāyāti saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhassa anupassanāya. Yathā saṅkhārā nirujjhantiyeva āyatiṃ punabbhavavasena nuppajjanti, evaṃ vā anupassanā nirodhānupassanā. Muñcitukamyatā hi ayaṃ balappattā. Tenāha ‘‘samudayato mocento’’ti. Paṭinissajjanākārena pavattā anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā. Ādānatoti niccādivasena gahaṇato, paṭisandhiggahaṇato vāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“无常”是指以随观的方式观察,或者具有随观无常的习性,所以叫“无常随观”。这里要辨明四点:什么是无常?怎样是无常?什么是无常随观?是谁的无常随观?为了显示这四点,所以说“应知无常”等。其中,“常”是指坚固、永恒,比如涅槃;“非常”就是无常,是有生有灭的,从意义上说就是有为法,所以说“无常就是五蕴”。为什么?因为有生、有灭、有变异性,也就是具有生、灭、变异这样的性质。其中,有为法依靠因缘而生起,从无到有、获得自身存在,这就是“生”;这些法生起之后,刹那坏灭,这就是“灭”;因衰老而变成另外的样子,这就是“变异性”。就像生的阶段与坏的阶段,事物并无差异;同样,在称为住位、正朝向坏灭的阶段,事物也没有差异。但在那里假立了“老”这个说法,所以即使是一个法,也有老,这叫做刹那老。而且在生位和坏灭位,必须承认事物没有差异,否则就会变成“一个法生起,另一个法坏灭”。这里就是针对刹那老而说“变异性”。巴利
Aniccanti anupassī, aniccassa vā anupassanasīlo aniccānupassīti ettha kiṃ pana taṃ aniccaṃ, kathaṃ vā aniccaṃ, kā vā aniccānupassanā, kassa vā aniccānupassanāti catukkaṃ vibhāvetabbanti taṃ dassento ‘‘aniccaṃ veditabba’’ntiādimāha. Tattha niccaṃ nāma dhuvaṃ sassataṃ yathā taṃ nibbānaṃ, na niccanti aniccaṃ, udayabbayavantaṃ, atthato saṅkhatā dhammāti āha aniccanti pañcakkhandhā. Kasmā? Uppādavayaññathattabhāvāti, uppādavayaññathattasabbhāvāti attho. Tattha saṅkhatadhammānaṃ hetupaccayehi uppajjanaṃ ahutvā sambhavo attalābho uppādo, uppannānaṃ tesaṃ khaṇanirodho vināso vayo, jarāya aññathābhāvo aññathattaṃ. Yathā hi uppādāvatthāya bhinnāya bhaṅgāvatthāyaṃ vatthubhedo natthi, evaṃ ṭhitisaṅkhātāyaṃ bhaṅgābhimukhāvatthāyampi vatthubhedo natthi. Yattha jarāvohāro, tasmā ekassapi dhammassa jarā yujjati, yā khaṇikajarāti vuccati. Ekaṃsena ca uppādabhaṅgāvatthāsu vatthuno abhedo icchitabbo, aññathā ‘‘añño uppajjati, añño bhijjatī’’ti āpajjeyya. Tayidaṃ khaṇikajaraṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘aññathatta’’nti.
因为具有这三种特相,所以在诸蕴上安立了“无常”这个名称;而在这三种特相当中,“无常性”才是那个共同的名称。接着说明:无常性就是指那些法本身的生、灭、变异性。然后特别指出,诸法在刹那灭的意义上才被称为无常,于是说“或者,存在之后又不存在”等等。其中,因为不存在是以生起为前提的,所以说“存在之后”。这就表明:灭坏的状态是以明显的存在为前提的。以那种方式,就是以生起的方式。以刹那坏灭,就是以刹那灭。那无常性,就是被称为刹那坏灭的无常性。以那种随观,就是如前所说的无常随观。具足者,就是具备这种随观的瑜伽行者。巴利
Yassa lakkhaṇattayassa bhāvā khandhesu aniccasamaññā, tasmiṃ lakkhaṇattaye aniccatā samaññāti ‘‘aniccatāti tesaṃyeva uppādavayaññathatta’’nti vatvā visesato dhammānaṃ khaṇikanirodhe aniccatāvohāroti dassento ‘‘hutvā abhāvo vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha uppādapubbakattā abhāvassa hutvā-gahaṇaṃ. Tena pākaṭabhāvapubbakattaṃ vināsabhāvassa dasseti. Tenevākārenāti nibbattanākārena. Khaṇabhaṅgenāti khaṇikanirodhena. Tassā aniccatāyāti khaṇikabhaṅgasaṅkhātāya aniccatāya. Tāya anupassanāyāti yathāvuttāya aniccānupassanāya. Samannāgatoti samaṅgibhūto yogāvacaro.
灭尽就是诸行的坏灭。离欲就是那些诸行的消散;灭尽本身就是离欲,所以叫灭尽离欲,也就是刹那灭。极尽离欲是说:在这里,当这个(涅槃)已经被证得时,诸行就离欲、止息了,所以叫极尽离欲,也就是涅槃。因此说:“灭尽离欲是诸行的刹那坏灭。极尽离欲是涅槃。”应当这样理解:依这两种观察而运作——观是依灭尽离欲随观而运作,道是依极尽离欲随观而运作。或者,从所缘来说,观是依灭尽离欲随观而运作,由于倾向于那个(灭尽),所以依极尽离欲随观而运作;而道则从不迷惑来说,是依灭尽离欲随观而运作,从所缘来说,是依极尽离欲随观而运作。应当知道这个道理。由于“此即同一方法”这句话,是依据“离欲随观”这个词中所说的方式,指出“两种灭:灭尽灭和极尽灭”等义理阐释已经显示出来,所以在讲离欲的地方插入“灭”这个词,并按照这里所说的“灭尽就是诸行的坏灭”等方式,应当知道对它的义理解释。巴利
Khayoti saṅkhārānaṃ vināso. Virajjanaṃ tesaṃyeva vilujjanaṃ virāgo, khayo eva virāgo khayavirāgo, khaṇikanirodho. Accantamettha etasmiṃ adhigate saṅkhārā virajjanti nirujjhantīti accantavirāgo, nibbānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘khayavirāgoti saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgo. Accantavirāgoti nibbāna’’nti. Tadubhayadassanavasena pavattāti khayavirāgānupassanāvasena vipassanāya, accantavirāgānupassanāvasena maggassa pavatti yojetabbā. Ārammaṇato vā vipassanāya khayavirāgānupassanāvasena pavatti, tanninnabhāvato accantavirāgānupassanāvasena, maggassa pana asammohato khayavirāgānupassanāvasena, ārammaṇato accantavirāgānupassanāvasena pavatti veditabbā. Eseva nayoti iminā yasmā virāgānupassīpade vuttanayānusārena ‘‘dve nirodhā khayanirodho ca accantanirodho cā’’ti evamādiatthavaṇṇanaṃ atidissati, tasmā virāgaṭṭhāne nirodhapadaṃ pakkhipitvā ‘‘khayo saṅkhārānaṃ vināso’’tiādinā idha vuttanayena tassa atthavaṇṇanā veditabbā.
弃舍,就是应当断除的东西,以彼分断或正断的方式加以舍弃,这叫弃舍弃舍。同样,一切依着的弃舍,即是诸行寂灭;把自己投入其中——或者因为倾向它,或者因为以它为所缘而投身——这叫投入弃舍。其中“以彼分断的方式”:无常随观首先以彼分断的方式舍弃常想。它舍弃常想,使常想如此不再生起;那些以执取“常”为方式而生的烦恼、以烦恼为根的诸行,以及以这两者为根的异熟蕴,未来本会生起,而无常随观也以使之不生起的方式,把这一切全部舍弃。苦想等也是如此。因此说:“观确实以彼分断的方式,连同蕴、行、烦恼一起舍弃。”以见到有为的过患,就是见到三地诸行中无常等的过患;以常等状态的反面来舍弃常想等。以倾向它,就是以胜解趣向它。投入,就是进入,好像正在跃入其中。连同蕴、行、烦恼一起舍弃:当以道断除烦恼时,由于令诸行成为不感果之法,诸行以及以它们为根的蕴因不可能再生起,因而被称为已被舍弃,所以说“道舍弃这一切”。二者,指观智与道智。道智也因为紧随种姓智之后见涅槃,所以被称为随观。巴利
Paṭinissajjanaṃ pahātabbassa tadaṅgavasena vā samucchedavasena vā pariccajanaṃ pariccāgapaṭinissaggo. Tathā sabbupadhīnaṃ paṭinissaggabhūte visaṅkhāre attano nissajjanaṃ tanninnatāya vā tadārammaṇatāya vā tattha pakkhandanaṃ pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo. Tadaṅgavasenāti ettha aniccānupassanā tāva tadaṅgappahānavasena niccasaññaṃ pariccajati, pariccajantī ca tassā tathā appavattiyaṃ ye ‘‘nicca’’nti gahaṇavasena kilesā tammūlakā ca abhisaṅkhārā tadubhayamūlakā ca vipākakkhandhā anāgate uppajjeyyuṃ, te sabbepi appavattikaraṇavasena pariccajati, tathā dukkhasaññādayo. Tenāha – ‘‘vipassanā hi tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajatī’’ti. Saṅkhatadosadassanenāti saṅkhate tebhūmakasaṅkhāragate aniccatādidosadassanena. Niccādibhāvena tabbiparīte. Tanninnatāyāti tadadhimuttatāya. Pakkhandatīti anupavisati anupavisantaṃ viya hoti. Saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajatīti maggena kilesesu pariccattesu avipākadhammatāpādanena abhisaṅkhārā tammūlakā ca khandhā anuppattirahabhāvena pariccattā nāma hontīti sabbepi te maggo pariccajatīti vuttaṃ. Ubhayanti vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggañāṇañca. Maggañāṇampi hi gotrabhuñāṇassa anu pacchā nibbānadassanato anupassanāti vuccati.
这第四组四法,是只按照纯观来宣说的;前面三组则是按照止与观来宣说的。应当知道,入出息念的修习就是由这四组四法、共十六个方面构成的。也应当知道,入出息念就是通过这十六个方面修习之后,才成为大果、大利益的。而“比丘们,入出息念定这样修习……”等经文,则是从寂静等角度来说明它的大利益。也应当看到,由于它有能力切断寻思,所以具有大利益。因为这种定是寂静、殊妙、无染的乐住,它能切断那些障碍定的寻思所造成的心四处飘荡,使心只朝向入出息这个所缘。因此说:“应当修习入出息念,为了切断寻思。”还应当知道,从作为明与解脱圆满的根本这一点来说,它也具有大利益。世尊确实这样说过:巴利
Idañca catutthacatukkaṃ suddhavipassanāvaseneva vuttaṃ, purimāni pana tīṇi samathavipassanāvasena. Evaṃ catunnaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena soḷasavatthukāya ānāpānassatiyā bhāvanā veditabbā. Evaṃ soḷasavatthuvasena ca ayaṃ ānāpānassati bhāvitā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṃsāti veditabbā. ‘‘Evaṃ bhāvito kho, bhikkhave, ānāpānassatisamādhī’’tiādinā pana santabhāvādivasena mahānisaṃsatā dassitā. Vitakkupacchedasamatthatāyapi cassa mahānisaṃsatā daṭṭhabbā. Ayañhi santapaṇītaasecanakasukhavihārattā samādhiantarāyakarānaṃ vitakkānaṃ vasena ito cito ca cittassa vidhāvanaṃ upacchinditvā ānāpānārammaṇābhimukhameva cittaṃ karoti. Teneva vuttaṃ – ‘‘ānāpānassati bhāvetabbā vitakkupacchedāyā’’ti (a. ni. 9.1; udā. 31). Vijjāvimuttipāripūriyā mūlabhāvenapi cassā mahānisaṃsatā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,修习入出息念、反复修习之后,能圆满四念处;修习四念处、反复修习之后,能圆满七觉支;修习七觉支、反复修习之后,能圆满明与解脱。巴利
‘‘Ānāpānassati, bhikkhave, bhāvitā bahulīkatā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne paripūreti, cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satta bojjhaṅge paripūrenti, satta bojjhaṅgā bhāvitā bahulīkatā vijjāvimuttiṃ paripūrentī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.147).
另外,还应知道它有大利益,因为它能使最后那些入出息被清楚地觉知。世尊确实这样说过:巴利
Apica carimakānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ viditabhāvakaraṇatopissā mahānisaṃsatā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
罗睺罗,当入出息念这样被修习、这样被反复修习时,那些最后的入出息也都是在清楚了知的情况下息灭的,不是在没有清楚了知的情况下息灭的。巴利
‘‘Evaṃ bhāvitāya, rāhula, ānāpānassatiyā evaṃ bahulīkatāya yepi te carimakā assāsapassāsā, tepi viditāva nirujjhanti, no aviditā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.121).
在这里,从息灭的角度说,有三种“最后”:“有”的最后、禅那的最后、死心的最后。因为在欲有中,入出息会生起,在色有和无色有中不会生起,所以它们是“有的最后”。在诸禅那中,入出息于前三禅那生起,于第四禅那不生起,所以它们是“禅那的最后”。至于那些在死心之前、与第十六心一同生起、并与死心一同息灭的,就叫做“死心的最后”。这里所说的“最后”,指的就是这些。巴利
Tattha nirodhavasena tayo carimakā bhavacarimakā jhānacarimakā cuticarimakāti. Bhavesu hi kāmabhave assāsapassāsā pavattanti, rūpārūpabhavesu na pavattanti, tasmā te bhavacarimakā. Jhānesu purime jhānattaye pavattanti, catutthe nappavattanti, tasmā te jhānacarimakā. Ye pana cuticittassa purato soḷasamena cittena saddhiṃ uppajjitvā cuticittena saha nirujjhanti, ime cuticarimakā nāma. Ime idha carimakāti adhippetā.
据说,对于专心修习这个业处的比丘来说,这些现象是清晰显现的,因为他已经很好地掌握了入出息念的所缘。因为当他对着死心之前的第十六心,在它生起的刹那作意“生”时,它们的生也是清晰的;当他作意“住”时,它们的住也是清晰的;当他作意“灭”时,它们的灭也是清晰的。修习其他业处而证得阿拉汉的比丘,他的寿限或者有限定,或者没有限定;但修习这个十六事的入出息念而证得阿拉汉的人,他的寿限一定是有限定的。他了知“我的寿行现在将只延续这么久,不会再超过这个范围”之后,就按照自己的法性,把照料身体、穿衣、披衣等一切事务都做好,然后闭上眼睛——就像住在拘吒山寺的帝萨长老、住在大迦兰耆耶寺的大帝萨长老、在提婆子国托钵的长老,以及住在心叶山寺的两位兄弟长老那样。巴利
Ime kira imaṃ kammaṭṭhānamanuyuttassa bhikkhuno pākaṭā honti ānāpānārammaṇassa suṭṭhu pariggahitattā. Cuticittassa hi purato soḷasamacittassa uppādakkhaṇe uppādaṃ āvajjayato uppādopi nesaṃ pākaṭo hoti, ṭhitiṃ āvajjayato ṭhitipi nesaṃ pākaṭā hoti, bhaṅgaṃ āvajjayato bhaṅgopi nesaṃ pākaṭo hoti. Ito aññaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā arahattappattassa bhikkhuno hi āyuantaraṃ paricchinnaṃ vā hoti aparicchinnaṃ vā, imaṃ pana soḷasavatthukaṃ ānāpānassatiṃ bhāvetvā arahattappattassa āyuantaraṃ paricchinnameva hoti. So ‘‘ettakaṃ dāni me āyusaṅkhārā pavattissanti, na ito para’’nti ñatvā attano dhammatāya eva sarīrapaṭijaggananivāsanapārupanādīni sabbakiccāni katvā akkhīni nimīleti koṭapabbatavihāravāsitissatthero viya, mahākarañjiyavihāravāsimahātissatthero viya, devaputtaraṭṭhe piṇḍapātikatthero viya, cittalapabbatavihāravāsino dvebhātikattherā viya ca.
这里用一个事例来说明:据说,兄弟两位长老中的一位,在满月伍波萨他日诵完巴帝摩卡后,被比丘僧团围绕着回到自己的住处,站在经行处。那时正是月圆分的傍晚,月光洒遍四周,天空就像有人在空中倾泻乳流一样,地面则像铺开的银板,又像铺满了细沙。他看到这番景象,心想:“这个时候真是宜人,这个地方也正合我的心意。这苦担还要背多久呢?”于是他观察自己的寿行,然后对比丘僧众说:“你们见过比丘是怎么般涅槃的吗?”其中有些人说:“我们见过坐在座位上般涅槃的。”有些人说:“我们见过在空中结跏趺坐般涅槃的。”长老说:“那我现在就给你们看,正在经行的时候般涅槃。”于是他在经行处横着画了一条线,说:“我从经行处的这一头走到那一头,折返回来,脚一踩到这条线,就般涅槃。”说完,他从经行处下来,走到另一头,转身返回,一只脚刚踏上那条线的刹那,就般涅槃了。巴利
Tatridaṃ ekavatthuparidīpanaṃ – dvebhātikattherānaṃ kireko puṇṇamuposathadivase pātimokkhaṃ osāretvā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā caṅkame ṭhito juṇhapakkhe padosavelāyaṃ candālokena samantato āsiñcamānakhīradhāraṃ viya gaganatalaṃ rajatapaṭṭasadisaṃ vālikāsanthatañca bhūmibhāgaṃ disvā ‘‘ramaṇīyo vatāyaṃ kālo, deso ca mama ajjhāsayasadiso, kīva ciraṃ nu kho ayaṃ dukkhabhāro vahitabbo’’ti attano āyusaṅkhāre upadhāretvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ āha – ‘‘tumhehi kathaṃ parinibbāyantā bhikkhū diṭṭhapubbā’’ti. Tatra keci āhaṃsu – ‘‘amhehi āsane nisinnakāva parinibbāyantā diṭṭhapubbā’’ti. Keci ‘‘amhehi ākāse pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisinnakā’’ti. Thero āha – ‘‘ahaṃ dāni vo caṅkamantameva parinibbāyamānaṃ dassayissāmī’’ti. Tato caṅkame tiriyaṃ lekhaṃ katvā ‘‘ahaṃ ito caṅkamakoṭito parakoṭiṃ gantvā nivattamāno imaṃ lekhaṃ patvā parinibbāyissāmī’’ti vatvā caṅkamaṃ oruyha parabhāgaṃ gantvā nivattamāno ekena pādena lekhaṃ akkantakkhaṇeyeva parinibbāyīti.
第一施设论的注释巴利
Paṭhamapaññattikathāvaṇṇanā
167 即使圣者们并没有自己结束自己的生命,也没有互相结束生命,也没有走到鹿斑外道沙门伪装者那里去教唆他这么做,但因为以上面说的三种方式死去的人当中也有圣者,所以从“夹杂了圣者”这个角度来说,还是这么讲了。因为圣者们确实没有杀生,没有教唆别人杀生,也没有随喜杀生。或者,有人在凡夫阶段自己结束了自己的生命,临死时修观增长,证得圣道之后才死去,这样死去的人当中也有圣者。按照这个道理,由于自己结束自己生命的人当中也有圣者,因为夹杂了圣者,所以没有说“愚痴人”。经文里说“那些比丘”,是针对“诸比丘,那些比丘怎么能自己结束自己的生命呢”这个地方,没有说“愚痴人”,而是说“那些比丘”。巴利
167. Yadipi ariyā neva attanāva attānaṃ jīvitā voropesuṃ, nāññamaññampi jīvitā voropesuṃ, nāpi migalaṇḍikaṃ samaṇakuttakaṃ upasaṅkamitvā samādapesuṃ, tathāpi yathāvuttehi tīhi pakārehi matānaṃ antare ariyānampi sabbhāvato ‘‘ariyapuggalamissakattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hi ariyā pāṇātipātaṃ kariṃsu na samādapesuṃ, nāpi samanuññā ahesuṃ. Atha vā puthujjanakāle attanāva attānaṃ ghātetvā maraṇasamaye vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā ariyamaggaṃ paṭilabhitvā matānampi ariyānaṃ sabbhāvato imināva nayena attanāva attānaṃ jīvitā voropanassa ariyānampi sabbhāvato ariyapuggalamissakattā ‘‘moghapurisā’’ti na vuttaṃ. ‘‘Te bhikkhū’’ti vuttanti ‘‘kathañhi nāma te, bhikkhave, bhikkhū attanāpi attānaṃ jīvitā voropessantī’’ti ettha ‘‘moghapurisā’’ti avatvā ‘‘te bhikkhū’’ti vuttaṃ.
非施设论的注释巴利
Anupaññattikathāvaṇṇanā
168 168. 所谓“心被女人系缚”,就是指以欲贪而染著、有所期待的状态,所以经文说“染著、有所期待”。赞叹死亡的功德,是以先显示生命的过患为前提的,所以说“显示了生命的过患后”。“你拿这邪恶、难以活命的生命做什么?”这一段是显示生命的过患。“你死了比活着更好”等等,则应当看作是对死亡功德的赞叹。因为贪等烦恼极度增盛,不经审察就做出的鲁莽行为,叫作罪过,所以说“罪过就是鲁莽行为,贪等烦恼增盛”。为什么这样说呢?因为这是六群比丘说的话。“死”这个词,就像“已去”等词一样,是表示状态的词,所以说“你的死”。“已作时”就是已经死亡之时;或者,“时”是死亡的别名,因此“已作时”的意思就是已经死亡。所以经文说“作了时,死了”。“天”指生于天界者,所以说“生于天界者”。“具足”就是相应。“成为具足者”就是完全成为一体。巴利
168. Itthīsu paṭibaddhacittatā nāma chandarāgena sārattatā sāpekkhabhāvoti āha ‘‘sārattā apekkhavanto’’ti. Maraṇassa guṇakittanaṃ jīvite ādīnavadassanapubbaṅgamanti āha ‘‘jīvite ādīnavaṃ dassetvā’’ti. ‘‘Kiṃ tuyhiminā pāpakena dujjīvitenā’’ti idaṃ jīvite ādīnavadassanaṃ. ‘‘Mataṃ te jīvitā seyyo’’tiādi pana maraṇaguṇakittananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Lobhādīnaṃ ativiya ussannattā anupaparikkhitvā kataṃ sāhasikakammaṃ kibbisanti vuccatīti āha – ‘‘kibbisaṃ sāhasikakammaṃ lobhādikilesussada’’nti. Kasmā idaṃ vuccatīti chabbaggiyānaṃyevedaṃ vacanaṃ. Mata-saddo ‘‘gata’’ntiādīsu viya bhāvavacanoti āha ‘‘tava maraṇa’’nti. Katakāloti katamaraṇakālo. Atha vā kāloti maraṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tasmā katakāloti katamaraṇoti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘kālaṃ katvā, maritvā’’ti. Divi bhavā dibbāti āha ‘‘devaloke uppannehī’’ti. Samappitoti yutto. Samaṅgībhūtoti sammadeva ekībhāvaṃ gato.
词分别的注释巴利
Padabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
172 “ussukkavacana”指的是表达先前动作的词。因为在表达同一主体的前后动作时,表达先前动作的词有这样的语法称呼。对于“sañcicca”(故意)这个词,在词分别中本应按照字面,以先前动作的方式解释为“知道之后、识别之后、思量之后、违犯之后”,但没有那样说,而是以“知道者、识别者”为补特伽罗的立足点,又因为“思量之后、违犯之后、违犯”是就夺命的目的而说的,所以说“不注重字面”。虽然笼统地说“知道者”,但由于经文说“故意夺取人的生命”,这里的“知道”是以有情为对象,所以说“知道是有情”,意思是知道“这是众生”。因为“有情”在世俗说法上指众生,在胜义上指命根。不说“知道是人”而说“知道是有情”,是为了表明:即使不知道“这是人”,仅仅以众生想而杀害,也构成巴拉基格。正因如此,在《羊群分别》中,显示了以羊想杀害人类众生的人也犯巴拉基格。所以,不说“是人”,而笼统地说“知道是有情”。巴利
172.Ussukkavacananti pubbakālakiriyāvacanaṃ. Ayañhi samānakattukesu pubbāparakālakiriyāvacanesu pubbakālakiriyāvacanassa niruttivohāro. Sañciccāti imassa padassa ‘‘jānitvā sañjānitvā cecca abhivitaritvā’’ti evaṃ pubbakālakiriyāvasena byañjanānurūpaṃ katvā padabhājane vattabbe tathā avatvā ‘‘jānanto sañjānanto’’ti puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā ‘‘cecca abhivitaritvā vītikkamo’’ti jīvitā voropanassa ca tadatthavasena niddiṭṭhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘byañjane ādaraṃ akatvā’’ti. ‘‘Jānanto’’ti avisesena vuttepi ‘‘sañcicca manussaviggahaṃ jīvitā voropeyyā’’ti vuttattā pāṇavisayamettha jānananti āha ‘‘pāṇoti jānanto’’ti, satto ayanti jānantoti attho. Pāṇoti hi vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ vuccati. ‘‘Manussaviggahoti jānanto’’ti avatvā ‘‘pāṇoti jānanto’’ti vacanaṃ ‘‘manusso aya’’nti ajānitvā kevalaṃ sattasaññāya ghātentassapi pārājikabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Teneva eḷakacatukke (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.174) eḷakasaññāya manussapāṇaṃ vadhantassa pārājikāpatti dassitā. Tasmā ‘‘manussaviggaho’’ti avatvā ‘‘pāṇoti jānanto’’ti avisesena vuttaṃ.
在这里,“识知”的“共”字与“俱”字意思相同,所以注释说“以了知有情的那个行相一起了知”,意思是:以了知有情的那个行相,同时了知“我断送他的生命”。虽然同一个心识不可能同时以两个对象为所缘,因此以“有情”为了知对象和以“我断送生命”为了知对象不可能在同一刹那生起,但这里是就还没有舍弃“有情”这个概念而了知“我杀”来说的,所以说“以那个……一起了知”。因此“俱”的意思就是“不舍弃”。不过有些论师说:“就像以了知智在已见自性的诸法上,以审察智安立三特相,在同一刹那了知‘色是无常’等特相与自性一样,这个人也是在‘我杀这个有情’时,与自己的行为一起了知。”但其他老师对这一点并不这样说。巴利
Sañjānantoti ettha saha-saddena samānattho saṃ-saddoti āha – ‘‘teneva pāṇajānanākārena saddhiṃjānanto’’ti, teneva pāṇajānanākārena saddhiṃ jīvitā voropemīti jānantoti attho. Yadipi ekasseva cittassa ubhayārammaṇabhāvāsambhavato pāṇoti jānanena saddhiṃ jīvitā voropemīti jānanaṃ ekakkhaṇe na sambhavati, pāṇotisaññaṃ pana avijahitvā māremīti jānanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘teneva…pe… saddhiṃ jānanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā saddhinti avijahitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Keci pana ‘‘ñātapariññāya diṭṭhasabhāvesu dhammesu tīraṇapariññāya tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā ‘rūpaṃ anicca’ntiādinā sabhāvena saddhiṃ ekakkhaṇe aniccādilakkhaṇajānanaṃ viya ‘imaṃ pāṇaṃ māremī’ti attano kiriyāya saddhiṃyeva jānātī’’ti vadanti. Apare pana ācariyā tatthāpi evaṃ na kathenti.
以杀心而思量:就是带着“我要杀这个人”的杀心去思量。筹划:就是以心决断“我杀”或“不杀”。决意:就是作出决定。因此说“遣出没有疑虑的心”。依方便:就是依亲手等方便。如此生起者:就是按上述方式生起者。“故意”一词是未完成语,“断其命”一词是后时行为的词;虽然凭后者已说明了完全究竟的违犯,但为了显示“故意”一词所指的、尚未究竟的违犯同样达到究竟,故对“违犯”一词加以分别。因此说:这样就说明了“故意”一词的究竟义。巴利
Vadhakacetanāvasena cetetvāti ‘‘imaṃ māremī’’ti vadhakacetanāya cintetvā. Pakappetvāti ‘‘vadhāmi na’’nti evaṃ cittena paricchinditvā. Abhivitaritvāti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā. Tenevāha ‘‘nirāsaṅkacittaṃ pesetvā’’ti. Upakkamavasenāti sāhatthikādiupakkamavasena. Evaṃ pavattassāti evaṃ yathāvuttavidhinā pavattassa. Kiñcāpi ‘‘sañciccā’’ti imassa vippakatavacanattā ‘‘jīvitā voropeyyā’’ti imināva aparakālakiriyāvacanena sabbathā pariniṭṭhitavītikkamo vutto, tathāpi ‘‘sañciccā’’ti iminā vuccamānaṃ apariyositavītikkamampi avasānaṃ pāpetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘vītikkamo’’ti padabhājanaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘ayaṃ sañciccasaddassa sikhāppatto atthoti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti.
从最初开始,是指从与结生识一起生起的羯罗蓝色法开始。躺卧在这里,所以叫卧处;被称为母腹的胎是这些众生的卧处,所以叫胎卧者,也就是卵生和胎生。为了显示一切胎卧者中最微细的有情身体,才说了“在母胎中”等话,并不是为了限定巴拉基格罪的对象。因为化生和湿生的人也是巴拉基格罪的对象。而且,这最初的人形是不可能被夺命的。因为与结生心一起生起的三十种业生色法,在它们还存续的时候,只有十六个有分心生起又灭去。在这段时间里,已经结生的胎儿或母亲都没有危险。这确实是没有死亡机会的时期。因为在十六个心刹那的时间里,胎儿不会死亡,那时死心不可能生起;母亲也不可能不超过那段时间就紧接着成为具死亡法性者,因为那时根本不可能怀胎。由于取了心,其余的非色法也因为不相离而一并被取,而且名身只有在色身的支持下才能在五蕴有中运作,所以说“完整的五蕴结生也被显示了”。这里“完整的五蕴结生”应当理解为圆满无缺的色等五蕴的结生,而不是“完整的五蕴有中的结生”。因此说“所以那最初的心……羯罗蓝色,这就是最初的人形”。有人说“当天出生的羊的毛是生毛”。另一些人说“雪山地方出生的羊的毛是生毛”。据说雪山中确实有一些毛质细软的羊。还有人说是“剖开胎取出的羊毛是生毛”。巴利
Ādito paṭṭhāyāti paṭisandhiviññāṇena saddhiṃ uppannakalalarūpato paṭṭhāya. Sayanti etthāti seyyā, mātukucchisaṅkhāto gabbho seyyā etesanti gabbhaseyyakā, aṇḍajā jalābujā ca. Tesaṃ gabbhaseyyakānaṃ vasena sabbasukhumattabhāvadassanatthaṃ ‘‘yaṃ mātukucchismi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ, na pārājikavatthuniyamanatthaṃ. Opapātikasaṃsedajāpi hi manussā pārājikavatthumeva. Na cevimaṃ sabbapaṭhamaṃ manussaviggahaṃ jīvitā voropetuṃ sakkā. Paṭisandhicittena hi saddhiṃ tiṃsa kammajarūpāni nibbattanti, tesu pana ṭhitesuyeva soḷasa bhavaṅgacittāni uppajjitvā nirujjhanti. Etasmiṃ antare gahitapaṭisandhikassa dārakassa vā mātuyā vā panassa antarāyo natthi. Ayañhi maraṇassa anokāso nāma. Ekasmiñhi soḷasacittakkhaṇe kāle dārakassa maraṇaṃ natthi tadā cuticittassa asambhavato, mātuyāpi tattakaṃ kālaṃ anatikkamitvā tadanantareyeva cavanadhammāya gabbhaggahaṇasseva asambhavato. Cittaggahaṇeneva avinābhāvato sesaarūpadhammānampi gahitattā rūpakāyupatthambhitasseva ca nāmakāyassa pañcavokāre pavattisabbhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘sakalāpi pañcavokārapaṭisandhi dassitā hotī’’ti. Tattha sakalāpipañcavokārapaṭisandhīti paripuṇṇā anūnā rūpādipañcakkhandhānaṃ paṭisandhīti evamattho gahetabbo, na pana sakalāpi pañcavokārabhave paṭisandhīti. Tenevāha ‘‘tasmā tañca paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ…pe… kalalarūpanti ayaṃ sabbapaṭhamo manussaviggaho’’ti. ‘‘Tadahujātassa eḷakassa lomaṃ jātiuṇṇā’’ti keci. ‘‘Himavantappadese jātimantaeḷakalomaṃ jātiuṇṇā’’ti apare. Sukhumajātilomā eva kira keci eḷakā himavante vijjanti. ‘‘Gabbhaṃ phāletvā gahitaeḷakalomaṃ jātiuṇṇā’’ti aññe.
以一根纤维为准,这是依据小诵师的主张说的。他们这样说:“胎生众生在结生的刹那,五蕴不分先后,同时显现。在那个刹那显现的、称为羯罗蓝的色相续极为微细,只够被一只小苍蝇一次振翅所吹落。”说了之后,他们又驳斥说:“这太多了,应该像把细针投入油中取出后,油滴落下来停在针尖上的那一滴那么少。”又驳斥这一说:“像从油中取出一根头发,油滴落下来停在发尖上的那一滴那么少。”又驳斥这一说:“这个国家的人把头发劈成八份,其中一份的量就是北俱卢洲人的头发;从澄清的芝麻油中取出这样一根头发,油滴停在它尖端的那一滴那么少。”又驳斥这一说:“所谓生毛非常细,取它的一根丝投入澄清的芝麻油中取出,油滴落下来停在尖端的那一滴那么少。”这些是小诵师们说的。而相应诵师则说:“用三根生毛纺成的线,其尖端所停的油滴之量,就是羯罗蓝的量。”“清澈”,是用另一种说法来说明前面所说的意思,即“极清”。巴利
Ekena aṃsunāti khuddakabhāṇakānaṃ matena vuttaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘gabbhaseyyakasattānaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe pañcakkhandhā apacchā apure ekato pātubhavanti. Tasmiṃ khaṇe pātubhūtā kalalasaṅkhātā rūpasantati parittā hoti khuddakamakkhikāya ekavāyāmena pātabbamattā’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘atibahuṃ etaṃ, saṇhasūciyā tele pakkhipitvā ukkhittāya paggharitvā agge ṭhitabindumatta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tampi paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘ekakese telato uddharitvā gahite tassa paggharitvā agge ṭhitabindumatta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tampi paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘imasmiṃ janapade manussānaṃ kese aṭṭhadhā phālite tato ekakoṭṭhāsappamāṇo uttarakurukānaṃ keso, tassa pasannatilatelato uddhaṭassa agge ṭhitabindumatta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tampi paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘jātiuṇṇā nāma sukhumā, tassā ekaaṃsuno pasannatilatele pakkhipitvā uddhaṭassa paggharitvā agge ṭhitabindumatta’’nti (vibha. aṭṭha. 26) khuddakabhāṇakehi vuttaṃ. Saṃyuttabhāṇakā pana ‘‘tīhi jātiuṇṇaṃsūhi katasuttagge saṇṭhitatelabinduppamāṇaṃ kalalaṃ hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.235) vadanti. ‘‘Accha’’nti vuttamatthaṃ pariyāyantarena vibhāveti ‘‘vippasanna’’nti.
熟酥就是澄清的酥油。把“如”这个字引来之后,在这里也应当连起来理解:这里所说的熟酥,也是指如前面所说的一滴油滴那样大小的量。“如是色类”,是指由前面所说的量和形状所限定者。或者,“如是色类”就是指这样的颜色、这样的形状。又或者,类就是分类的意思;所谓相似性的分类,意思就是获得相似性。具有这样色类者,因为从颜色和形状上都获得了相似性,所以名为“如是色类”。“称为羯罗蓝”,是指由四大及所造色构成、依相续而转起的有情自体,它名为羯罗蓝。“寿百二十岁者”只是举例,因为人类中寿命少于此数或多于此数的也都存在。巴利
Sappimaṇḍoti pasannasappi. Yathāti idaṃ ānetvā etthāpi sambandhitabbaṃ, sappimaṇḍopi vuttabinduppamāṇova idha adhippeto. Evaṃvaṇṇappaṭibhāganti vuttappamāṇasaṇṭhānaparicchinnaṃ . Atha vā evaṃvaṇṇappaṭibhāganti evaṃvaṇṇaṃ evaṃsaṇṭhānañca. Paṭibhajanaṃ vā paṭibhāgo, sadisatābhajanaṃ sadisatāpattīti attho. Evaṃvidho vaṇṇappaṭibhāgo rūpato saṇṭhānato ca sadisatāpatti etassāti evaṃvaṇṇappaṭibhāgaṃ. Kalalanti pavuccatīti bhūtupādārūpasaṅkhāto santānavasena pavattamāno attabhāvo kalalaṃ nāmāti kathīyati. Vīsavassasatāyukassāti nidassanamattaṃ tato ūnādhikāyukamanussānampi sabbhāvato.
“在羯罗蓝时期”,说的是在第一个七天之内,依相续而现起的、被称为羯罗蓝的那个自体,这时还可以被夺去生命,就是针对这个说的。或者说“从此以后”,是针对第二个七天等阶段、已经达到頞部陀等状态说的。已生起的诸法不是以自身的坏灭而灭尽的吗?那中间不可能被切断啊。既然这样,为什么说“因此……断绝、阻碍命根”呢?回答说:“因为命根的相续被破坏……所以说为阻碍。”这个道理怎么理解呢?说“这个道理”等等。巴利
Kalalakālepīti paṭhamasattāhabbhantare yaṃ santativasena pavattamānaṃ kalalasaṅkhātaṃ attabhāvaṃ jīvitā voropetuṃ sakkā, taṃ sandhāya vadati. Tato vā uddhanti dutiyasattāhādīsu abbudādibhāvappattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Nanu ca uppannānaṃ dhammānaṃ sarasanirodheneva nirujjhanato antarā upacchedo na sakkā kātuṃ, ‘‘tasmā…pe… jīvitindriyaṃ upacchindati uparodhetī’’ti kasmā vuttanti āha – ‘‘jīvitindriyassa paveṇīghaṭanaṃ…pe… uparodhetīti vuccatī’’ti. Kathañcāyamattho viññāyatīti āha ‘‘svāyamattho’’tiādi.
这里有人问(《心义灯》1.5;《如是语注》74):在每一个刹那都以坏灭为自性的诸行当中,谁是杀者?谁又被杀?如果是心和心所的相续,它没有色法,就不能用切割、分裂等方式来伤害它,也不可能被伤害。如果是色法的相续,它没有心识,就像木桩一样,那么对它就不可能像对死尸那样以切割等方式成立杀生。再者,杀生的加行——也就是前面说的打击、敲击等——是施加在过去诸行上,还是未来诸行上,还是现在诸行上?在这里,过去和未来的诸行不可能,因为它们不存在;而现在的诸行,因为是刹那性的,以自性就在坏灭,正走向毁灭,所以加行就成了没有用的。而且毁灭不需要原因,所以死亡并不是由打击、敲击等加行造成的。又因为诸行没有造作者,那这个加行又是谁做的呢?由于是刹那性的,当作用结束、与杀意同时坏灭的那个所缘境,又是谁被杀生业所系缚呢?巴利
Etthāha (sārattha. ṭī. 1.5; itivu. aṭṭha. 74) – khaṇe khaṇe nirujjhanasabhāvesu saṅkhāresu ko hanti, ko vā haññati, yadi cittacetasikasantāno, so arūpatāya na chedanabhedanādivasena vikopanasamattho, napi vikopanīyo. Atha rūpasantāno, so acetanatāya kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamoti na tattha chedanādinā pāṇātipāto labbhati yathā matasarīre. Payogopi pāṇātipātassa yathāvutto paharaṇappahārādiko atītesu vā saṅkhāresu bhaveyya anāgatesu vā paccuppannesu vā, tattha na tāva atītānāgatesu sambhavati tesaṃ abhāvato, paccuppannesu ca saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikattā saraseneva nirujjhanasabhāvatāya vināsābhimukhesu nippayojano payogo siyā, vināsassa ca kāraṇarahitattā na paharaṇappahārādippayogahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, nirīhakatāya ca saṅkhārānaṃ kassa so payogo, khaṇikattā vadhādhippāyasamakālabhijjanakassa kiriyāpariyosānakaālānavaṭṭhānato kassa vā pāṇātipātakammabaddhoti?
有人说:与杀心相应的诸行聚集,被称为“有情”的,就是被杀的对象。由它所发动的杀生加行之相,使已经离开的识与命根成为“死”这一假名生起的依据;如果没作所说的杀生加行,本来应当生起的色与非色法聚集就被杀害。或者,纯粹的心与心所的相续,即使不是杀生加行的直接对象,但在五蕴有中,它依止色相续而运转;当他人以断绝命根的加行,破坏了能产生与它相似的色法生起时,这个相续就被切断。所以杀生并非不可能,杀生也不是无因,加行也不是没有作用。因为对现在的诸行,依所施加的加行,紧接着本应生起的诸行聚,就不再那样生起。刹那的诸行是刹那灭的,在这里不被当作“死”;而相续的死,按上面所说的道理,是有因的,所以死不是无因。杀生加行也不是没有作者,因为即使在无造作的诸行中,仅仅以存在而助成,在各自决定产生相应果报的诸因中,就可以安立“作者”的假名,就像说“灯照亮,月照亮”一样。再者,并非单纯与杀意俱起的心与心所聚就被认为是杀生,因为只承认依相续而安立;而且依相续而运转的灯等,也能见到其作用成立。因此,确实有被杀生业所系缚的。这个道理在不与取等中,也应随其所应而阐明。巴利
Vuccate – vadhakacetanāsahito saṅkhārānaṃ puñjo sattasaṅkhāto hanti. Tena pavattitavadhappayoganimittaṃ apagatusmāviññāṇajīvitindriyo matavohārappavattinibandhano yathāvuttavadhappayogākaraṇe uppajjanāraho rūpārūpadhammasamūho haññati, kevalo vā cittacetasikasantāno vadhappayogāvisayabhāvepi tassa pañcavokārabhave rūpasantānādhīnavuttitāya rūpasantāne parena payojitajīvitindriyupacchedakapayogavasena tannibbattivinibandhakavisadisarūpuppattiyā vihate vicchedo hotīti na pāṇātipātassa asambhavo, napi ahetuko pāṇātipāto, na ca payogo nippayojano paccuppannesu saṅkhāresu katappayogavasena tadanantaraṃ uppajjanārahassa saṅkhārakalāpassa tathā anuppattito. Khaṇikānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikamaraṇassa idha maraṇabhāvena anadhippetattā santatimaraṇassa ca yathāvuttanayena sahetukabhāvato na ahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, na ca katturahito pāṇātipātappayogo nirīhakesupi saṅkhāresu sannihitatāmattena upakārakesu attano attano anurūpaphaluppādane niyatesu kāraṇesu kattuvohārasiddhito yathā ‘‘padīpo pakāseti, nisākaro candimā’’ti. Na ca kevalassa vadhādhippāyasahabhuno cittacetasikakalāpassa pāṇātipāto icchito santānavasena avaṭṭhitasseva paṭijānanato, santānavasena pavattamānānañca padīpādīnaṃ atthakiriyāsiddhi dissatīti attheva pāṇātipātena kammunā baddho. Ayañca vicāro adinnādānādīsupi yathāsambhavaṃ vibhāvetabbo.
不能杀,意思是不能用加行来杀。“只有七八个速行心刹那”,这是按小诵师的意见说的。但相应部诵师先说“色相续、非色相续”两种相续,然后说:“比如踏水走过去的人,直到岸上被踏过的水痕还没有澄清;从远路来的人,直到身上的热气还没有消退;从阳光下进来、进入内室的人,直到黑暗还没有消失;在内室中作意业处,白天打开窗户往外看的人,直到眼睛的颤动还没有平息——这叫做色相续。两三个速行心刹那,叫做非色相续。”又说:“这两者都叫做相续现在。”中诵师则说:“属于一个或两个相续刹那的,是相续现在。其中,在黑暗中坐着,然后走到有光的地方,所缘并不是马上就变得明显。直到它变得明显,这中间生起的色相续或非色相续,应当知道叫做一个或两个相续刹那。在光明处走动后,进入内室的人,色法也不是马上就变得明显。直到它变得明显,这中间生起的色相续或非色相续,应当知道是一个或两个相续刹那。又,站在远处,虽然看见染衣人的手势和敲钟击鼓的动作,也不是马上就听到声音。直到他听到声音,在这中间也应当知道是一个或两个相续刹那。”在这里,从光明处进入内室的人,乃至先前就已经坐在那里的人,直到色境变得明显,这中间一半时间接近不明显,一半时间接近明显,把这两部分合起来说,就叫做“两个相续刹那”。这并不是普遍适用的,对某些人来说很快就变得明显,所以也笼统地说成“一个或两个相续刹那”。巴利
Voropetuṃ na sakkāti upakkamena voropetuṃ na sakkā. Sattaṭṭhajavanavāramattanti khuddakabhāṇakānaṃ matena vuttaṃ. Saṃyuttabhāṇakā pana ‘‘rūpasantati arūpasantatī’’ti dve santatiyo vatvā ‘‘udakaṃ akkamitvā gatassa yāva tīre akkantaudakalekhā na vippasīdati, addhānato āgatassa yāva kāye usumabhāvo na vūpasammati, ātapā āgantvā gabbhaṃ paviṭṭhassa yāva andhakārabhāvo na vigacchati, antogabbhe kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi karitvā divā vātapānaṃ vivaritvā olokentassa yāva akkhīnaṃ phandanabhāvo na vūpasammati, ayaṃ rūpasantati nāma. Dve tayo javanavārā arūpasantati nāmā’’ti vatvā ‘‘tadubhayampi santatipaccuppannaṃ nāmā’’ti vadanti . Majjhimabhāṇakā pana vadanti ‘‘ekadvesantativārapariyāpannaṃ santatipaccuppannaṃ. Tattha andhakāre nisīditvā ālokaṭṭhānaṃ gatassa na ca tāva ārammaṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Yāva pana taṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, etthantare pavattā rūpasantati arūpasantati vā ekadvesantativārā nāmāti veditabbā. Ālokaṭṭhāne caritvā ovarakaṃ paviṭṭhassapi na tāva sahasā rūpaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Yāva pana taṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, etthantare pavattā rūpasantati arūpasantati vā ekadvesantativārā veditabbā. Dūre ṭhatvā pana rajakānaṃ hatthavikāraṃ ghaṇṭibheriākoṭanavikārañca disvāpi na tāva saddaṃ suṇāti. Yāva pana taṃ suṇāti, etasmimpi antare ekadvesantativārā veditabbā’’ti. Ettha ca ālokaṭṭhānato ovarakaṃ paviṭṭhassa pageva tattha nisinnassa yāva rūpagataṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, tattha upaḍḍhavelā avibhūtappāyā, upaḍḍhavelā vibhūtappāyā tadubhayaṃ gahetvā ‘‘dvesantativārā’’ti vuttaṃ, tayidaṃ na sabbasādhāraṇaṃ, ekaccassa sīghampi pākaṭaṃ hotīti ‘‘ekadvesantativārā’’ti ekaggahaṇampi kataṃ.
“同类相续之力”是指以善、不善、喜、舍等同类相续之力。由此显示了无色相续。“仅七八个速行刹那的量”应理解为仅就欲界速行而言,并非就其他速行而言。因为它们并非时间有限,其间生起的有分等也应视为包含在内。然而,“只要从热处而来……”等,则显示了色法相续。“成为黑暗”是指黑暗不消失。此处,相续现在在注释书中被提及,而经中则为分位现在。正如在《一夜贤者经》中,针对分位现在而说:“贤友,意与诸法,此二者皆为现在。若识于彼现在中被欲贪所系缚,由于识被欲贪所系缚,便欢喜于彼;欢喜于彼者,即被卷入现在诸法中。”在此,“意”指与相应俱的识。“诸法”指所缘法。或者,“意”指意处,“诸法”指受等无色蕴。“此二者皆为现在”的意思是:此二者是分位现在。“识”指渴爱识。因为此识于彼现在中因欲贪而被系缚。“欢喜”指以渴爱、邪见之欢喜而欢喜。如此之人,由于未遍知事理,便被卷入那些现在法中,即被渴爱、邪见所牵引。在此,由于“十二处为一现在”的说法,可知于彼处生起的欲贪是以分位现在为所缘,而非以刹那现在为所缘。巴利
Sabhāgasantativasenāti kusalākusalasomanassupekkhādinā sabhāgasantativasena. Iminā arūpasantati dassitā. Sattaṭṭhajavanavāramattanti ca kāmāvacarajavanavaseneva veditabbaṃ, na itarajavanavasena. Na hi te parimitakālā, antarā pavattabhavaṅgādayopi tadantogadhāti daṭṭhabbā. Yāva vā uṇhato āgantvātiādinā pana rūpasantatiṃ dasseti. Andhakāraṃ hotīti andhakāraṃ na vigacchati. Santatipaccuppannañcettha aṭṭhakathāsu āgataṃ, addhāpaccuppannaṃ sutte. Tathā hi bhaddekarattasutte addhāpaccuppannaṃ sandhāya ‘‘yo cāvuso mano, ye ca dhammā, ubhayametaṃ paccuppannaṃ, tasmiṃ ce paccuppanne chandarāgapaṭibaddhaṃ hoti viññāṇaṃ, chandarāgapaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa tadabhinandati, tadabhinandanto paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīratī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.284) vuttaṃ. Ettha hi manoti sasampayuttaṃ viññāṇamāha. Dhammāti ārammaṇadhammā. Manoti vā manāyatanaṃ. Dhammāti vedanādayo arūpakkhandhā. Ubhayametaṃ paccuppannanti addhāpaccuppannaṃ etaṃ ubhayaṃ hotīti attho. Viññāṇanti nikantiviññāṇaṃ. Tañhi tasmiṃ paccuppanne chandarāgavasena paṭibaddhaṃ hoti. Abhinandatīti taṇhādiṭṭhābhinandanāhi abhinandati . Tathābhūto ca vatthupariññāya abhāvato tesu paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīrati, taṇhādiṭṭhīhi ākaḍḍhīyatīti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘dvādasāyatanāni ekaṃ paccuppanna’’nti āgatattā tattha pavatto chandarāgo addhāpaccuppannārammaṇo, na khaṇapaccuppannārammaṇoti viññāyati.
“有情”是指蕴的相续。因为在这里,“有情”只是一种施设。命根是指色命根和非色命根。因为色命根一旦被破坏,另一个命根也会由于与它相关联而坏灭。所谓“就是前面所说的那种”,是说杀害命根的方式和前面所说的一样。所谓“断命”,就是让本来具有自然坠落性质的东西,在中间就极其迅速地坠落,意思是说不给它慢慢坠落的机会,而让它迅速坠落。或者说,“断命”是超越、用刀杖等制伏后令其坠落。“杀生”就是杀害有情。当命根正在转起时,它以自身的依处——诸大种为所依;由于加行的因缘,以那些大种为缘而生起的诸大种就不再产生。能引发这种加行的思,就是杀生。因此说“由某一思心所……”等等。巴利
Sattoti khandhasantāno. Tattha hi sattapaññatti. Jīvitindriyanti rūpārūpajīvitindriyaṃ. Rūpajīvitindriye hi vikopite itarampi taṃsambandhatāya vinassatīti. Taṃ vuttappakāramevāti taṃ jīvitindriyātipātanavidhānaṃ heṭṭhā vuttappakārameva. Saraseneva patanasabhāvassa antarā eva atīva pātanaṃ atipāto, saṇikaṃ patituṃ adatvā sīghapātananti attho. Atikkamma vā satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātanaṃ atipāto, pāṇassa atipāto pāṇātipāto. Yāya cetanāya pavattamānassa jīvitindriyassa nissayabhūtesu mahābhūtesu upakkamakaraṇahetu taṃmahābhūtapaccayā uppajjanamahābhūtā nuppajjissanti, sā tādisappayogasamuṭṭhāpikā vadhakacetanā pāṇātipāto. Tenāha ‘‘yāya cetanāyā’’tiādi.
打击:指带着身体动作表达的杀心,用来达成想要的目的。命令:指带着言语表达的杀心,用来达成想要的目的。正因为这样,才说“想让他听到却不让他听到”等等。放下:指把刀剑等物放在他那里。巴利
Paharaṇanti kāyaviññattisahitāya vadhakacetanāya adhippetatthasādhanaṃ. Āṇāpananti vacīviññattisahitāya vadhakacetanāya adhippetatthasādhanaṃ. Teneva ‘‘sāvetukāmo na sāvetī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Upanikkhipananti asiādīnaṃ tassa upanikkhipanaṃ.
为了把注释书里说的义理简要地展示出来,就说了“略而言之”等话。其中,“明咒念诵”指的是咒语的念诵。现在为了展示注释书中详细阐述的义理,就说了“然而在注释书中……”等话。其中,“阿闼婆那者”指精通阿闼婆那吠陀的人。“施行阿闼婆那”指按照阿闼婆那吠陀所规定的仪轨,施行其中所说的咒语。阿闼婆那者七天里吃无盐的食物,铺开达婆草躺在地上,修习苦行,到第七天布置好坟场,站在第七步的位置,反复转动手臂,用口念诵明咒,于是他们的作法就能成就。“对敌军”这个词,可以和上面或下面的词搭配来理解。“生起灾祸”指为了杀死对方而放出蝎子之类,让它们蜇咬,从而造成伤害。“eti”即“īti”(灾祸)。“祸患”指比那更严重的伤害。“热病”指毒热病。“针痛”指像用针穿刺大肢小肢那样产生的剧痛。“绞肠痧”指伴有剧痛的痢疾。“赤痢”指血痢。“翻转明咒后”指对犍陀罗明咒等自己的明咒,通过念诵加以运用,按照诵咒的次第诵持之后。“以那些”指以那些事物。巴利
Aṭṭhakathāsu vuttamatthaṃ saṅkhipitvā dassento ‘‘saṅkhepato’’tiādimāha. Tattha vijjāparijappananti mantaparijappanaṃ. Idāni aṭṭhakathāsu vitthāritamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘aṭṭhakathāsu panā’’tiādi. Tattha āthabbaṇikāti āthabbaṇavedavedino. Āthabbaṇaṃ payojentīti āthabbaṇavedavihitaṃ mantaṃ tattha vuttavidhinā payojenti. Āthabbaṇikā hi sattāhaṃ aloṇakaṃ bhuñjitvā dabbe attharitvā pathaviyaṃ sayamānā tapaṃ caritvā sattame divase susānabhūmiṃ sajjetvā sattame pade ṭhatvā hatthaṃ vaṭṭetvā vaṭṭetvā mukhena vijjaṃ parijappanti, atha nesaṃ kammaṃ samijjhati. Paṭisenāyāti idaṃ heṭṭhā upari vā padadvayena sambandhamupagacchati. Ītiṃuppādentīti ḍaṃsitvā māraṇatthāya vicchikādīnaṃ vissajjanavasena pīḷaṃ uppādenti . Etīti īti. Upaddavanti tato adhikatarapīḷaṃ. Pajjarakanti visamajjaraṃ. Sūcikanti aṅgapaccaṅgāni sūcīhi viya vijjhitvā pavattamānaṃ sūlaṃ. Visūcikanti sasūlaṃ āmātisāraṃ. Pakkhandiyanti rattātisāraṃ. Vijjaṃ parivattetvāti gandhāravijjādikaṃ attano vijjaṃ katupacāraṃ parijappitvā mantapaṭhanakkamena paṭhitvā. Tehīti tehi vatthūhi.
“作用”指正在发生。“见”等句,是依照见毒等情形按顺序说的。“拔起两百寻大的龙”:指把现成两百寻巨大身躯站立的龙拔起来。“瓮腹天”:指瓮腹天众。据说那些天众大腹龙王便便,私处也大得像瓮,所以叫“瓮腹天”。虽然多闻天王是夜叉之主,但这里说到他用眼作武器令瓮腹天死亡,所以应当知道他们也归他管辖。巴利
Payojananti pavattamānaṃ. Disvātiādi diṭṭhavisādīnaṃ yathākkamena vuttaṃ. Dvattibyāmasatappamāṇanāguddharaṇeti dvattibyāmasatappamāṇe mahākāye nimminitvā ṭhitānaṃ nāgānaṃ uddharaṇe. Kumbhaṇḍānanti kumbhaṇḍadevānaṃ. Te kira devā mahodarā honti, rahassaṅgampi ca nesaṃ kumbho viya mahantaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘kumbhaṇḍā’’ti vuccanti. Vessavaṇassa yakkhādhipatibhāvepi nayanāvudhena kumbhaṇḍānaṃ maraṇassa idha vuttattā tesupi tassa āṇāpavatti veditabbā.
有些人说,这是大众部的观点。“啊,但愿那个在母胎里的胎儿不能平安地生出来”——这种读法更好。也有“啊,但愿这个……”这样的读法。应该说:“愿这个女人不能平安地生出那个在母胎里的胎儿。”“Kulumbassa”是指胎儿的胎室,或者是指家族,也就是说的“kuṭumbassa”。“修习所成神通”,他们说的是决意神通。神通毁灭就像瓶子破碎,伤害他人就像灭火——这是比喻的对应。那只是他们的一厢情愿——对此要这样审察:你们说以神通伤害他人,而所谓神通,有决意神通、变化神通、意所成神通、智遍满神通、定遍满神通、圣神通、业异熟生神通、有福者神通、明所成神通,因为处处以正勤为缘而成就,所以称为神通,共有十种。其中你们说的是哪一种神通呢?“修习所成神通。”那么,修习所成神通能做出伤害他人的事吗?是的,能做一次。就像向燃烧的房屋上方投掷装满水的瓶子,瓶子破碎了,火也熄灭了;同样,修习所成神通能做一次伤害他人的事,从那时起它就消失了。然后对他们说“修习所成神通不能做一次、两次伤害他人的事”,为了让他们接受,应该问:“修习所成神通是善、不善、无记?是与乐受相应、与苦受相应、与不苦不乐受相应?是有寻有伺、无寻唯伺、无寻无伺?是欲界、色界、无色界?”巴利
Kecīti mahāsaṅghikā. ‘‘Aho vata yaṃ taṃ kucchigataṃ gabbhaṃ na sotthinā abhinikkhameyyā’’ti pāṭho sundarataro. ‘‘Aho vatāyaṃ ta’’ntipi pāṭho. ‘‘Ayaṃ itthī taṃ kucchigataṃ gabbhaṃ na sotthinā abhinikkhāmeyyā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Kulumbassāti gabbhassa kulasseva vā, kuṭumbassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhāvanāmayiddhiyāti adhiṭṭhāniddhiṃ sandhāya vadanti. Ghaṭabhedanaṃ viya iddhivināso, agginibbāpanaṃ viya parūpaghātoti upamāsaṃsandanaṃ. Taṃ tesaṃ icchāmattamevāti etthāyaṃ vicāraṇā – tumhe iddhiyā parūpaghātaṃ vadetha, iddhi nāma cesā adhiṭṭhāniddhi vikubbaniddhi manomayiddhi ñāṇavipphāriddhi samādhivipphāriddhi ariyiddhi kammavipākajiddhi puññavatoiddhi vijjāmayiddhi tattha tattha sammāpayogapaccayā ijjhanaṭṭhena iddhīti dasavidhā. Tattha kataraṃ iddhiṃ vadethāti? Bhāvanāmayanti. Kiṃ pana bhāvanāmayiddhiyā parūpaghātakammaṃ hotīti? Āma ekavāraṃ hoti. Yathā hi ādittagharassa upari udakabharite ghaṭe khitte ghaṭopi bhijjati, aggipi nibbāyati, evameva bhāvanāmayiddhiyā ekavāraṃ parūpaghātakammaṃ hoti, tato paṭṭhāya pana sā nassatīti. Atha ne ‘‘bhāvanāmayiddhiyā neva ekavāraṃ, na dve vāre parūpaghātakammaṃ hotī’’ti vatvā saññattiṃ āgacchantā pucchitabbā ‘‘bhāvanāmayiddhi kiṃ kusalā, akusalā, abyākatā, sukhāya vedanāya sampayuttā, dukkhāya , adukkhamasukhāya, savitakkasavicārā, avitakkavicāramattā, avitakkaavicārā, kāmāvacarā, rūpāvacarā, arūpāvacarā’’ti.
对于这个问题,那些知道的人会这样说:“修习所成的神通,要么是善的,要么是无记的,只属于不苦不乐受,只属于无寻无伺,只属于色界。”应该对他们说:“杀生的思,在善、不善等当中,归入哪一类?”知道的人会说:“杀生的思只是不善,只属于苦受,只属于有寻有伺,只属于欲界。”既然这样,你们的说法既不符合善三法,也不符合受三法,不符合寻三法,也不符合小大无量三法。那么,这么大的一部经就没有意义了吗?并非没有意义,只是你们不了解它的含义。“有神通者、心得自在者”——这里指的不是修习所成的神通,而是指阿闼婆神通。因为在这里,能获得的就是那种神通。巴利
Imaṃ pana pañhaṃ ye jānanti, te evaṃ vakkhanti ‘‘bhāvanāmayiddhi kusalā vā hoti abyākatā vā, adukkhamasukhavedanīyā eva, avitakkaavicārā eva, rūpāvacarā evā’’ti. Te vattabbā ‘‘pāṇātipātacetanā kusalākusalādīsu kataraṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ bhajatī’’ti. Jānantā vakkhanti ‘‘pāṇātipātacetanā akusalāva, dukkhavedanīyāva, savitakkasavicārāva, kāmāvacarā evā’’ti. Evaṃ sante ‘‘tumhākaṃ kathā neva kusalattikena sameti, na vedanāttikena, na vitakkattikena, na parittattikenā’’ti. Kiṃ pana evaṃ mahantaṃ suttaṃ niratthakanti? No niratthakaṃ, tumhe panassa atthaṃ na jānātha. Iddhimā cetovasippattoti ettha hi na bhāvanāmayiddhi adhippetā, āthabbaṇiddhi pana adhippetā. Sā hi ettha labbhamānā labbhatīti.
“应携带、应放置”就是“hāra”,而“hāra”本身就是“hāraka”,所以经文说“atha vā”(或者)等等。这里用两种分别的方式来说:一是能夺命、应放置的刀,二是应放置的刀的携带者。本来应该说“hārakasattha”(携带之刀),却说成“satthahāraka”(刀之携带者),这是把修饰语放到了后面。“如其所获得,就应那样做”——这是说明其意图。“应放置”显示了“应寻求”的究竟之义。“否则”的意思是:如果不把“应寻求”理解为“应放置”,而认为这里只是指寻求本身。“仅以寻求”就是仅以寻找。对于“或为他寻求能夺命者”这句话所表达的含义,这里虽然把文句完整地说了,却没有说出(其含义),所以说“不依文句”。它切割、伤害,所以叫“sattha”(刀);或者,用它来切割、伤害,所以叫“sattha”。因为棍棒、石块等也包含在“sattha”之中,所以说:“这里要说明的是被粗重加行所包含的刀。”巴利
Haritabbaṃ upanikkhipitabbanti hāraṃ, hārameva hārakanti āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Jīvitaharaṇakaṃ upanikkhipitabbaṃ vā satthaṃ satthahārakanti vikappadvayenāha. ‘‘Hārakasattha’’nti ca vattabbe satthahārakanti visesanassa paranipātaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Yathā labhati, tathā kareyyāti adhippāyatthamāha. Upanikkhipeyyāti ‘‘pariyeseyyā’’ti imassa sikhāppattamatthaṃ dasseti. Itarathāti ‘‘pariyeseyyā’’ti imassa upanikkhipeyyāti evamatthaṃ aggahetvā yadi pariyesanamattameva adhippetaṃ siyāti attho. Pariyiṭṭhamattenāti pariyesitamattena. ‘‘Satthahārakaṃ vāssa pariyeseyyā’’ti iminā vuccamānassa atthassa byañjanānurūpato paripuṇṇaṃ katvā avuttattā āha ‘‘byañjanaṃ anādiyitvā’’ti. Sasati hiṃsatīti satthaṃ, sasanti hiṃsanti tenāti vā satthanti laguḷapāsāṇādīnampi satthasaṅgahitattā āha – ‘‘yaṃ ettha thāvarappayogasaṅgahitaṃ satthaṃ, tadeva dassetu’’nti.
“所说之余”是指除了已经说过的刀等之外剩下的部分。“Laguḷa”是锤子的别名。“刀的包含”是指在论母中“satthahāraka”那里所说的刀的包含。因为……所以,分成两种来解释词义——应当知道,这是显示前面所说的分别法门的分类方式。“或堕地狱等”——这里用“等”字,把后面所说的“或堕悬崖”以及没有说到的“或从树上堕下”等一切致死方式都包括进去了。因此说:“不可能以具体形式把一切都说出来。”因为后面已经说明了方式,也就是后面以结语方式在第二个词的解释中已经说明了方式。“从义理上已经说了”——为了显示致死方式的多种多样,当其中一部分被显示出来时,一切就已经被说了,这是其意图。“不可能……说明”——不可能用“或从树上堕下”等具体形式把一切致死方式都穷尽说明,这是其含义。巴利
Vuttāvasesanti vuttaasiādīhi avasiṭṭhaṃ. Laguḷanti muggarassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Satthasaṅgahoti mātikāyaṃ ‘‘satthahāraka’’nti ettha vuttasatthasaṅgaho. Yasmā…pe… tasmā dvidhā bhinditvā padabhājanaṃ vuttanti īdisaṃ heṭṭhā vuttavibhaṅganayabhedadassananti veditabbaṃ. Narake vā papatātiādīti ettha ādi-saddena ‘‘papāte vā papatā’’ti parato vuttaṃ avuttañca ‘‘rukkhato vā papatā’’tiādi sabbaṃ maraṇūpāyaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tenevāha ‘‘na hi sakkā sabbaṃ sarūpeneva vattu’’nti. Parato vuttanayattāti parato nigamanavasena vuttassa dutiyapadassa padabhājane vuttanayattā. Atthato vuttamevāti maraṇūpāyassa bahuvidhatānidassanatthaṃ, tato ekadese dassite sabbaṃ vuttameva hotīti adhippāyo. Na hi sakkā…pe… vattunti ‘‘rukkhato vā papatā’’tiādinā sarūpato sabbaṃ maraṇūpāyaṃ pariyosānaṃ pāpetvā na sakkā vattunti attho.
“死对你来说比活着更好”这句话里,因为“iti”这个词指向所说的死,所以那里所说的死就是“iti”这个词的含义。于是,取这个含义来说明,说道:“以死为心、以死为意,这就是含义。”这是为了说明“心”的含义而说的。因为“心”这个词有“种种”等多种含义,所以这里的“心”不应看作是在别的含义上使用,而应知道它正是在“识”的含义上使用——这是为了确定这个含义而说的。由此也表明,这里没有重复的过失。因为含义还没有说明,所以引出“iti cittamano”来说;这是为了指出:即使单独引出“iti cittamano”,“iti”所指向的死也还是没有被把握到。而通过“tāva”这个词,则说明后面解释“cittasaṅkappo”这个词时,会用“maraṇasaññī”等说法来讲“iti”这个词的含义。因为在那一处,取“iti”所指向的、名为死的含义,而说“maraṇasaññī maraṇacetano maraṇādhippāyo”。因此他说:“在‘cittasaṅkappo’这个词中,应当根据上下文把‘iti’这个词引进来。”
为什么要引进来呢?他说“idañhi”等。怎么知道这一点呢?他说“tathā hissa”等。“assa”指“iti”这个词。“tameva atthaṃ”指名为死的那个含义。因为在“maraṇasaññī”等说法中,死是“iti”这个词的含义,而“saññī”等则是“saṅkappa”这个词的含义。不过,这里“citta”这个词的“种种”之义,应当看作是通过“saṅkappa”这个词从想、思、意欲三方面显示含义而表明的。因此他说:“citto nānappakārako saṅkappo”等。这里用“adhippāya”这个词说的是什么呢?他说:“adhippāyo 应理解为 vitakka。”这不是 vitakka 的名字——这是为了说明这不仅仅是 vitakka 的名字而说的。应当知道,由于明显和粗显,它是高扬的;由于不明显和不粗显,它是低沉的。巴利
Mataṃte jīvitā seyyoti ettha vuttamaraṇaṃ yasmā iti-saddo nidasseti, tasmā tattha vuttamaraṇaṃ iti-saddassa atthoti tampi gahetvā atthaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘maraṇacitto maraṇamanoti attho’’ti. Cittassa atthadīpanatthaṃ vuttoti citta-saddassa vicittādianekatthavisayattā nāyaṃ citta-saddo idha aññasmiṃ atthe vattamāno daṭṭhabbo, api tu viññāṇasmiṃyeva vattamāno veditabboti tassa atthassa niyamanatthaṃ vutto. Iminā punaruttidosassapi idha anavakāsoti dasseti. Na tāva attho vuttoti ‘‘iti cittamano’’ti uddharitvāpi iti-saddanidassitassa maraṇassa aparāmaṭṭhabhāvato vuttaṃ. Tāva-saddena pana parato ‘‘cittasaṅkappo’’ti imassa padabhājane ‘‘maraṇasaññī’’tiādinā itisaddatthassa vakkhamānataṃ vibhāveti. Tattha hi iti-saddanidassitaṃ maraṇasaṅkhātamatthaṃ gahetvā ‘‘maraṇasaññī maraṇacetano maraṇādhippāyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘cittasaṅkappoti imasmiṃ pade adhikāravasena itisaddo āharitabbo’’ti. Kasmā āharitabboti āha ‘‘idañhī’’tiādi. Kathaṃ panetaṃ viññāyatīti āha ‘‘tathā hissā’’tiādi. Assāti iti-saddassa. Tameva atthanti maraṇasaṅkhātamatthaṃ. ‘‘Maraṇasaññī’’tiādīsu hi maraṇaṃ iti-saddassa attho, ‘‘saññī’’tiādi saṅkappasaddassa. Cittasaddassa panettha vicittavacanatā saṅkappasaddassa saññācetanādhippāyavasena tidhā atthaṃ dassentena vibhāvitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘citto nānappakārako saṅkappo’’tiādi. Adhippāyasaddena kimettha vuttanti āha – ‘‘adhippāyoti vitakko veditabbo’’ti. Na idaṃ vitakkassa nāmanti idaṃ pana na kevalaṃ vitakkasseva nāmanti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Pākaṭattā oḷārikattā ca uccākāratā veditabbā, apākaṭattā anoḷārikattā ca avacākāratā.
174 174. 因为“身”这个词也可以用来指身体的一部分,所以他说“或者用手”等等。所谓“以打击物”,就是用刀剑;人们确实用刀剑去打击,所以那东西被称为“打击物”。所谓“被业所束缚”,就是被杀生业所束缚,意思是杀生业已经完成。在“让任何一个死”这句里,应当这样理解:只要对某一个众生的命根生起了杀心,这杀心并不是只针对因打击而死者的命根,也不是针对群体而起的。所谓“从两方面”,就是按总说和分别说。杀心即使以现在为所缘,也是依相续断绝的方式,以命根为所缘而生起的;所以他说“后来或者由同一种病”等等。因为,当那种能使相续断绝的加行产生时,那时生起的杀心,仅仅在击打之时就被业所束缚。对于身为人类的阿拉汉,如果在凡夫阶段给予刀击或下毒,即使他证得阿拉汉后因此而死,施者仍然是杀阿拉汉的人。然而,在凡夫阶段所给的布施,证得阿拉汉后受用,那布施仍然是给凡夫的。巴利
174. Kāyekadesepi kāya-saddo vattatīti āha ‘‘hatthena vā’’tiādi. Paharaṇenāti satthena. Satthañhi paharanti etenāti paharaṇanti vuccati. Kammunā bajjhatīti pāṇātipātakammunā bajjhati, pāṇātipātakammassa siddhanti vuttaṃ hoti. Yo koci maratūti ettha yassa kassaci ekasseva jīvitindriyavisayā vadhakacetanā pavattati, na pahārapaccayā marantasseva jīvitindriyavisayā, nāpi samūhassāti veditabbā. Ubhayathāpīti uddesānuddesānaṃ vasena. Vadhakacittaṃ paccuppannārammaṇampi jīvitindriyaṃ pabandhavicchedanavasena ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattatīti āha ‘‘pacchā vā teneva rogenā’’tiādi. Yena hi pabandho vicchijjati, tādisaṃ payogaṃ nibbattentaṃ tadā vadhakacittaṃ pavattantaṃ paharitamatteyeva kammunā bajjhati. Manussaarahantassa ca puthujjanakāleyeva satthappahāre vā vise vā dinnepi yadi so arahattaṃ patvā teneva marati, arahantaghātako hotiyeva. Yaṃ pana puthujjanakāle dinnaṃ dānaṃ arahattaṃ patvā paribhuñjati, puthujjanasseva taṃ dinnaṃ hoti.
有人会问:既然一个人在凡夫阶段布施,后来证得阿拉汉果之后才享用,那这份布施仍然算是给凡夫的布施;同样,以杀死对方的意图在凡夫阶段打了他一下,后来那人证得阿拉汉果,就因为这一下而死了,那为什么算作杀阿拉汉,而不是杀凡夫呢?因为两者之间有差别。布施只是把该施舍的东西舍出去而已。布施心也是以该舍之物为所缘,仅仅是一种舍弃,这种舍弃就等于把它变成别人所有,所以它成了谁的所有物,就是布施给了谁。但杀生不是这样。杀生必须圆满具备五个条件:是有情、知道是有情、有杀心、有加行、因这个加行而死;不圆满就不构成杀生。所以,因为死的是阿拉汉,就算杀阿拉汉,不算杀凡夫。不过,当有人生起“我要杀这个人”的杀意,针对某一相续而起了杀心,虽然在凡夫状态和漏尽状态、加行和死亡刹那这些方面,那个相续有差别,但这里把它看作没有差别;而当目的达成的时候,那时已经是漏尽者的状态了,所以应当得出结论:这就是杀阿拉汉。巴利
Nanu ca yathā arahattaṃ patvā paribhuttampi puthujjanakāle dinnaṃ puthujjanadānameva hoti, evaṃ maraṇādhippāyena puthujjanakāle pahāre dinne arahattaṃ patvā teneva pahārena mate kasmā arahantaghātakoyeva hoti, na puthujjanaghātakoti? Visesasabbhāvato. Dānañhi deyyadhammassa pariccāgamattena hoti. Tathā hi dānacetanā cajitabbaṃ vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā cajanamattameva hoti, aññasantakakaraṇaṃva tassa cajanaṃ, tasmā yassa taṃ santakaṃ kataṃ, tasseva taṃ dinnaṃ hoti, na evaṃ vadho. So hi pāṇo pāṇasaññitā vadhakacetanā upakkamo tena maraṇanti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ aṅgānaṃ pāripūriyāva hoti, na apāripūriyā. Tasmā arahattaṃ pattasseva maraṇanti arahantaghātakoyeva hoti, na puthujjanaghātako. Yasmā pana ‘‘imaṃ māremī’’ti yaṃ santānaṃ ārabbha māraṇicchā, tassa puthujjanakhīṇāsavabhāvena payogamaraṇakkhaṇānaṃ vasena satipi santānabhede abhedoyeva, yadā ca atthasiddhi, tadā khīṇāsavabhāvo, tasmā arahantaghātakoyeva hotīti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
以异心,是指没有杀意、不想杀的心。不构成杀生,是因为是以不想杀的心去打。虽然第一击本身不能杀人,但如果接着得到第二击而能杀死对方,那就成为毁灭生命的因。因此,按照“加行以及由此而死”的关联来看,只凭第一击就已经被业所束缚,这是合理的,而不是凭第二击,因为第二击是以异心给出的。因此说:即使因两者而死,也仅以第一击被业所束缚。巴利
Aññacittenāti avadhādhippāyena amāretukāmatācittena. Natthi pāṇātipātoti amāretukāmatācittena pahaṭattā. Kiñcāpi paṭhamappahāro na sayameva sakkoti māretuṃ, dutiyaṃ pana labhitvā sakkonto jīvitavināsanahetu hoti, tasmā ‘‘payogo tena ca maraṇa’’nti iminā saṃsandanato paṭhamappahāreneva kammabaddho yutto, na dutiyena tassa aññacittena dinnattā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhayehi matepi paṭhamappahāreneva kammunā baddho’’ti.
业与罪的区别,是为了说明无间业等的业的分类,以及巴拉基格等的罪的分类。由于“我要杀羊”这一生起的思是前分阶段,而“我要杀这个人”这一决断的思在当时已经现前,所以按照实际情况,他就已经被业所束缚了。因此说“因为存在‘我要杀这个对象’的思”。因为在一切情况下,先前那个衔接的心不是衡量依据,不能靠它成就这件事;而杀心、它的所缘以及命根,在成为无间业等方面才是衡量标准。成为杀害者,就是成为杀生者,意思是仅仅被杀生业所束缚。应当依照前面所说的方式来了知,也就是依次了知为巴拉基格、土喇咤亚、巴吉帝亚。由于对母亲、父亲、阿拉汉中的任何一位生起的前分思,因为对象功德广大而变得凶暴,所以以这样的前分思为助伴的决断思也必然是凶暴的,因此说“但在这里,思是凶暴的”。由此也应当知道:由于“我要杀羊”的前分思并不凶暴,所以与以其他方式生起的无间业相比,这样生起的无间业并非极其凶暴。巴利
Kammāpattibyattibhāvatthanti ānantariyādikammavibhāgassa pārājikādiāpattivibhāgassa ca vibhāvanatthaṃ. ‘‘Eḷakaṃ māremī’’ti pavattacetanāya pubbabhāgattā ‘‘imaṃ māremī’’ti sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya tadā sannihitattā yathāvatthukaṃ kammabaddho hotiyevāti āha ‘‘imaṃ vatthuṃ māremīti cetanāya atthibhāvato’’tiādi. Sabbattha hi purimaṃ abhisandhicittaṃ appamāṇaṃ tena atthasiddhiyā abhāvato, vadhakacittaṃ pana tadārammaṇañca jīvitindriyaṃ anantariyādibhāve pamāṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ghātako ca hotīti pāṇaghātako hoti, pāṇātipātakammunāva baddho hotīti attho. Pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbanti yathākkamaṃ pārājikathullaccayapācittiyāni veditabbāni. ‘‘Mātāpituarahantānaṃ aññataraṃ māremī’’ti guṇamahantesu pavattapubbabhāgacetanāya dāruṇabhāvato tathāvidhapubbabhāgacetanāparivārā sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā dāruṇāva hotīti āha – ‘‘idha pana cetanā dāruṇā hotī’’ti. Iminā ca ‘‘eḷakaṃ māressāmī’’ti mātāpituādīnaṃ māraṇepi pubbabhāgacetanāya adāruṇattā aññathā pavattaānantariyakammato evaṃ pavattānantariyassa nātidāruṇatā vuttāva hotīti daṭṭhabbā.
血染的,就是被血涂染。正在作业,是指正在做打仗这件事。随其所欲而行,是指射中战士并射中父亲。这里说“随其所欲”,是为了显示他确实是这样被射中的。然而,如果箭只是直直飞出去而射中了父亲,虽然并不符合他的意图,但因为他自己以杀意为动机作了加行,所以他们说这并没有不确定之处。不过,这并不构成无间业,因为缺少以父亲为对象而作的加行。巴利
Lohitakanti lohitamakkhitaṃ. Kammaṃ karonteti yuddhakammaṃ karonte. Yathādhippāyaṃ gateti yodhaṃ vijjhitvā pitari viddhe. Idañca yathādhippāyaṃ tena tathāviddhabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayathādhippāyaṃ pana ujukameva gantvā pitari viddhepi maraṇādhippāyena attanāva katappayogattā nevatthi visaṅketoti vadanti. Ānantariyaṃ pana natthīti pitaraṃ uddissa katappayogābhāvato.
“指定后”是指依照论母,对与命令相关的加行之解说所作的注释。巴利
Adhiṭṭhāyāti mātikāvasena āṇattikapayogakathāvaṇṇanā
“如是射”就是像这样拉弓射箭。“如是击”就是像这样紧握刀剑砍击。“如是杀”就是像这样施加刑罚杀害。“中间”指大象背部的中间。“以此”指“指定之后而命令”等语句。“在此”就是指在命令式的加行中。巴利
Evaṃvijjhāti evaṃ dhanuṃ kaḍḍhetvā vijjha. Evaṃ paharāti evaṃ daḷhaṃ asiṃ gahetvā pahara. Evaṃ ghātehīti evaṃ kammakāraṇaṃ katvā mārehi. Majjheti hatthino piṭṭhimajjhe. Etenāti ‘‘adhiṭṭhahitvā āṇāpetī’’tiādinā. Tatthāti āṇattikappayoge.
义注里虽然没有提到具体的行刑方式,但巴利圣典中已经说到“这样射,这样打,这样杀”,这已经触及了具体的行刑方式。所以,他把师父传承中传来的具体行刑方式取来,与圣典互相对照,采纳之后加以开示,因此说“另一种方法”等。“割”指割手等。“裂”指剖开肚子等。或者也可以这样理解:用箭射是“射”,用刀割是“割”,用锤子等击破头部等是“裂”。螺髻刑就是螺髻刑罚。执行这种刑罚的人,沿着上唇、两边耳垂和喉颈的边界割开皮肤,把所有头发结成一束,用木棍卷起来往上拔,头皮就连着头发一起被扯下来,然后用粗砂粒摩擦头骨,洗净后弄成螺壳的颜色。“等”这个字涵盖了酸粥臼刑、罗睺面刑、光鬘刑、手灯刑、茅草叶刑、碎布衣刑、羚羊刑、钩肉刑、钱币刑、碱水衣刑、门闩转刑、稻草座刑等一切刑罚。巴利
Kiñcāpi kiriyaviseso aṭṭhakathāsu anāgato, pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ vijjha, evaṃ pahara, evaṃ ghātehī’’ti kiriyāvisesassa parāmaṭṭhattā ācariyaparamparāya ābhataṃ kiriyāvisesaṃ pāḷiyā saṃsandanato gahetvā dassento ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādimāha. Chedananti hatthādichedanaṃ. Bhedananti kucchiādiphālanaṃ. Atha vā usunā vijjhanaṃ, asinā chedanaṃ, muggarādīhi sīsādibhedananti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Saṅkhamuṇḍakanti saṅkhamuṇḍakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā uttaroṭṭhaubhatokaṇṇacūḷikagalavāṭakaparicchedena cammaṃ chinditvā sabbakese ekato gaṇṭhiṃ katvā daṇḍakena paliveṭhetvā uppāṭenti, saha kesehi cammaṃ uṭṭhahati, tato sīsakaṭāhaṃ thūlasakkharāhi ghaṃsitvā dhovantā saṅkhavaṇṇaṃ karonti. Evamādīti ādi-saddena bilaṅgathālikaṃ rāhumukhaṃ jotimālikaṃ hatthapajjotikaṃ erakavattikaṃ cīrakavāsikaṃ eṇeyyakaṃ baḷisamaṃsikaṃ kahāpaṇikaṃ khārāpatacchikaṃ palighaparivattikaṃ palālapīṭhakanti evamādiṃ sabbaṃ kammakāraṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
这里,酸粥臼刑就是酸粥臼刑罚。执行这种刑罚时,把人头盖骨掀开,用钳子夹起烧红的铁丸放进去,脑髓被煮得沸腾,向上涌出来。罗睺面刑就是罗睺面刑罚。执行这种刑罚时,用木桩把嘴撬开,在口腔里点灯;或者从耳垂那里开始,用凿器挖开面部,血流出来,充满嘴巴。光鬘刑,是用油布缠裹全身然后点燃。手灯刑,是在手上缠裹油布,像点灯一样点燃。茅草叶刑就是茅草叶刑罚。执行这种刑罚时,从脖子以下开始,把皮肤割成一圈筒状,让它坠到脚踝,然后用绳子绑住拖拽,受刑人踩在自己被剥下的皮筒上就摔倒了。树皮衣刑就是树皮衣刑罚。执行这种刑罚时,同样把皮肤割成筒状放在腰部,再从腰部往下割到脚踝,由于上部的皮肤条,下半身就像穿着树皮衣一样。羚羊刑就是羚羊刑罚。执行这种刑罚时,在两个肘部和两个膝盖套上铁环,钉入铁桩,受刑人就靠四根铁桩撑立在地上,然后周围的人围着他生火,不时从关节处拔出铁桩,只让四肢的骨端支撑着站立。巴利
Tattha (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.1) bilaṅgathālikanti kañjiyaukkhalikakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ kammaṃ karontā sīsakapālaṃ uppāṭetvā tattaṃ ayoguḷaṃ saṇḍāsena gahetvā tattha pakkhipanti, tena matthaluṅgaṃ pakkuthitvā upari uttarati. Rāhumukhanti rāhumukhakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karonto saṅkunā mukhaṃ vivaritvā antomukhe dīpaṃ jālenti, kaṇṇacūḷikāhi vā paṭṭhāya mukhaṃ nikhādanena khaṇanti, lohitaṃ paggharitvā mukhaṃ pūreti. Jotimālikanti sakalasarīraṃ telapilotikāya veṭhetvā ālimpenti. Hatthapajjotikanti hatthe telapilotikāya veṭhetvā dīpaṃ viya pajjālenti. Erakavattikanti erakavattakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā heṭṭhāgīvato paṭṭhāya cammavaṭṭe kantitvā gopphake pātenti, atha naṃ yottehi bandhitvā kaḍḍhanti, so attanova cammavaṭṭe akkamitvā patati. Cīrakavāsikanti cīrakavāsikakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā tatheva cammavaṭṭe kantitvā kaṭiyaṃ ṭhapenti, kaṭito paṭṭhāya kantitvā gopphakesu ṭhapenti, uparimehi heṭṭhimasarīraṃ cīrakanivāsananivatthaṃ viya hoti. Eṇeyyakanti eṇeyyakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā ubhosu kapparesu ca jaṇṇukesu ca ayavalayāni datvā ayasūlāni koṭṭenti, so catūhi ayasūlehi bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhahati, atha naṃ parivāretvā aggiṃ karonti, taṃ kālena kālaṃ sandhito sūlāni apanetvā catūhi aṭṭhikoṭīhiyeva ṭhapenti.
钩肉刑:用两头带钩的钩子打进去,把皮、肉、筋腱都扯出来。钱币刑:用锋利的斧凿,从头顶开始凿,一块一块地凿下钱币大小的碎屑,把整个身体凿遍。碱水衣刑:用武器把身体各处打遍,再用刷子把碱水刷上去,皮、肉、筋腱烂得流下来,只剩下一副骨头架子。门闩转刑:让他侧身躺下,把铁钉钉进耳孔,把他固定在地上,然后抓住他的双脚扭转。稻草座刑:熟练的行刑者不割破皮肉,用臼杵把骨头捣碎,抓住头发把他提起来,只剩一堆肉泥;然后再用头发把这堆肉泥包住,像卷稻草束一样缠起来。巴利
Baḷisamaṃsikanti ubhatomukhehi baḷisehi paharitvā cammamaṃsanahārūni uppāṭenti. Kahāpaṇikanti sakalasarīraṃ tikhiṇāhi vāsīhi koṭito paṭṭhāya kahāpaṇamattaṃ kahāpaṇamattaṃ pātentā koṭṭenti. Khārāpatacchikanti sarīraṃ tattha tattha āvudhehi paharitvā kocchehi khāraṃ ghaṃsanti, cammamaṃsanahārūni paggharitvā aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikāva tiṭṭhati. Palighaparivattikanti ekena passena nipajjāpetvā kaṇṇachidde ayasūlaṃ koṭṭetvā pathaviyā ekābaddhaṃ karonti, atha naṃ pāde gahetvā āviñchanti. Palālapīṭhakanti cheko kāraṇiko chavicammaṃ acchinditvā nisadapotehi aṭṭhīni bhinditvā kesesu gahetvā ukkhipati, maṃsarāsiyeva hoti, atha naṃ keseheva pariyonandhitvā gaṇhantā palālavaṭṭiṃ viya katvā paliveṭhenti.
先骗过对象,然后杀掉另一个人,这就是这句话的关联。前面那部分等内容,从事项的性质来说,用“事项”这个词就已经把它们涵盖进去了,所以说“先打”等等。如果心里限定了“在前面”,或者没有限定,而说“先打再杀”,那么如果在别处打了之后杀掉,因为没提到施设圈套,所以就有疑惑。但如果心里想的是不管在哪里打后杀掉,口里却说“先打再杀”,那么因为他施设了圈套而这样说,所说的意思已经成立,而且由于是由同一个心所发起的表业,所以不能以迂回的方式从杀人巴拉基格中脱免。因此有人说“即使在别处打后杀掉,也绝对没有疑惑”,但有些人不接受这种说法。“以事项差别”是指以母亲等事项的差别。“业差别”是指无间业等业的差别。“罪差别”是指巴拉基格等罪的差别。巴利
Vatthuṃ visaṃvādetvā tato aññaṃ māretīti sambandho. Purimapassādīnampi vatthusabhāgato vatthuggahaṇeneva gahaṇanti āha ‘‘purato paharitvā’’tiādi. Cittena ‘‘purato vā’’ti niyamaṃ katvā vā akatvā vā ‘‘purato paharitvā mārehī’’ti vutte sace aññattha paharitvā māreti, lesaṃ oḍḍetvā avuttattā visaṅketova hoti. Cittena pana yattha katthaci paharitvā māraṇaṃ icchantopi sace ‘‘purato paharitvā mārehī’’ti vadati, tassa lesaṃ oḍḍetvā tathā vuttamatthaṃ ṭhapetvā teneva cittena samuṭṭhāpitaviññattikattā manussaviggahapārājikato pariyāyena amuccanato ‘‘aññattha paharitvā māritepi nevatthi visaṅketo’’ti vadanti, keci pana taṃ na icchanti. Vatthuvisesenāti mātuādivatthuvisesena . Kammavisesoti ānantariyādikammaviseso. Āpattivisesoti pārājikādiāpattiviseso.
“在村里站着”这句话,是为了限定人而说的,不是为了限定地点。所以,因为没有限定地点、只限定了人,就没有混淆。但在“在村里或……”这类说法里,因为限定了地点,如果在别处杀害,就说有混淆。巴利
‘‘Etaṃ gāme ṭhita’’nti gāmo puggalaniyamanatthaṃ vutto, na okāsaniyamanatthaṃ, tasmā okāsaṃ aniyametvā puggalasseva niyamitattā natthi visaṅketo. ‘‘Gāmeye vā’’tiādīsu pana okāsassa niyamitattā aññattha mārite visaṅketo vutto.
以喙,即剑锋尖端;以柄,即剑的握把。巴利
Tuṇḍenāti khaggakoṭiyā. Tharunāti khaggamuṭṭhinā.
说“行走的这个人”时,是通过行走来限定人本身,而不是限定威仪,所以说“没有偏差”。而说“正在行走”等语时,则是限定了威仪,所以说“有偏差”。巴利
‘‘Etaṃ gacchanta’’nti gamanena puggalova niyamito, na iriyāpatho. Tenāha ‘‘natthi visaṅketo’’ti. ‘‘Gacchantamevā’’tiādinā iriyāpatho niyamito. Tenāha ‘‘visaṅketo hotī’’ti.
即使有人命令说“杀长的”,因为长形众生有很多,而他没有用“某某名字的、这样那样的长形”这种不共的特征去具体指定,所以就说这是“没有限定就下命令”。因此又说“无论杀了任何那样的”。在这里,有人主张:即使心里在众多长形众生中限定了某一个才说出口,但由于言语上没有限定,杀了另一个那样的众生,也不构成偏差。然而,由于就对方而言并不具备“有情想”这一支分,所以根本不算杀生,因此说“下命令的人得以脱罪”。如果真是这样,那限定地点时怎么又成为杀生呢?应当理解为:对限定地点的人来说,他的心以坐在那个地点者的命根为所缘。因为限定并指出地点的人,是想让人杀掉坐在那个地点的人,但当时他自己并不在那里,所以他们说,地点连同自己的命根并不成为所缘。巴利
‘‘Dīghaṃ mārehī’’ti vuttepi dīghasaṇṭhānānaṃ bahubhāvato itthannāmaṃ evarūpañca dīghanti aññesaṃ asādhāraṇalakkhaṇena aniddiṭṭhattā ‘‘aniyametvā āṇāpetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘yaṃ kiñci tādisaṃ māretī’’ti. Ettha ca ‘‘cittena bahūsu dīghasaṇṭhānesu ekaṃ niyametvā vuttepi vācāya aniyamitattā aññasmiṃ tādise mārite natthi visaṅketo’’ti vadanti. Parapāṇimhi pāṇasaññitālakkhaṇassa aṅgassa abhāvato nevatthi pāṇātipātoti āha ‘‘āṇāpako muccatī’’ti. Yadi evaṃ okāsaniyame sati kathaṃ pāṇātipātoti? Okāsaṃ niyamentassa tasmiṃ okāse nisinnassa jīvitindriyaṃ ārammaṇaṃ hotīti gahetabbaṃ. Okāsañhi niyametvā niddisanto tasmiṃ okāse nisinnaṃ mārāpetukāmo hoti, sayaṃ pana tadā tattha natthi, tasmā okāsena saha attano jīvitindriyaṃ ārammaṇaṃ na hotīti vadanti.
“指定后”这一句,是按论母方式对命令与加行的注释终巴利
Adhiṭṭhāyāti mātikāvasena āṇattikapayogakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
老师这样下命令时,先说老师的恶作:如果这个命令没有按照他的意图达成,那么在老师下命令的那一刹那,就是恶作。如果这个命令按照他的意图达成了,那么后面所说的重罪,在下命令的那一刹那就已经成立。如果他必定要杀那个人,那么后面所说的“所有人都犯巴拉基格”,对这个人来说,就在那一刹那成为巴拉基格。这里的含义应当这样理解。不过,老师在前面“不与取”那段话里,已经按照那里所说的方式说明了这个道理,所以这里没有再讲。因为那里说:“这样下命令时,先说老师的恶作。如果这个命令按照他的意图达成,那么后面所说的重罪,在下命令的那一刹那就已经成立。如果那件物品必定会被拿走,那么后面所说的‘所有人都犯巴拉基格’,对这个人来说,就在那一刹那成为巴拉基格。这个道理在一切地方都应当知道。”他们也有恶作:因为告知这件事,所以有恶作。“仅仅在接受时”:这里,如果他必定会接受,那么在接受之前老师就已经有重罪了,而不是在接受的时候才有,应当这样理解。为什么他有重罪呢?回答说:“因为大众是被他引向恶业的。”巴利
Evaṃ āṇāpentassa ācariyassa tāva dukkaṭanti sace sā āṇatti yathādhippāyaṃ na gacchati, ācariyassa āṇattikkhaṇe dukkaṭaṃ. Sace pana sā āṇatti yathādhippāyaṃ gacchati, yaṃ parato thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ, āṇattikkhaṇe tadeva hoti. Atha so taṃ avassaṃ ghāteti, yaṃ parato ‘‘sabbesaṃ āpatti pārājikassā’’ti vuttaṃ, tato imassa taṅkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ hotīti evamettha attho gahetabbo. Ācariyena pana heṭṭhā adinnādānakathāyaṃ (pārā. 121) vuttanayeneva ayamattho sakkā viññātunti idha na vutto. Vuttañhi tattha ‘‘āpatti dukkaṭassāti evaṃ āṇāpentassa ācariyassa tāva dukkaṭaṃ. Sace pana sā āṇatti yathādhippāyaṃ gacchati, yaṃ parato thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ, āṇattikkhaṇe tadeva hoti. Atha taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avassaṃ hāriyaṃ hoti, yaṃ parato ‘sabbesaṃ āpatti pārājikassā’ti vuttaṃ, tato imassa taṅkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ hotīti ayaṃ yutti sabbattha veditabbā’’ti. Tesampi dukkaṭanti ārocanapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ. Paṭiggahitamatteti ettha avassaṃ ce paṭiggaṇhāti, tato pubbeva ācariyassa thullaccayaṃ, na pana paṭiggahiteti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kasmā panassa thullaccayanti āha ‘‘mahājano hi tena pāpe niyojito’’ti.
只有根本者才有恶作——这只是《大注》里传下来的一种义理展示,并不是导师本人的主张。所以论主才说“若如此”等话,意思是:如果按照《大注》所说的方式去理解,才有那样的义理。假如在接受时根本没有罪,那么杀害者说“萨度,萨度”而接受杀害这件事时,就不该有恶作罪了。为了说明即使在这样不算粗显的所缘上都有恶作,更何况接受杀害呢?所以举出“做媒接受”等例子来显示这一点。像“啊,但愿某某被杀掉”这样随喜死亡时都有恶作,更何况接受杀害,这就是论主的意趣。“此恶作只属于接受者”——用这个限定说明:因为不再有疑惑,所以这个根本者由于接受的缘,根本没有罪。不过有些人说:“这里所说的恶作只属于接受者,只是用这个限定来说明这一点,并没有否定《大注》里所说的根本者的恶作。”“前理”是指紧接在前面“不遣还使者”那段解说里说的道理。“此”指恶作。如果真是这样,为什么圣典里没有说呢?回答说“因为没有机会”。在那里,因为已经说了根本者有土喇咤亚,所以没有机会再说接受者的恶作,因此是因为没有机会才没说,并不是因为不存在,这就是论主的意旨。巴利
Mūlaṭṭhasseva dukkaṭanti idaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgatanayadassanamattaṃ, na pana taṃ ācariyassa adhippetaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ sante’’tiādi, evaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayena atthe satīti attho. Paṭiggahaṇe āpattiyeva na siyāti vadhakassa ‘‘sādhu suṭṭhū’’ti māraṇapaṭiggahaṇe dukkaṭāpatti na siyā, evaṃ anoḷārikavisayepi tāva dukkaṭaṃ hoti, kimaṅgaṃ pana māraṇapaṭiggahaṇeti dassanatthaṃ sañcarittapaṭiggahaṇādi nidassitaṃ. ‘‘Aho vata itthannāmo hato assā’’ti evaṃ maraṇābhinandanepi dukkaṭe sati pageva māraṇapaṭiggahaṇeti adhippāyo. Paṭiggaṇhantassevetaṃ dukkaṭanti avadhāraṇena visaṅketattā imassa paṭiggahaṇapaccayā mūlaṭṭhassa nattheva āpattīti dasseti. Keci pana ‘‘idha vuttadukkaṭaṃ paṭiggaṇhantassevāti ettakameva avadhāraṇena dassitaṃ, na pana mūlaṭṭhassa mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttadukkaṭaṃ paṭikkhitta’’nti vadanti. Purimanayeti samanantarātīte avisakkiyadūtaniddese. Etanti dukkaṭaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kasmā pāḷiyaṃ na vuttanti āha ‘‘okāsābhāvenā’’ti. Tattha mūlaṭṭhassa thullaccayavacanato paṭiggaṇhantassa dukkaṭaṃ vattuṃ okāso natthīti okāsābhāvena na vuttaṃ, na pana abhāvatoti adhippāyo.
在“命令的刹那还是凡夫”这一句里,应当知道:因为他是以未来将被杀死的命根为目标,生起了能成办杀业的思,所以这时就可认定他已经是杀阿拉汉的人了。巴利
Āṇattikkhaṇeputhujjanoti ettha anāgate voropetabbajīvitindriyavasena atthasādhikacetanāya pavattattā arahantaghātako jātoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
175 因为自己就是僧团长老,所以说“在侍奉的时候”。所谓“每一句话都犯恶作”,意思是:并不是带着“谁听了我的话就记住这个”这样的意图来说,而只是以随喜死亡的方式来说;所以像“连盗贼也不杀他”这类话,也说是恶作。这个意思就是由这句话说明的,即如他所知道的那样,这是关联。所谓“语句差别”,就是言语的差别。“针对两人”,是指针对两个人,或者针对两个人的死亡。如果有人针对两者而赞叹死亡,那么他的思心所虽然是单一的,但因为可以说成“两个杀生”,力量就变得强大;而且在结生果报之后、在生命相续期间,乃至在许多生中,由于一次又一次的思心所而生起痛苦,因此有大果报,所以说为“不善之聚”。针对众多人赞叹死亡,也是同样的道理。巴利
175. Sayaṃ saṅghattherattā ‘‘upaṭṭhānakāle’’ti vuttaṃ. Vācāya vācāya dukkaṭanti ‘‘yo koci mama vacanaṃ sutvā imaṃ dhāretū’’ti iminā adhippāyena avatvā kevalaṃ maraṇābhinandanavaseneva vuttattā ‘‘corāpi nāma taṃ na hanantī’’tiādivācāsupi dukkaṭameva vuttaṃ. Ayamattho etena vuttoti yathā so jānātīti sambandho. Vākyabhedanti vacībhedaṃ. Dvinnaṃ uddissāti dve uddissa, dvinnaṃ vā maraṇaṃ uddissa. Ubho uddissa maraṇaṃ saṃvaṇṇentassa cetanāya ekattepi ‘‘dve pāṇātipātā’’ti vattabbabhāvato balavabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā paṭisandhivipākasamanantaraṃ pavattiyaṃ anekāsupi jātīsu aparāpariyacetanāvasena dukkhuppādanato mahāvipākattā ‘‘akusalarāsī’’ti vuttaṃ. Bahū uddissa maraṇasaṃvaṇṇanepi eseva nayo.
“或斩头,或跳崖”等等,就是“如是”的意思。“仅仅一告知”,是说话刚说出口。就像在圣道的刹那,四念处和四正勤按各自的作用得以成就;同样,思虽然只有一个,但按作用来说,许多杀生都能成就,所以说“那么多的杀生”。比如有人想把自己显示成一百个人,通过“我是一百个、我是一百个”这样的准备工作,得到以眼前微小的对象为所缘的神通心,即使只取一百个人中一个人的肤色为所缘,也能成就一百个人。又比如,杀意在一个人死亡时生起,虽然在全身生灭,但无法一下子取整个命根为所缘,于是取停留在某一处、只在局部生起的命根为所缘,从而摧毁作为所缘的整个命根。同样,怀有以眼前微小对象为所缘的杀意,在想杀的心念所摄受的众生中,即使只取一个人的命根为所缘,由于作用的完成,所有众生也都被杀死了。巴利
Evanti ‘‘sīsaṃ vā chinditvā papāte vā papatitvā’’tiādinā. Ārocitamatteti vuttamatte. Yathā ariyamaggakkhaṇe cattāro satipaṭṭhānā cattāro sammappadhānā ca kiccavasena ijjhanti, evaṃ cetanāya ekattepi kiccavasena anekā pāṇātipātā ijjhantīti āha ‘‘tattakā pāṇātipātā’’ti. Yathā hi attānaṃ sataṃ katvā dassetukāmassa ‘‘sataṃ homi sataṃ homī’’ti kataparikammavasena laddhapaccuppannaparittārammaṇaṃ abhiññācittaṃ satantogadhānaṃ vaṇṇesu ekassa vaṇṇaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvāpi sataṃ nipphādeti, yathā ca ekassa maraṇe pavattamānāpi vadhakacetanā sakalasarīre uppajjamānaṃ nirujjhamānañca sakalampi jīvitindriyaṃ ekappahāreneva ālambitumasakkuṇeyyattā ṭhānappattaṃ ekadesappavattaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā ārammaṇabhūtaṃ sakalampi jīvitindriyaṃ vināseti, evameva paccuppannaparittārammaṇāya vadhakacetanāya māretukāmatāya pariggahitasattesu ekasseva jīvitindriye ārammaṇe katepi kiccanipphattivasena sabbepi māritāva honti.
176 “从谁的手中”,是指从那些被亲属邀请的人手中。“交回本钱就得脱身”,这句话是为了说明:他先前所做的努力,最终又恢复成原来的状态。三本《结文》里都说:“不过,用本钱买来的书,只要交给书的主人,就能脱身。”但有人却说:“如果交了书给主人,却不拿回本钱,就不能脱身,因为那东西还属于自己,没有被释放。”然后对此大加发挥,这种说法不能当作可靠的依据。因为书交给书的主人时,那人拿回了别人做的东西,而自己所做的努力也就被破坏了,他怎么会不能脱身呢?而且,已经舍弃的东西,看不出还属于自己。不过《结文》里又说:“如果是用本钱买来的,为什么说把书交给书的主人、把本钱交给那些收过本钱的人,就能脱身呢?因为为了书而收本钱,这本身就不如法。如果交了书给主人之后,自己又把本钱拿回来,那也不如法。或者,如果不从书的主人那里拿回本钱,而是自己把书烧掉,那也会因毁坏信众布施之物而犯过失,所以才这么说。”这种说法也不能当作可靠的依据。因此,应当以《结文》所说的为准。“我们要写下死亡之相”,是说他们怀着同一个意图。这是针对那样做的人说的。不过,即使没有这样事先商量,只要怀着让人死的目的,在那本书上按所说的方法去做,也一样是巴拉基格罪。巴利
176.Yesaṃhatthatoti yesaṃ ñātakapavāritānaṃ hatthato. Tesaṃ mūlaṃ datvā muccatīti idaṃ tena katapayogassa puna pākatikabhāvāpādanaṃ avasānaṃ pāpetvā dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Mūlena kītaṃ pana potthakaṃ potthakasāmikānaṃ datvā muccatiyevā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Kenaci pana ‘‘sace potthakaṃ sāmikānaṃ datvā mūlaṃ na gaṇhāti, na muccati attaniyabhāvato amocitattā’’ti vatvā bahudhā papañcitaṃ, na taṃ sārato paccetabbaṃ. Potthakasāmikānañhi potthake dinne aññena kataṃ paṭilabhitvā attanā katapayogassa nāsitattā kathaṃ so na mucceyya, na ca pariccattassa attaniyabhāvo diṭṭhoti. Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘sace mūlena kīto hoti, potthakasāmikānaṃ potthakaṃ, yesaṃ hatthato mūlaṃ gahitaṃ, tesaṃ mūlaṃ datvā muccatīti kasmā vuttaṃ. Potthakanimittaṃ mūlassa gahitattā akappiyametaṃ. Yadi hi potthakasāmikassa potthakaṃ datvā sayameva mūlaṃ gaṇheyya, akappiyameva taṃ. Athāpi potthakasāmikassa santikā mūlaṃ aggahetvā sayameva taṃ potthakaṃ jhāpeyya, tathāpi aññā yena saddhādeyyavinipātane āpatti, tasmā evamāhā’’ti vuttaṃ, tampi na sārato paccetabbaṃ. Tasmā gaṇṭhipadesu vuttanayovettha sārato daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Maraṇavaṇṇaṃ likhissāmā’’ti ekajjhāsayā hutvāti idaṃ tathā karonte sandhāya vuttaṃ, evaṃ pana asaṃvidahitvāpi maraṇādhippāyena tasmiṃ potthake vuttavidhiṃ karontassa pārājikameva.
“量度”是指以自己确定的标准来衡量。“削平”是指把高起的地方削平。“最后一畚箕”是指最后那一畚箕土。“这些够了”是指想要完成这件事的心,由最后那一点努力所成就的思心所,也就是完成思。所谓“经师长老”,是指不通达律藏的诵经者。也有人针对大注释师长老说:“他们不懂律藏,所以带着嘲弄的意思称他们为经师长老。”在这里,大注释中说:“愿坑完成时,他们掉进去死掉;没完成时,不要死。”这是针对怀着这种意图去做的人,说最后的完成思。但在《大灯》和《略注》中,则是针对从第一击开始就怀着“愿他们掉进这个坑里死掉”的意图去做的人,在每一次努力作业时,说“即使只给一锄头”等等,这是就成就每一次努力的完成思而说的,这在三本《结文》中都有说。因此,从各种角度来看,注释的说法彼此并不矛盾。或者,大注释是就一天之内以不间断的努力挖掘完成的人,说最后的完成思;而其他注释则是就怀着“愿他们掉进这里死掉”的意图,一天挖一部分,另一天也照样挖一部分,这样挖完成的人而说的。这样看来,各种注释彼此也没有矛盾,这是我们所能接受的。巴利
Pamāṇeti attanā sallakkhite pamāṇe. Tacchetvāti unnatappadesaṃ tacchetvā. Paṃsupacchinti sabbantimaṃ paṃsupacchiṃ. ‘‘Ettakaṃ ala’’nti niṭṭhāpetukāmatāya sabbantimapayogasādhikā cetanā sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā . Suttantikattherāti vinaye apakataññuno suttantabhāṇakā. Mahāaṭṭhakathācariyatthereyeva sandhāya ‘‘vinayaṃ te na jānantīti upahāsavasena suttantikattherāti vutta’’ntipi vadanti. Ettha ca mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘āvāṭe niṭṭhite patitvā marantu, aniṭṭhite mā marantū’’ti iminā adhippāyena karontaṃ sandhāya sabbantimā sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā vuttā, mahāpaccarisaṅkhepaṭṭhakathāsu pana paṭhamappahārato paṭṭhāya ‘‘imasmiṃ āvāṭe patitvā marantū’’ti iminā adhippāyena karontassa yasmiṃ yasmiṃ payoge kate tattha patitā maranti, taṃtaṃpayogasādhikaṃ sanniṭṭhāpakacetanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekasmimpi kudālappahāre dinne’’tiādi vuttanti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Tasmā tena tena pariyāyena aṭṭhakathāvādānaṃ aññamaññāvirodho yutto. Atha vā mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ekasmiṃyeva divase avūpasanteneva payogena khaṇitvā niṭṭhāpentaṃ sandhāya sabbantimā sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā vuttā, itarāsu pana ‘‘imasmiṃ patitvā marantū’’ti adhippāyena ekasmiṃ divase kiñci khaṇitvā aparasmimpi divase tatheva kiñci kiñci khaṇitvā niṭṭhāpentaṃ sandhāya vuttanti. Evampi aṭṭhakathānaṃ aññamaññāvirodho yuttoti amhākaṃ khanti.
“由于自己的本性”是指没有觉察而失足等情形。说“阿拉汉也会被算在其中”,意思是:即使是不想死的阿拉汉,被别人推落时,也可能发生死亡。“按前面的说法”是指“想死的人会死在这里”这种说法中所讲的情形。关于“把掉进去的人拖到外面”这一句,这里有人说:“因为并没有‘就让他们死在这个坑里’这样的限定,所以即使拖到外面杀死,也仍然犯巴拉基格。如果掉进坑里停留了一小会儿,然后抓住正要离开的人把他杀死,因为不是在坑里抓住的,所以不犯巴拉基格。”不过,注释书里说“因为是以令其掉落的作法而抓住的”,这个理由在这里也可能成立,所以应当考察之后再采纳。“或者不想死”也是因为可能有这种意图;对于化生者,如果无法逃脱而死了,也说犯巴拉基格。有人问:既然说的是“化生之后”,那难道看不到掉落吗?对化生者来说,在那里化生本身就是掉落,所以并不矛盾。因为当母亲掉落后,即使转变了性别才死,他仍然是杀母者,而不只是杀男人者,所以是就“掉落者”本身来说罪的,基于这个意图才说“掉落的形态是衡量标准”。不过这种说法没有道理。因为注释书里只说了这么多:“若杀害已生为人的母亲或父亲,即使对方转变了性别,其业也是无间业。”巴利
Attano dhammatāyāti ajānitvā pakkhalitvā vā. Arahantāpi saṅgahaṃ gacchantīti aññehi pātiyamānānaṃ amaritukāmānampi arahantānaṃ maraṇaṃ sambhavatīti vuttaṃ. Purimanayeti ‘‘maritukāmā idha marissantī’’ti vuttanaye. Tattha patitaṃ bahi nīharitvāti ettha ‘‘imasmiṃ āvāṭeyeva marantūti niyamābhāvato bahi nīharitvā māritepi pārājikaṃ vuttaṃ. Āvāṭe patitvā thokaṃ cirāyitvā gacchantaṃ gahetvā mārite āvāṭasmiṃyeva aggahitattā pārājikaṃ na hotī’’ti vadanti, taṃ pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘patitappayogena gahitattā’’ti vuttahetussa idhāpi sambhavato vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ. Amaritukāmā vātipi adhippāyassa sambhavato opapātike uttarituṃ asakkuṇitvā matepi pārājikaṃ vuttaṃ. Nibbattitvāti vuttattā patanaṃ na dissatīti ce? Opapātikassa tattha nibbattiyeva patananti natthi virodho. Yasmā mātuyā patitvā parivattitaliṅgāya matāya so mātughātako hoti, na kevalaṃ manussapurisaghātako, tasmā patitasseva vasena āpattīti adhippāyena ‘‘patanarūpaṃ pamāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Idaṃ pana akāraṇaṃ. ‘‘Manussabhūtaṃ mātaraṃ vā pitaraṃ vā api parivattaliṅgaṃ jīvitā voropentassa kammaṃ ānantariyaṃ hotī’’ti ettakameva hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ.
在这里,即使性别转变了,那由同一个业所生的有分相续和命根相续还是同一个,不是另一个,所以说“即使转变了性别”。因为性别没有转变时,在那个身体里的有分和命根相续,在性别转变后也还是同一个,依据这个而安立为同一生的名称。在这里,不应该根据存在于色聚中的命根来提出责难,因为这里指的是与此不同的心命根。因为那个心命根在那里以不间断的方式获得相续的名称,而另一个色命根则是以色法守护的共通性而存在,所以责难没有根据。因此,即使性别转变了,由于断绝的是那由同一个业所生的相续的生命,就称呼上的差别而言,他不管是杀女人的人还是杀男人的人,都不能免除无间业,这里只应当说这么多。然而在这里,有情是什么种类,他们在死的时候就各自以自己种类的形态而死,不是以别的形态,而且应当根据种类而有巴吉帝亚、土喇咤亚、巴拉基格的差别。因此,如果龙或者金翅鸟以夜叉的形态或者饿鬼的形态掉落,而以自己的畜生形态死亡,那么这里只有巴吉帝亚是合适的,不是土喇咤亚,因为死的正是畜生。正因为这样,在第二位长老的主张中说“死时的形态是衡量标准,所以是巴吉帝亚”。而这一主张更为合理,正因为如此,它被放在后面说。巴利
Tattha ca liṅge parivattepi so eva ekakammanibbatto bhavaṅgappabandho jīvitindriyappabandho ca, na aññoti ‘‘api parivattaliṅga’’nti vuttaṃ. Yo hi liṅge aparivatte tasmiṃ attabhāve bhavaṅgajīvitindriyappabandho , so eva parivattepi liṅge taṃyeva ca upādāya ekajātisamaññā. Na cettha bhāvakalāpagatajīvitindriyassa vasena codanā kātabbā tadaññasseva adhippetattā. Tañhi tattha avicchedavuttiyā pabandhavohāraṃ labhati, itarampi vā bhāvānupālatāsāmaññenāti anokāsāva codanā. Tasmā parivattepi liṅge tasseva ekakammanibbattassa santānassa jīvitā voropanato vohārabhedato so itthighātako vā hotu purisaghātako vā, ānantariyakammato na muccatīti ettakameva tattha vattabbaṃ. Idha pana yaṃyaṃjātikā sattā honti, te maraṇasamaye attano attano jātirūpeneva maranti, nāññarūpena, jātivaseneva ca pācittiyathullaccayapārājikehi bhavitabbaṃ. Tasmā nāgo vā supaṇṇo vā yakkharūpena vā petarūpena vā patitvā attano tiracchānarūpena marati, tattha pācittiyameva yuttaṃ, na thullaccayaṃ tiracchānagatasseva matattā. Teneva dutiyattheravāde maraṇarūpaṃ pamāṇaṃ, tasmā pācittiyanti vuttaṃ. Ayameva ca vādo yuttataro, teneva so pacchā vutto.
按照这个道理,如果龙或金翅鸟这类呈现人形的畜生,掉下来后以自己的本形死去,就应当犯巴吉帝亚罪。既然如此,为什么在圣典里说“夜叉或饿鬼,或畜生人形者掉落在里面,犯恶作罪。掉落时生起苦受,犯恶作罪。死亡,犯土喇咤亚罪”呢?对此,有些人说:先用“夜叉或饿鬼”来显示最初以自己本形而住的夜叉和饿鬼,然后再用“或畜生人形者”来显示那些又以其他形态而住的夜叉和饿鬼,并不是要单独显示那样的畜生。所以在这里应该这样连接:呈畜生形或人形的夜叉或饿鬼。不过,在《复注》里三处都说到:“圣典中似乎是把住于人形的畜生单独列出来,而说土喇咤亚罪。”即使以夜叉形或饿鬼形死亡,也是同样的道理;因此,由于死时的形态才是衡量标准,所以显示为土喇咤亚罪。巴利
Imināva nayena manussaviggahe nāgasupaṇṇasadise tiracchānagate patitvā attano rūpena mate pācittiyena bhavitabbaṃ. Evaṃ sante pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘yakkho vā peto vā tiracchānagatamanussaviggaho vā tasmiṃ patati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Patite dukkhā vedanā uppajjati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Marati, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti kasmā vuttanti ce? Tattha keci vadanti – yakkho vā peto vāti paṭhamaṃ sakarūpeneva ṭhite yakkhapete dassetvā puna aññarūpenapi ṭhite teyeva yakkhapete dassetuṃ ‘‘tiracchānagatamanussaviggaho vā’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana tādisaṃ tiracchānagataṃ visuṃ dassetuṃ. Tasmā tiracchānagataviggaho vā manussaviggaho vā yakkho vā peto vāti evamettha yojanā kātabbāti. Gaṇṭhipadesu pana tīsupi ‘‘pāḷiyaṃ manussaviggahena ṭhitatiracchānagatānaṃ āveṇikaṃ katvā thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ viya dissatī’’ti kathitaṃ. Yakkharūpapetarūpena matepi eseva nayoti iminā maraṇarūpasseva pamāṇattā thullaccayaṃ atidissati.
“Mudhā”的意思是不收代价,也就是不收取任何金钱,这是所说的意思。他无罪,是因为他在那里没有做任何努力。不过,为了说明如果他在那里也做了某些事,就绝对无法免除罪责,所以接着说了“evaṃ patitā”等话。其中,“evaṃ”的意思是“这是我做的”。“Na nassissantī”的意思是不会消失、不会逃走,这就是它的含义。“Vippaṭisāre uppanne”是就根本当事者而说的。不过,如果后来的人也得到,在那里做了所说的某种行为,之后生起追悔,也这样做,那么对他也是同样的道理。“Paṃsumhi patitvā maratī”的意思是,在新填满的尘土中,把脚插进去后拔不出来,就那样倒在那里死了。“Jātapathavī jātā”这句话,是为了显示各方面都已经达到最坚固的状态。不过,当用尘土填满,并用脚踩、棍棒捣等使它变得极为坚固,做到和自然地面没有差别时,即使还没有达到“生土”的特征,也照样能免除罪责。“Opātaṃ haratī”在这里,因为类似池塘,所以能免除罪责。巴利
Mudhāti amūlena, kiñci mūlaṃ aggahetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. So niddosoti tena tattha katapayogassa abhāvato. Yadi pana sopi tattha kiñci kiñci karoti, na muccatiyevāti dassento āha ‘‘evaṃ patitā’’tiādi. Tattha evanti evaṃ mayā kateti attho. Na nassissantīti adassanaṃ na gamissanti, na palāyissantīti adhippāyo. Vippaṭisāre uppanneti mūlaṭṭhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yadi pana pacchimopi labhitvā tattha vuttappakāraṃ kiñci katvā puna vippaṭisāre uppanne evaṃ karoti, tassapi eseva nayo. Paṃsumhi patitvā maratīti abhinavapūrite paṃsumhi pāde pavesetvā uddharituṃ asakkonto tattheva patitvā marati. Jātapathavī jātāti idaṃ sabbathā matthakappattaṃ thirabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Paṃsunā pūrentena pana pādadaṇḍādīhi maddanatāḷanādinā suṭṭhutaraṃ thirabhāvaṃ āpādetvā pakatipathaviyā nibbisese kate jātapathavīlakkhaṇaṃ appattepi muccatiyeva. Opātaṃ haratīti ettha pokkharaṇīsadisattā muccati.
“Hatthā muttamatte”的意思是:投出去、刚从手里脱离的那一刻。“Vatiṃ katvā”这里说的是,如果他对陷阱没有做前面说的那些特别处理,那么当他自己设的围栏被破坏时,就可以脱罪。“Thaddhataraṃ vā pāsayaṭṭhiṃ ṭhapetī”的意思是:为了让棍子更结实,就拿另一根陷阱棍跟它绑在一起,或者把那根已经松了的棍子绑得更紧再放上去。“Daḷhataraṃ vā thirataraṃ vā”在这里也是同样的道理。“Khāṇuka”指的是绑陷阱棍的木桩。无论在哪种情况下,因为都是为了杀害而做的加行,所以不能脱罪。“Vippaṭisāre uppanne”指的是根本当事者生起追悔的时候。巴利
Hatthā muttamatteti oḍḍetvā hatthato muttamatte. Vatiṃ katvāti ettha yadi so pāse vuttappakāraṃ kañci visesaṃ na karoti, attanā katavatiyā viddhaṃsitāya muccati. Thaddhataraṃ vā pāsayaṭṭhiṃ ṭhapetīti thirabhāvatthaṃ aparāya pāsayaṭṭhiyā saddhiṃ bandhitvā vā tameva vā sithilabhūtaṃ thaddhataraṃ bandhitvā ṭhapeti. Daḷhataraṃ vā thirataraṃ vāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Khāṇukanti pāsayaṭṭhibandhanakhāṇukaṃ. Sabbattheva māraṇatthāya katappayogattā na muccati. Vippaṭisāre uppanneti mūlaṭṭhasseva vippaṭisāre uppanne.
因此,对于“以那火把……不能解脱”这句话,三部《结文》中都这样说:“先前的加行已经毁掉,后来虽然用善心再造作,也不能解脱,应当这样理解。”不过,这里合理的意趣应该是:因为从一开始就是为了杀害而造作加行,当绳棍等加行完成时,以此为缘,那些将要死的众生,就他们各自而言,杀生业已经首先成立了,所以后来虽然用善心另作别的,也不能解脱。所谓“绳”,指细绳。所谓“自己缠成”,指把许多绳子合在一起,自己缠成。所谓“拆开”,指把那些绳子一根一根分开。所谓“作得更重”,指作得极其沉重。所谓“找来做”,指到森林里去,砍下树木,削制而成。巴利
Tena alātena…pe… na muccatīti ettha ‘‘pubbe katappayogaṃ vināsetvā pacchā kusalacittena payoge katepi na muccatīti idaṃ sandhāya gantabba’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo yutto siyā – āditoyeva māraṇatthāya katappayogattā katapariyositāya pāsayaṭṭhiyā tappaccayā ye ye sattā marissanti, tesaṃ tesaṃ vasena paṭhamataraṃyeva pāṇātipātakammasiddhito pacchā kusalacittena aññathā katepi na muccatīti. Rajjuketi khuddakarajjuke. Sayaṃ vaṭṭitanti bahurajjuke ekato katvā attanā vaṭṭitaṃ. Ubbaṭṭetvāti te rajjuke visuṃ visuṃ katvā. Garukataraṃ karotīti atibhāriyaṃ karoti. Pariyesitvā katanti araññaṃ gantvā rukkhaṃ chinditvā tacchetvā kataṃ.
177 177. 所谓“或依倚树”,是就生在那棵树上的(众生)而说的。“就为了那个目的”,就是只为了杀害。“毒圆盘”,指涂在床、椅等物上的毒圆盘。“说了之后放下刀”这里,即使没有用嘴说出来,只是在心里按前面说的方式想过之后放下,也是同样的道理。“按前面的方式”,就是按“从谁手里取了本钱”等等那样。因为会让身体变得畸形,所以癞病等这类异分病叫作“异分病”;或者因为与命根的延续不相应、不顺合,凡是与命根延续相违的痈疮等,都是异分病。巴利
177.Ālambanarukkho vāti tatthajātakaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tadatthamevāti māraṇatthameva. Visamaṇḍalanti mañcapīṭhādīsu ālittaṃ visamaṇḍalaṃ. Vatvā asiṃ upanikkhipatīti ettha mukhena avatvā vuttappakāraṃ manasā cintetvā upanikkhipanepi eseva nayo. Purimanayenāti ‘‘yesaṃ hatthato mūlaṃ gahita’’ntiādinā. Sarīrassa virūpabhāvakaraṇato kuṭṭhādi visabhāgarogo nāma, jīvitappavattiyā vā asabhāgattā ananukūlattā gaṇḍapiḷakādi yo koci jīvitappavattipaccanīko visabhāgarogo.
178 或者,令他人成为不可爱的色。这里“不可爱色者”是指“有这种不可爱的色的人”,应当看作多财释复合词。对于可爱的色,也是同样的道理。由此显示:在“令现起可爱的色”这一处,应当这样连接理解——“或者将可爱色者置于那人附近;或者自己具备可爱的色而安住”等等。正因为如此,在某一个结文中这样说:巴利
178.Paraṃvā amanāparūpanti ettha amanāpaṃ rūpaṃ etassāti amanāparūpoti bāhiratthasamāso daṭṭhabbo. Manāpiyepi eseva nayoti etena manāpikaṃ rūpaṃ upasaṃharatīti ettha paraṃ vā manāparūpaṃ tassa samīpe ṭhapeti, attanā vā manāpiyena rūpena samannāgato tiṭṭhatītiādi yojetabbanti dasseti. Teneva aññatarasmiṃ gaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ –
他心想:“这女人是因为得不到我的利养,愿她死掉”,于是靠近过去。
如果怀着恶意心去,他就是杀女人者。
“ 如果是为了乞食才去,就算知道,也不是凶手。
他确实对她无所求,对死亡则保持舍心。”巴利
‘‘Mamālābhena esitthī, maratūti samīpago; Duṭṭhacitto sace yāti, hoti so itthimārako. ‘‘Bhikkhatthāya sace yāti, jānantopi na mārako; Anatthiko hi so tassā, maraṇena upekkhako’’ti.
另外,就在同一处也说过——巴利
Aparampi tattheva vuttaṃ –
因为和我分离,我的妻子和母亲都活不下去;
明知而这样舍离,他因此就成了杀人者。
“ 如果是为了出家等目的而离开,即使知道,也不是杀者。
他确实对他们无所求,所以对他们的死也漠不关心。”巴利
‘‘Viyogena ca me jāyā, jananī ca na jīvati; Iti jānaṃ viyuñjanto, tadatthī hoti mārako. ‘‘Pabbajjādinimittañce, yāti jānaṃ na mārako; Anatthiko hi so tesaṃ, maraṇena upekkhako’’ti.
“装饰好之后带到面前”,是怀着“让他因为得不到而憔悴死去”这个意图才带上前来。正因如此,才说“如果因为惊恐而死,就是迷乱者”。在“因为得不到而憔悴死去”这里,应当知道省略了“巴拉基格”这个词。“以及尸体的臭气”,指的是蛇等尸体散发的气味。“天鹅花”,说的是天鹅等鸟的翼羽。巴利
Alaṅkaritvā upasaṃharatīti ‘‘alābhakena sussitvā maratū’’ti iminā adhippāyena upasaṃharati. Teneva ‘‘sace uttasitvā marati, visaṅketo’’ti vuttaṃ. Alābhakena sussitvā maratīti ettha ca pārājikanti pāṭhaseso daṭṭhabbo. Kuṇapagandhā cāti ahiādikuṇapānaṃ gandhā. Haṃsapupphanti haṃsādīnaṃ pakkhalomaṃ sandhāya vadati.
179 “非故意”这一说法,是针对没有察觉那种会导致死亡的行动方式而说的,所以注释里说“以此方式”等等。“不知者”这一说法,则是针对不知道自己在做会导致死亡的行动方式而说的,所以注释里说“此人将以此而死”等等。“不以死为意图者”这一说法,则是针对虽然知道这种方式、但并没有求死之心而说的,所以注释里说“不想死的人”等等。巴利
179.Asañciccāti idaṃ maraṇasaṃvattanikaupakkamassa asallakkhaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘iminā upakkamenā’’tiādi. Ajānantassāti idaṃ pana maraṇasaṃvattanikaupakkamakaraṇassa ajānanaṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘iminā ayaṃ marissatī’’tiādi. Namaraṇādhippāyassāti idaṃ upakkamaṃ jānantassapi maraṇādhippāyassa abhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘maraṇaṃ anicchantassā’’tiādi.
各种杂项的注释巴利
Pakiṇṇakakathāvaṇṇanā
“只是以忧心而说”,这句话表明:决断思惟就是与苦受相应。因为诸王多处于快乐之中,即使笑着说“杀掉他们”,但他们的笑是以消除灾祸等其它事情为对象,所以决断思惟就是与苦受相应。那么,如果有忧存在,它为什么不显现出来呢?因此说“因乐掺杂故”等话,意思是:由于前后两边生起的乐掺杂其中,而且已生起的忧没有相续不断地运转,所以即使当时有忧生起,也不显现。巴利
Domanassacittenevabhaṇatīti iminā sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā dukkhavedanāya sampayuttā evāti dasseti. Sukhabahulatāya hi rājāno hasamānāpi ‘‘ghātethā’’ti vadanti, hāso pana nesaṃ anatthavūpasamādiaññavisayoti sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā dukkhavedanāya sampayuttā eva. Sati pana domanasse kathaṃ taṃ nappakāsatīti āha ‘‘sukhavokiṇṇattā’’tiādi, pubbāpariyavasena ubhosu passesu uppajjanakasukhehi ākiṇṇattā uppannassa ca domanassassa anuppabandhanena pavattiyā abhāvato tadā uppannampi domanassaṃ nappakāsatīti attho.
已调伏事例的注释巴利
Vinītavatthuvaṇṇanā
180 成为欲死者:因为随着这个身体的坏灭,不意在生天或堕恶趣,所以从含义上说,就是成了欲死者。不知自己是欲死者:他们怀着这样的意趣,就叫做欲死者,却不知道自己就是欲死者。他们并不是不知道自己的心念活动。依世俗言说:是依前分阶段的世俗言说。因为在对以死亡为意趣作出决断的思惟刹那,并没有悲悯,所以这就不像出于悲悯而解开被绳绑住的猪那样,这就是这里的意趣。如其寿:把前面已说的意思用另一种说法再讲一遍,就是“如其相续”;所谓如其相续,就是如其寿命的限度。或者,如其相续就是如其延续;也就是说,只要在那个存在中,心相续的延续还没有中断而仍在进行,就住留到那时为止。巴利
180.Maraṇatthikāva hutvāti imassa kāyassa bhedena saggapāpanādhippāyattā atthato maraṇatthikāva hutvā. Maraṇatthikabhāvaṃ ajānantāti evaṃ adhippāyino maraṇatthikā nāma hontīti attano maraṇatthikabhāvaṃ ajānantā. Na hi te attano cittappavattiṃ na jānanti. Vohāravasenāti pubbabhāgavohāravasena, maraṇādhippāyassa sanniṭṭhāpakacetanākkhaṇe karuṇāya abhāvato kāruññena pāse baddhasūkaramocanaṃ viya na hotīti adhippāyo. Yathāyunāti vuttamevatthaṃ yathānusandhināti pariyāyantarena vuttaṃ, yathānusandhinā yathāyuparicchedenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yathānusandhināti yathānuppabandhena, yāva tasmiṃ bhave santānassa anuppabandho avicchinnappavatti hoti, tāva ṭhatvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
没有观察,就是没有仔细检查。向上或向下移动,是为了给后来的人让出位置,所以在座位排次中向上或向下移动。没有观察这件事,就是说后来的人没有仔细检查的必要。下面如果有任何东西,衣就不会起褶皱,所以说那里看不出褶皱。应当知道,这种观察只是针对在家人的物品而言。巴利
Appaṭivekkhitvāti anupaparikkhitvā. Uddhaṃ vā adho vā saṅkamantīti pacchā āgatānaṃ okāsadānatthaṃ nisinnapāḷiyā uddhaṃ vā adho vā gacchanti. Paccavekkhaṇakiccaṃ natthīti pacchā āgatehi upaparikkhaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Heṭṭhā kismiñci vijjamāne sāṭakaṃ vali na gaṇhātīti āha ‘‘tasmiṃ vali na paññāyatī’’ti. Paṭivekkhaṇañcedaṃ gihīnaṃ santakeyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在巴利圣典中,“杵竖起时”的意思是:两杵互相支撑而竖起来。“臼木具”是指为了臼而搬来的木制器具。“关联”是指与食物有关联,也就是说,是食物的障碍。巴利
Pāḷiyaṃ musale ussiteti aññamaññaṃ upatthambhetvā dvīsu musalesu ussitesūti attho. Udukkhalabhaṇḍikanti udukkhalatthāya ānītaṃ dārubhaṇḍaṃ. Paṭibaddhanti bhojanapaṭibaddhaṃ, bhojanantarāyanti vuttaṃ hoti.
181 “最上所作”在这里:因为“所作”这个词是抽象名词,所以虽然解释了它的意思是“最上业”,但业没法拿来施与,因此这里要通过转喻,把与称为布施的最上业相应的施食,直接当作“最上业”来理解。所以经文说“最初所得的施食”等等。巴利
181.Aggakārikanti ettha kārikā-saddassa bhāvavacanattā ‘‘aggakiriya’’nti atthaṃ vatvāpi yasmā kiriyaṃ dātuṃ na sakkā, tasmā dānasaṅkhātāya aggakiriyāya yuttaṃ piṇḍapātameva idha upacāravuttiyā ‘‘aggakiriyā’’ti gahetabbanti āha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ laddhapiṇḍapāta’’ntiādi.
182-183 “棒槌”是指挖掘用的锤子。“以格的变化”是指通过格的变格。“殊胜证得”:因为定和观极其明显,所以说“就像握在手中一样显现”。“中断”是指:为了不让殊胜证得受到散乱的干扰,而中断饮食。“殊胜证得”是指获得出世间法。“说明之后”就是告知之后。“中断,是不允许的”,意思是:圣者们只在那种情况下,才会向同分且知惭有愧的比丘告知自己所证得的殊胜;而那样的比丘,也不会以不恰当的邪命去寻求资具。因此,他们若对所寻求的资具生起后悔而中断饮食,是不允许的。因为对同分者说明之后,就不能中断。他们确实是如法的福田。正因如此,“因为可以对同分的、有惭有愧的比丘讲述”这句话,正是为了说明“中断,是不允许的”这一句的理由而说的,三部《结文》中都有记载。巴利
182-183.Daṇḍamuggaranti nikhādanamuggaraṃ. Vibhattibyattayenāti vibhattivipariṇāmena. Visesādhigamoti samādhi vipassanā ca ativiya pākaṭattā ‘‘hatthappatto viya dissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Upacchindatīti ‘‘visesādhigamassa vikkhepo mā hotū’’ti āhāraṃ upacchindati. Visesādhigamanti lokuttaradhammapaṭilābhaṃ. Byākaritvāti ārocetvā. Upacchindati, na vaṭṭatīti yasmā sabhāgānaṃ lajjibhikkhūnaṃyeva ariyā attanā adhigatavisesaṃ tādise kāraṇe sati ārocenti, te ca bhikkhū appatirūpāya anesanāya paccayaṃ na pariyesanti, tasmā tehi pariyesitapaccaye kukkuccaṃ uppādetvā āhāraṃ upacchindituṃ na vaṭṭatīti attho. Sabhāgānañhi byākatattā upacchindituṃ na labhati. Te hi kappiyakhettaṃ. Teneva ‘‘sabhāgānañhi lajjibhikkhūnaṃ kathetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘upacchindati, na vaṭṭatī’’ti imassa kāraṇaṃ dassentena vuttanti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ.
或者,“说明殊胜证得后”这句话,是为了显示殊胜已经被证得的状态而说的。由于在还没有越过证得的障碍时,中断饮食是被允许的,为了说明证得之后就不应该再中断,所以说“说明殊胜证得后中断饮食,是不允许的”。那么,圣者们会把自己证得的殊胜告诉别人吗?针对这个质疑,回答说“因为可以对同分的、有惭耻的比丘讲述”。我们认为这是这里更合理的解释,《结文》中也确实显示了这一含义。“洗衣”指洗涤袈裟。“洗衣棒”指洗衣用的棒子。巴利
Atha vā visesādhigamaṃ byākaritvāti idaṃ visesassa adhigatabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Adhigamantarāyaṃ asaṅkanteneva ca āhārupacchedo kātabboti anuññātattā adhigatena na kātabboti dassetuṃ ‘‘visesādhigamaṃ byākaritvā āhāraṃ upacchindati, na vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiṃ pana ariyā attanā adhigatavisesaṃ aññesaṃ ārocentīti imissā codanāya ‘‘sabhāgānañhi lajjibhikkhūnaṃ kathetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayamettha yuttataroti amhākaṃ khanti, gaṇṭhipadepi ayamattho dassitoyevāti. Bhaṇḍakaṃ dhovantāti cīvaraṃ dhovantā. Dhovanadaṇḍakanti bhaṇḍadhovanadaṇḍaṃ.
184 “我是恶作者”是指心里生起这样的恶作:“因为我的行为,他会不会死呢?”在所有这些事情上,对方即使未死,世尊也判定为土喇咤亚(重罪)。所以,他所作的行为无论有没有引起苦受,都不构成巴拉基格(根本罪),因此按照佛陀的教说,就只是土喇咤亚。巴利
184.Ahaṃ kukkuccakoti ‘‘mama kiriyāya mareyya nu kho, no vā’’ti evaṃ jātakukkuccako. Sabbatthāpi panettha evarūpesu vatthūsu amate thullaccayassa vuttattā tena katappayogena dukkhavedanā uppajjatu vā mā vā, pārājikāya abhāvato bhagavato vacanena thullaccayamevāti vadanti.
185 185. 因为胎儿由此掉落,所以叫堕胎药,也就是那一类药。因此说“由服用了它”等等。由于说到“或者称赞死亡”,所以通过间接的方式并不能免除罪过,因此说“所谓间接的方式并不存在”。巴利
185. Gabbho patati etenāti gabbhapātanaṃ, tādisaṃ bhesajjaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yena paribhuttenā’’tiādi . ‘‘Maraṇavaṇṇaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇeyyā’’ti vuttattā pariyāyato āpattimokkho na hotīti āha ‘‘pariyāyo nāma natthī’’ti.
“不怀胎”就是不能保住胎儿。胎儿因为风或虫类而毁坏时,没有业是不会毁坏的,基于这个意思,所以说“以两种方式”。不过《长部注》里说:“胎儿确实因为风、虫类和业这三种原因而毁坏”,接着又说:“但当胎儿是因业而毁坏时,即使是诸佛也无法阻止。”在这里,当胎儿因风或虫类而毁坏时,并不是过去的业给它制造了机会,而是以风或虫类为缘,使业成熟;但当业自己制造了机会时,就不一定要依靠风或虫类。基于这个意思,业被单独说成一种原因,应当这样理解。“虫类咬食后使它消失”要这样连接起来理解。为了让人不生育而给药的,如果是带着“胎儿会在子宫里生起之后再毁坏”的意图给的,那就和掘坑(设陷阱杀人)等时刻一样,是系属于业的;但如果是带着“胎儿在子宫里根本不会生起”的意图给的,那就完全不系属于业。巴利
Gabbhaṃ na gaṇhātīti gabbhaṃ na dhāreti. Vātena pāṇakehi vā gabbho vinassanto kammaṃ vinā na nassatīti adhippāyena ‘‘dvīhākārehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.26) pana ‘‘gabbho hi vātena pāṇakehi kammunā cāti tīhi kāraṇehi vinassatī’’ti vatvā ‘‘kammunā vinassante pana buddhāpi paṭibāhituṃ na sakkontī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha vātena pāṇakehi vā gabbhe vinassante na purimakammunā okāso kato, apica tappaccayā kammaṃ vipaccati, sayameva pana kammunā okāse kate na ekantena vāto pāṇakā vā apekkhitabbāti iminā adhippāyena kammassa visuṃ kāraṇabhāvo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pāṇakā khāditvā antaradhāpentīti yojetabbaṃ. Avijāyanatthāya bhesajjaṃ dentassa kucchiyaṃ uppajjitvā vinassissantīti iminā adhippāyena dinne opātakkhaṇanādīsu viya kammabaddho, kucchiyaṃ na uppajjissantīti iminā pana adhippāyena dinne nevatthi kammabaddho.
“同法者”是指在同一位导师的教法里一起修学的人。因为五类人都具有出离层面的戒,所以说“戒、信、慧同等”。从亲属已邀请之处,是指从自己或他们的亲属已邀请之处。为了病人的缘故,即使在没有被邀请的地方,因为佛陀已经允许通过暗示来求取,所以即使做了也如同没做,这叫“未作暗示”;而在“尊者,请说资具”这样没有作出邀请的地方,用暗示来求取,也叫“未作暗示”。巴利
Sahadhammikānanti ekassa satthuno sāsane sahasikkhamānadhammānaṃ. Pañcannampi vivaṭṭanissitasīlattā ‘‘samasīlasaddhāpaññāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Ñātakapavāritaṭṭhānatoti attano tesaṃ vā ñātakapavāritaṭṭhānato. Gilānassatthāya appavāritaṭṭhānatopi viññattiyā anuññātattā katāpi akatā viyāti akataviññatti, ‘‘vada, bhante, paccayenā’’ti evaṃ akatapavāraṇaṭṭhāne ca viññatti akataviññatti.
“准备”就是办妥。“不可以不做”在这里说的是恶作。关于同法者,按前面所说的方式,因为《库伦德注》里说“对这五种人,即使没有作暗示,也可以备办药物”,所以才这样说。“只要亲属们看见”,就是只要他的亲属们看见。父亲的姊妹是姑母,母亲的兄弟是舅父。“不能胜任”,就是做不了。“即使他们不乞求”,意思是他们如果想着“乞求很苦”而不来乞求。“作意之后”,这是从应当做的角度来说的;但在三本《结文》里写着:“即使不作意,也可以给。”除了这十种亲属,因为他们的子孙等也跟这些亲属相关联,所以也算亲属,因此也包含在这里面。由“因此其他人”这句话,可以知道是指非亲属。正因如此,才说“这些人的子孙相续”等等。“家族次第”就是各家族的顺序,也就是家族相续。怀着“他们会给我、会为我做”这样的期待而做事的人,因为在亲属中即使乞求后也可以接受,所以做医生的工作或者犯污家罪都不会成立,诸师是这样说的。在一切处都应了知决断:像“幼母”等一切处,应以“幼母的丈夫”等来连接,按前面所说的方式了知决断。巴利
Paṭiyādiyatīti sampādeti. Akātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti ettha dukkaṭaṃ vadanti. Sahadhammikesu vuttanayenevāti ‘‘imesampi pañcannaṃ akataviññattiyāpi bhesajjaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā kathitaṃ. Yāva ñātakā passantīti yāva tassa ñātakā passanti. Pitu bhaginī pitucchā. Mātu bhātā mātulo. Nappahontīti kātuṃ na sakkonti. Sacepi na yācantīti ‘‘yācituṃ dukkha’’nti adhippāyena yadi na yācanti. Ābhogaṃ katvāti idaṃ kattabbatādassanavasena vuttaṃ, ‘‘ābhogaṃ pana akatvāpi dātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu likhitaṃ. Ete dasa ñātake ṭhapetvāti tesaṃ puttanattādayopi tappaṭibaddhattā ñātakā evāti tepi ettheva saṅgahitā. Tena aññesanti iminā aññātakānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘etesaṃ puttaparamparāyā’’tiādi. Kulaparivaṭṭoti kulānaṃ paṭipāṭi, kulaparamparāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Mayhaṃ dassanti karissantī’’ti paccāsāya karontassapi yācitvāpi gahetabbaṭṭhānatāya ñātakesu vejjakammaṃ vā kuladūsakāpatti vā na hotīti vadanti. Sabbapadesupi vinicchayo veditabboti cūḷamātuyātiādīsu sabbapadesu ‘‘cūḷamātuyā sāmiko’’tiādinā yojetvā heṭṭhā vuttanayena vinicchayo veditabbo.
按前面说的方式去寻求,这句话是在点明“由亲属沙弥等”所说的意思。不期望,是指不抱着“他们会给我、会替我做事”这种为自己的利益而期待的心态。但如果是期望能对比丘僧团有所助益,那就可以做。即使对方说“请说一下药”,就像“不过彼此之间可以交谈”这句话因为是间接说法所以可行一样,按前面说的方式,用“拿这个那个去做”这类间接说法来讲,也完全没有过失——老师们是这样说的。巴利
Vuttanayena pariyesitvāti iminā ‘‘ñātisāmaṇerehi vā’’tiādinā vuttamatthaṃ atidissati. Apaccāsīsantenāti ‘‘mayhaṃ dassanti karissantī’’ti evaṃ attano atthāya apaccāsīsantena. Bhikkhusaṅghassa pana upakārakattaṃ paccāsīsantena kātuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Bhesajjaṃ ācikkhathā’’ti vuttepi yathā ‘‘aññamaññaṃ pana kathā kātabbā’’ti idaṃ pariyāyattā vaṭṭati, evaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayena ‘‘idañcidañca gahetvā karontī’’ti iminā pariyāyena kathentassapi nevatthi dosoti ācariyā.
不懂戒律特征、又没有师父的人,因为不可能有与戒律相符的言行,所以这样的利得根本不会产生,因此说“这名为师父的那一份”。意思是说:这是精通戒律的师父应当得到的那一份。即使是为了供花而布施的,如果用不如法的方式去安排处理,就不妥当,所以说“依如法的方式”,意思是要以“请把花拿来”这类如法的言语方式来做。巴利
Vinayalakkhaṇaṃ ajānantassa anācariyassa tadanurūpavohārāsambhavato īdisassa lābhassa uppatti nāma natthīti ‘‘ācariyabhāgo nāmāya’’nti vuttaṃ, vinaye pakataññunā ācariyena labhitabbabhāgo ayanti vuttaṃ hoti. Pupphapūjanatthāya dinnepi akappiyavohārena vidhānassa ayuttattā ‘‘kappiyavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘pupphaṃ āharathā’’tiādinā kappiyavohāravasenāti attho.
如果有人说“请做护卫经”,他们就去做了,那就落入给在家人做事的处境,所以文中说“若有人说‘请做护卫经,尊者’,就不应该做”;但如果有人说“请诵”,因为这是处在请求说法的情形,所以说“应该做”。因为即使没人请求,说法也是可以的,更何况有人请求呢。“摇动后擦拭经绳”,这是说明做护卫经的人应当遵循的做法。从寺院……(中略)……恶作,是指只施给非亲属时才犯恶作。“若他们不知”,意思是如果他们不懂得这样说。“水”,指施水。“撤去脚垫时,人们会认为不吉祥”,所以说“不应撤去脚垫”。“可以去”,意思是即使有人说“为了随行请来”,这样考虑之后也可以前往。巴利
Yadi ‘‘parittaṃ karothā’’ti vutte karonti, gihiveyyāvaccakaraṇaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhatīti ‘‘parittaṃ karotha, bhanteti vutte na kātabba’’nti vuttaṃ, ‘‘bhaṇathā’’ti vutte pana dhammakathāya ajjhesanaṭṭhāne ṭhitattā ‘‘kātabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Dhammañhi anajjhiṭṭhenapi kathetuṃ vaṭṭati, pageva ajjhiṭṭhena. Cāletvā suttaṃ parimajjitvāti parittaṃ karontena kātabbavidhiṃ dasseti. Vihārato…pe… dukkaṭanti aññātakānaṃyeva dadato dukkaṭaṃ. No ce jānantīti yadi evaṃ vattuṃ na jānanti. Udakanti dakkhiṇodakaṃ. Pādesu apanītesu avamaṅgalasaññino hontīti āha ‘‘na pādā apanetabbā’’ti . Gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti ‘‘parivāratthāya āgacchantū’’ti vuttepi evaṃ sallakkhetvā gantuṃ vaṭṭati.
“未触过的钵食”是指从在家人手里得到的、自己或其他出家人没有碰过顶部的食物。说到“盘”,要知道这里连钵也算在内。“公开的盗贼”是指觊觎王位、人所共知的盗贼。在“盗贼那伽的故事”中,《小义释》里说:“据说如果给盗贼那伽已经碰过的食物,他会生气;没碰过的又不如法。长老就用拿钵的那只手取了食物顶部,把全部食物都放进钵里布施给他,他因此很满意。就算先把少量食物分出来放在一边,心想‘这些是我的’,然后再连同那部分食物把全部食物都布施出去,也是可以的。”巴利
Anāmaṭṭhapiṇḍapātoti apabbajitassa hatthato laddho attanā aññena vā pabbajitena aggahitaaggo piṇḍapāto. Thālaketi iminā pattopi gahitoyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dāmarikacorassāti rajjaṃ patthayamānassa pākaṭacorassa. Coranāgavatthūti ettha ‘‘coranāgassa kira āmaṭṭhaṃ dento kujjhissati, anāmaṭṭhaṃ na vaṭṭatīti thero pattaggahaṇahattheneva aggaṃ gahetvā patte bhattaṃ sabbamadāsi, so tena tussi. ‘Ettakaṃ mayha’nti bhattassa ekapasseyeva thokaṃ ṭhapetvāpi puna tena saddhiṃ sabbampi dātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti cūḷagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ.
由于没得到财物和法,自己与他人之间就出现了裂缝、空隙、裂痕;把这些填补、遮盖、连接起来,就叫摄益。这个世间共同生活的人,因为得不到财物和法,就有两种裂缝;为了让这些裂缝不显现出来,就像用椅垫盖住椅子一样,用财物和法去填补,这就叫作财物摄益和法摄益。其中,法摄益对任何人都不能不做,因为对任何在家人或出家人,都应该以法来摄受。而“摄益该对谁做、不该对谁做”这句话,是针对财物摄益说的。驱逐,是指在方圆三由旬内抢掠,把人们赶跑,使那些地方成为他人无法安住之处。为僧团而拿来,是指从常食处为当天所需而拿来。殊胜布帛彩绘敷具,是指多种上等彩绘敷具。巴利
Āmisassa dhammassa ca alābhena attano parassa ca antare sambhavantassa chiddassa vivarassa bhedassa paṭisantharaṇaṃ pidahanaṃ gaṇhanaṃ paṭisanthāro. Ayañhi lokasannivāso alabbhamānena āmisena ca dhammena cāti dvīhi chiddo, tassa taṃ chiddaṃ yathā na paññāyati, evaṃ pīṭhassa viya paccattharaṇena āmisena ca dhammena ca paṭisantharaṇaṃ āmisapaṭisanthāro dhammapaṭisanthāro cāti vuccati. Tattha dhammapaṭisanthāro kassaci na kātabbo natthi. Yassa kassaci hi gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā dhammena saṅgaho kātabboyeva. ‘‘Paṭisanthāro pana kassa kātabbo, kassa na kātabbo’’ti idaṃ pana āmisapaṭisanthāraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ubbāsetvāti samantato tiyojanaṃ vilumpanto manusse palāpetvā aññesaṃ avāsaṃ katvā. Saṅghassatthāya āhaṭāti pākavaṭṭato taṃdivasassatthāya āhaṭā. Varapotthacittattharaṇanti anekappakārauttamarūpavicittattharaṇaṃ.
187 在十七群比丘中,因为之前有一个人被手指戳中而死,所以在剩下的十六人里,除去那个坐在腹部上的人,就说“其余十五人”。“像投石机上的石头”,意思是像放在投石机上的石头。“以甘马为目的”,指以执行呵责等甘马为目的。“使进入”,就是让他进去。“恶住处”,指被凶暴众生占据的住处。巴利
187. Sattarasavaggiyesu pubbe ekassa aṅgulipatodena māritattā sesasoḷasajanesu udaraṃ āruhitvā nisinnamekaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘sesāpi pannarasa janā’’ti vuttaṃ. Adūhalapāsāṇā viyāti adūhale āropitapāsāṇā viya. Kammādhippāyāti tajjanīyādikammakaraṇādhippāyā. Āvāhetvāti āvisāpetvā. Vāḷavihāranti caṇḍasattehi adhiṭṭhitavihāraṃ.
189 关于“即使被树压住也不死”等等,应当说明的内容,在草木学处的注释里自然会讲到。因为那里是这样说的(巴吉帝亚注释92)——巴利
189.Yorukkhena otthatopi na maratītiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ bhūtagāmasikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ sayameva vakkhati. Evañhi tattha vuttaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 92) –
在《人身巴拉基格注释》中,所有注释书都说:“如果比丘被树压住,或掉进坑里,能够从一侧砍树或挖地出来,即使是为了活命,自己也不该做;但另一位比丘挖地或砍树,或从活树上砍下枝条,把那棵树推倒,让他脱身出来,这是可以的,无犯。”这里看不出有什么理由。不过,只见到“诸比丘,我允许在野火燃烧时放逆火、诵护经”这一句经文。如果这和那件事相符,那么“自己不可以做、别人可以做”这个差别就没办法成立。如果说为自己做的时候是以自爱心和不善心来做,别人则是以悲心来做,所以无犯,这也不是理由。因为即使以善心也会犯这条罪。然而,由于所有注释书都这么说,不能否定,应当在这里寻找合理的依据,或者依靠对注释师的信心来接受。巴利
‘‘Manussaviggahapārājikavaṇṇanāyaṃ pana sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu ‘sace bhikkhu rukkhena vā ajjhotthato hoti opāte vā patito, sakkā ca hoti ekena passena rukkhaṃ chinditvā bhūmiṃ vā khaṇitvā nikkhamituṃ, jīvitahetupi attanā na kātabbaṃ, aññena pana bhikkhunā bhūmiṃ vā khaṇitvā rukkhaṃ vā chinditvā allarukkhato vā daṇḍakaṃ chinditvā taṃ rukkhaṃ pavaṭṭetvā nikkhamāpetuṃ vaṭṭati, anāpattī’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha kāraṇaṃ na dissati, ‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, davaḍāhe ḍayhamāne paṭaggiṃ dātuṃ parittaṃ kātu’nti (cūḷava. 283) idaṃ pana ekameva suttaṃ dissati. Sace etassa anulomaṃ, attano na vaṭṭati, aññassa vaṭṭatīti idaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ na sakkā laddhuṃ. Attano atthāya karonto attasinehena akusalacitteneva karoti, paro pana kāruññena. Tasmā anāpattīti ce, etampi akāraṇaṃ. Kusalacittenapi hi imaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati, sabbaṭṭhakathāsu pana vuttattā na sakkā paṭisedhetuṃ, gavesitabbā ettha yutti, aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ vā saddhāya gantabba’’nti.
所以,这里有人以其他方式加以发挥的,以及在结释里所说的理由,都不应该当作核心内容来信受。巴利
Tasmā yaṃ ettha ito aññathā kenaci papañcitaṃ, gaṇṭhipadesu ca kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ na sārato paccetabbaṃ.
190 即使在干燥的地方,只要他放火,并且怀着烧掉的意图去点燃,也同样犯巴吉帝亚。在干燥的地方,或者把干燥的东西判定为“不干燥”后放火,犯恶作。出于玩耍的意图也是这样。而玩耍的意图,应当从噼啪作响的声音等方面来理解。与火相对的火,叫回火。作保护,就是做守护。自己生起,是指被风吹动的竹子等互相摩擦而生的火。无燃料,就是没有柴薪。巴利
190.Alla…pe… pācittiyanti sukkhaṭṭhānepi aggiṃ pātetvā iminā adhippāyena ālimpentassa pācittiyameva. Dukkaṭanti sukkhaṭṭhāne vā sukkhaṃ ‘‘asukkha’’nti avavatthapetvā vā aggiṃ pātentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Kīḷādhippāyepi eseva nayo. Kīḷādhippāyo ca paṭapaṭāyamānasaddassādavaseneva veditabbo. Paṭipakkhabhūto aggi paṭaggi. Parittakaraṇanti ārakkhakaraṇaṃ. Sayaṃ vā uṭṭhitanti vāteritānaṃ veḷuādīnaṃ aññamaññasaṅghaṭṭanena samuṭṭhitaṃ. Nirupādānoti indhanarahito.
191-192 191-192. 仅仅因为越过界地就构成巴拉基格,所以当说“以两下”时,由于期待以两下打击致死,若缺一下则两下不成立,因此犯巴拉基格。然而,若限定为“唯以两下”,他们就说“以一下打击致死时不构成巴拉基格”。对于先前已施加强力冲击者,由于随先前的惯行习气,诸法只是移至他处,而命根并不在那里,所以说为“断头者”。此处的“此所依”指刑场。由于说到“以饮料受用”,他们说“盐酸粥是时分饮料”。巴利
191-192.Khettameva otiṇṇattā pārājikanti ‘‘dvīhī’’ti vutte dvīhipi pahārehi maraṇassa paccāsīsanato ekena vinā dvinnaṃ abhāvato ca pārājikaṃ. ‘‘Dvīhiyevāti niyamite pana ekena pahārena mārite natthi pārājika’’nti vadanti. Paṭhamaṃ āhitabalavegassa pubbānuciṇṇavasena dhammānaṃ desantaruppattiyā gamanamattaṃ ṭhapetvā jīvitindriyassa tattha avijjamānattā ‘‘sīsacchedakassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Imassa vatthussāti āghātanavatthussa. ‘‘Pānaparibhogenāti vuttattā loṇasovīrakaṃ yāmakālika’’nti vadanti.
1 2 3 4